EPson SC P5k - SM

SERVICE MANUAL
Large Format Color Inkjet Printer
SC-P5000 Series
Epson Stylus Pro 4900
Epson Stylus Pro 4910
SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)
SEIJ10007
Notice:
 All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
 The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
 All efforts have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
 The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
General Notice: Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.
Copyright © 2016 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

PS SALES & MARKETING (CS) DEPARTMENT

PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1) Personal injury and 2) Damage to equipment.
DANGER Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in performing
procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.
WARNING Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.
The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.
DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE OR
REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR ALL
ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON POWER
SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.
4. WHEN DISASSEMBLING OR ASSEMBLING A PRODUCT, MAKE SURE TO WEAR GLOVES TO AVOID INJURY FROM METAL PARTS WITH
SHARP EDGES.
WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT TO
THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTI-STATIC
WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF SECOND-
SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON WARRANTY.
6. WHEN AIR DUSTER IS USED ON THE REPAIR AND THE MAINTENANCE WORK, THE USE OF THE AIR DUSTER PRODUCTS CONTAINING
THE INFLAMMABLE GAS IS PROHIBITED.
7. MAKE SURE AN ANTIVIRUS SOFTWARE IS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER USED FOR SERVICE SUPPORT. BE SURE TO HAVE THE
LATEST VIRUS DEFINITION FILE FOR THE SOFTWARE.

About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.
Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 3.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and assembling the product.
CHAPTER 4.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 5.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of Epson-approved lubricants and
adhesives required for servicing the product.
CHAPTER 6.APPENDIX
Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connectors
• Panel Menu Maps
• ASP List
• Exploded Diagrams

Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a procedure or an action.
Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of, equipment.
May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may also provide additional
information that is related to a specific subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss of life.
Indicates that a particular task must be carried out according to a certain standard after disassembly and before re-assembly, otherwise the quality of the components
in question may be adversely affected.
Indicates that lubrication is needed for the parts after disassembly, when doing a maintenance or replacing a part with a new one.
Lubrication

Revision Status
Revision Date of Issue Description

A October 8, 2010 First release
Revise:
Full-fledged revision. Refer to the revision bars in the manual. The following are the major revised items.
<Chapter 3>
• 3.4.3.9 AID Board Added reassembly caution.
• 3.4.6.3 Pickup Roller Added detailed description to the disassembly procedure.
• 3.4.6.5 Retard Roller Added disassembly caution and reassembly check items.
• 3.4.8.2 Cutter Motor Assy Revised the disassembly procedure.
• 3.4.12.9 EJ Planet Lever Newly added item.
<Chapter 4>
B March 31, 2011 • 4.1.3 Description of Adjustments Deleted "Adjustment Value Reset".
• 4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation Added the list of information saved to CSV files.
• 4.10.8 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment Revised the UI and operation procedure of the service program.
• 4.12.3.2 Ink Charge Revised the operation procedure.
• 4.12.6.2 Ink Charge Revised the operation procedure.
• 4.14 Boards Related Checks and AdjustmentsDeleted "Adjustment Value Reset".
• 4.14.3 AID Function Check Revised the UI and operation procedure of the service program and added the
list of NG judgment.
• 4.15.3 Encoder Check Added steps.
• 4.16 SpectroProofer Related Adjustments Determined the pending items.
Revise:
<Chapter 3>
• 3.4.3.2 Network Board Added information of new board applied for ENERGY STAR Ver.2.0.
C January 8, 2014 <Chapter 4>
• 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired PartAdded caution.
• 4.6 Image & Test Print Added caution.
• 4.11.6.2 Adjusting Method Revised tool list, added caution.

Revise:
<Chapter 1>
• 1.4.2 Part Names Added "ILS30EP"
• 1.5.1.1 SC-P5000 Series Setup Menu Added "ILS30EP"
<Chapter 2>
• 2.9 Problems on SpectroProofer Partially added
D August 26,2014 <Chapter 3>
• 3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover Added Check point
• 3.4.10.1 Color Measurement Device Added "ILS30EP"
<Chapter 4>
• 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part "Control Panel" adjustment Item was added
• 4.6 Image & Test Print "Adjustment pattern for CR direction head slant" Partially revised
• 4.11.4.1 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment Added Check point
Revise:
<Chapter 3>
E March 31, 2015
• 3.1.1 Precautions Partially added
• 4.1.4 Tools/Consumables for Adjustments Added "caution"
Revise:
<Chapter 1>
• 1.1 Product Description Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
• 1.2 Basic Specifications Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
• 1.3.2.2 Designated Paper Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
• 1.5 Control Panel Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
<Chapter 2>
• 2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests Changed
• 2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error Partially changed
F November 22,2016 • 2.5 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
• 2.9 Problems on SpectroProofer Partially changed
<Chapter 3>
• 3.2 Parts Diagram Added “Antistatic Cloth Unit”
• 3.3 Disassembly Flowchart Added “Antistatic Cloth Unit”
• 3.4.2.18 Left Roll Cover/Right Roll Cover Procedure has been added
• 3.4.3.1 Main Board Changed “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”
• 3.4.4.3 CR Scale Added “CAUTION”
• 3.4.7.7 Antistatic Cloth Unit Newly added

<Chapter 4>
• 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part Partially changed
• 4.1.3 Description of Adjustments Partially changed
• 4.1.4 Tools/Consumables for Adjustments Partially changed
• 4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations Partially changed
• 4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure Partially changed
• 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure Partially changed
• 4.5 Installing Firmware “CAUTION has been changed.
• 4.10.2 CR Belt Adjustment Partially changed
• 4.11.1 Head ID Check & Input Partially changed
• 4.11.5 Auto Bi-D Adjustment Partially changed
• 4.11.6 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) Procedure has been changed
• 4.12.2 Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check Partially changed
• 4.12.3.2 Ink Charge “CAUTION” had been added
• 4.12.8 LLK/V Ink Change (SC-P5000 Series) Newly added
F November 22,2016 • 4.13.1 PF Belt Adjustment Partially changed
• 4.13.7.1 PW Adjustment Procedure has been changed
• 4.13.9 Cutter Belt Tension Check Partially changed
• 4.14.4 MAC Address Check & Input Procedure has been changed
• 4.14.6 Default Reset Procedure has been changed
• 4.14.7.1 Button Operation Check Partially changed
• 4.14.8 Color Mode Settings (SC-P5000 Series) Newly added
• 4.16.3 SpectroProofer Measurement Precision Check (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 only)
Partially changed
• 4.17 SpectroProofer Checker (SC-P5000 Series) Newly added
<Chapter 5>
• 5.4 Cleaning Partially added
• 5.5 Lubrication Parts code of the grease (G-71) is changed.
<Chapter 6>
• 6.3 Panel Menu Map Information for SC-P5000 Series has been added.
• 6.4 Part names used in this manual Partially changed

<Chapter 2>
• 2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests Partially changed
• 2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error Partially changed
<Chapter 3>
G March 25, 2019
• 3.4.4.3 CR Scale Partially changed
<Chapter 4>
• 4.5 Installing Firmware Partially changed
• 4.12.8 LLK/V Ink Change (SC-P5000 Series) Partially changed

SC-P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 Revision G
Contents
Chapter 1 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure ........................................................................ 69
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting ................................................................. 69
1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 16 2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved ........................................ 69
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................ 19 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case ............................................. 69
1.2.1 Basic Specifications ................................................................................... 19 2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests ................................................................. 70
1.2.2 Electric Specifications ............................................................................... 19
2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error ........................................................................ 73
1.2.3 Ink Specifications ...................................................................................... 20
1.2.4 General Specifications ............................................................................... 20 2.4 Remedies for Error Messages related to SpectroProofer ................................... 97
1.2.5 Reliability/Durability ................................................................................. 21 2.5 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles .................................................................. 99
1.3 Printing Specifications ........................................................................................ 22 2.6 Trouble on Paper Feeding ................................................................................ 106
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications .......................................................................... 22 2.7 Printer does not Operate ................................................................................... 110
1.3.2 Paper Specification .................................................................................... 22
2.8 Abnormal Operations ....................................................................................... 112
1.3.2.1 Supported Paper ................................................................................. 22
1.3.2.2 Designated Paper ................................................................................ 24 2.9 Problems on SpectroProofer ............................................................................. 114
1.3.3 Printable Area ............................................................................................ 33 2.10 Trouble on Service Program ........................................................................... 118
1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification .............................................................. 34 2.11 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer .......................................................................... 121
1.3.5 Cutting of Roll Paper ................................................................................. 35
2.12 Trouble on Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment program ............................ 122
1.4 Hardware Specifications ..................................................................................... 36
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight ............................................................................. 36 Chapter 3 DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY
1.4.2 Part Names ................................................................................................. 37
1.5 Control Panel ...................................................................................................... 39 3.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 124
1.5.1 Setup Menu ................................................................................................ 46 3.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 124
1.5.1.1 SC-P5000 Series Setup Menu ............................................................ 46 3.1.2 Cautions after assembling ........................................................................ 126
1.5.1.2 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 Setup Menu .......................................... 53 3.1.3 Orientation Definition .............................................................................. 126
1.5.2 Maintenance Mode .................................................................................... 62 3.1.4 Recommended Tools ............................................................................... 127
1.5.3 Serviceman Mode ...................................................................................... 64 3.2 Parts Diagram ................................................................................................... 128
3.3 Disassembly Flowchart .................................................................................... 139
Chapter 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure ............................................................. 148
2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................ 68 3.4.1 Preparation for servicing ......................................................................... 148
2.1.1 Preliminary Check ..................................................................................... 68 3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit ..................................................................... 148
2.1.1.1 Check for the usage environment ....................................................... 68 3.4.1.2 Roll Unit ........................................................................................... 149
2.1.1.2 Recurrence check of the trouble ......................................................... 68 3.4.1.3 Paper Cassette .................................................................................. 150
2.1.1.3 Check for the counter values/history .................................................. 68 3.4.1.4 Cutter Replacement .......................................................................... 151
2.1.1.4 Test print check .................................................................................. 68 3.4.1.5 Maintenance box 1 ........................................................................... 152
10
3.4.1.6 Maintenance Box2 ............................................................................ 153 3.4.4.4 Ink Mark Sensor ............................................................................... 200
3.4.1.7 Ink Cartridge Replacement ............................................................... 154 3.4.4.5 CR Unit/CR Belt .............................................................................. 202
3.4.1.8 Spindle .............................................................................................. 155 3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy .............................................................................. 206
3.4.1.9 Mounter ............................................................................................ 156 3.4.4.7 APG Sensor ...................................................................................... 207
3.4.2 Housing .................................................................................................... 157 3.4.4.8 Oil pad holder ................................................................................... 209
3.4.2.1 Printer Cover .................................................................................... 157 3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism ............................................................................ 210
3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover ............................................................................ 158 3.4.5.1 PF Motor .......................................................................................... 210
3.4.2.3 Printer Cover Sensor ........................................................................ 160 3.4.5.2 PF Encoder ....................................................................................... 211
3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover ......................................................................... 161 3.4.5.3 PF Scale ............................................................................................ 212
3.4.2.5 Left Cover ......................................................................................... 163 3.4.5.4 PF Belt .............................................................................................. 213
3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover ........................................................................... 164 3.4.5.5 Suction Fan ....................................................................................... 214
3.4.2.7 Right Cover ...................................................................................... 165 3.4.5.6 PE Sensor ......................................................................................... 216
3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/Right IC Cover Frame/ 3.4.5.7 2nd PE Sensor .................................................................................. 220
Left IC Sensor/Right IC Sensor ....................................................... 166 3.4.5.8 PW Sensor ........................................................................................ 221
3.4.2.9 Front Cover ....................................................................................... 168 3.4.5.9 Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2 ............................................................. 223
3.4.2.10 Front Cover Sensor ......................................................................... 169 3.4.5.10 Release Motor Assy ....................................................................... 225
3.4.2.11 Rear Cover ...................................................................................... 170 3.4.5.11 Release Sensor ................................................................................ 226
3.4.2.12 Rear Unit ........................................................................................ 171 3.4.5.12 Edge Release Assy ......................................................................... 227
3.4.2.13 Rear Unit Sensor ............................................................................ 172 3.4.5.13 Edge Sensor .................................................................................... 229
3.4.2.14 Board Tray ...................................................................................... 173 3.4.6 ASF Unit .................................................................................................. 230
3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover .......................................................................... 174 3.4.6.1 ASF Motor Assy ............................................................................... 230
3.4.2.16 CR Cover ........................................................................................ 175 3.4.6.2 ASF Sub Motor Assy ....................................................................... 231
3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/Mid-Left Cover .................................................. 176 3.4.6.3 Pickup Roller .................................................................................... 232
3.4.2.18 Left Roll Cover/Right Roll Cover .................................................. 177 3.4.6.4 Assist Roller Sensor/Retard Roller Sensor/
3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components .................................................................... 179 Pickup Unit Sensor .......................................................................... 236
3.4.3.1 Main Board ....................................................................................... 179 3.4.6.5 Retard Roller .................................................................................... 239
3.4.3.2 Network Board ................................................................................. 182 3.4.6.6 Paper Empty Sensor ......................................................................... 242
3.4.3.3 Power Supply Box ............................................................................ 184 3.4.6.7 Paper Cassette Sensor ....................................................................... 245
3.4.3.4 Power Supply Board ......................................................................... 186 3.4.7 ROLL Unit ............................................................................................... 247
3.4.3.5 SUB Board ....................................................................................... 188 3.4.7.1 Roll Unit Sensor ............................................................................... 247
3.4.3.6 SUB-B Board ................................................................................... 189 3.4.7.2 Roll Lock Sensor .............................................................................. 248
3.4.3.7 SUB-C Board ................................................................................... 190 3.4.7.3 ATC Motor Assy .............................................................................. 250
3.4.3.8 SUB-D Board ................................................................................... 191 3.4.7.4 Roll Feeding Motor Assy ................................................................. 251
3.4.3.9 AID Board ........................................................................................ 192 3.4.7.5 Paper Guide Sensor .......................................................................... 252
3.4.3.10 LED Board ..................................................................................... 193 3.4.7.6 Roll Feeding Sensor ......................................................................... 253
3.4.3.11 Control Panel Board ....................................................................... 194 3.4.7.7 Antistatic Cloth Unit ........................................................................ 254
3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism ................................................................................ 195 3.4.8 Cutter Unit ............................................................................................... 257
3.4.4.1 CR Motor .......................................................................................... 195 3.4.8.1 Cutter Cover ..................................................................................... 257
3.4.4.2 CR Encoder ...................................................................................... 197 3.4.8.2 Cutter Motor Assy ............................................................................ 258
3.4.4.3 CR Scale ........................................................................................... 198 3.4.8.3 Cutter HP Sensor .............................................................................. 259
11
3.4.8.4 Cutter Unit ........................................................................................ 261 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part .................................. 314
3.4.9 Ink System Mechanism ............................................................................ 262 4.1.3 Description of Adjustments ..................................................................... 326
3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy .............................................................................. 262 4.1.4 Tools/Consumables for Adjustments ....................................................... 336
3.4.9.2 Printhead ........................................................................................... 265 4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations .......................................................... 338
3.4.9.3 IS Unit .............................................................................................. 266 4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY/NVRAM Viewer ........................................... 339
3.4.9.4 Wiper ................................................................................................ 269 4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure ........................................................................ 339
3.4.9.5 Wiper Cleaner ................................................................................... 270 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure ....................................................................... 339
3.4.9.6 Head Cap .......................................................................................... 271 4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation ........................................................... 340
3.4.9.7 Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder ............................................... 272
4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) ......................................................................... 345
3.4.9.8 Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder ..................................................... 275
3.4.9.9 Maintenance box 1 Holder ............................................................... 278 4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) ........................................................................... 346
3.4.9.10 Ink Tubes ........................................................................................ 280 4.5 Installing Firmware .......................................................................................... 347
3.4.9.11 Head FFC ....................................................................................... 282 4.6 Image & Test Print ........................................................................................... 349
3.4.9.12 Right Holder FFC ........................................................................... 285
4.7 Counter Reset ................................................................................................... 352
3.4.9.13 Left Holder FFC ............................................................................. 286
3.4.9.14 Decompression Pump ..................................................................... 287 4.8 References ........................................................................................................ 354
3.4.10 Color Measurement Device and Backing Replacement ........................ 288 4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag ..................................................................................... 355
3.4.10.1 Color Measurement Device ............................................................ 288 4.10 CR Related Check & Adjustments ................................................................. 356
3.4.10.2 Backing/White calibration tile holder ............................................ 289 4.10.1 FFC Position Check ............................................................................... 356
3.4.11 Housing .................................................................................................. 290 4.10.1.1 FFC Position Check after replacing the Head FFC ........................ 356
3.4.11.1 Upper Cover ................................................................................... 290 4.10.1.2 FFC Position Check after replacing the tube ................................. 357
3.4.11.2 I/F Cover ......................................................................................... 291 4.10.2 CR Belt Adjustment ............................................................................... 359
3.4.11.3 Right Cover .................................................................................... 292 4.10.3 PG Height Check & Adjustment ........................................................... 361
3.4.11.4 Left Cover ....................................................................................... 293 4.10.4 APG Check ............................................................................................ 366
3.4.11.5 Front Cover ..................................................................................... 294 4.10.5 CR Encoder and Scale Check ................................................................ 367
3.4.11.6 Magnet Latch .................................................................................. 295 4.10.6 CR Speed Initialize ................................................................................ 368
3.4.12 Color Measurement Device Parts .......................................................... 297 4.10.7 Active Damper Adjustment ................................................................... 369
3.4.12.1 Main-C Board ................................................................................. 297 4.10.8 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment ................................................. 370
3.4.12.2 Encoder for paper pressing motor .................................................. 299
4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 372
3.4.12.3 Thermistor ...................................................................................... 300
4.11.1 Head ID Check & Input ......................................................................... 372
3.4.12.4 Drying Fan ...................................................................................... 301
4.11.2 Nozzle Check ......................................................................................... 374
3.4.12.5 Paper Pressing Motor ..................................................................... 302
4.11.3 Cleaning ................................................................................................. 375
3.4.12.6 CR HP Sensor ................................................................................. 304
4.11.4 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment .......................................... 376
3.4.12.7 Backing Sensor ............................................................................... 305
4.11.4.1 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment ............................................ 376
3.4.12.8 CR Motor ........................................................................................ 308
4.11.4.2 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment ............................................. 379
3.4.12.9 EJ Planet Lever ............................................................................... 310
4.11.5 Auto Bi-D Adjustment ........................................................................... 381
4.11.6 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) ...................................................... 382
Chapter 4 ADJUSTMENT
4.11.6.1 Adjustment Overview .................................................................... 382
4.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 313 4.11.6.2 Adjusting Method ........................................................................... 383
4.1.1 Precautions ............................................................................................... 313
12
4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments ................................................ 395 4.15.1 Motor Measurement Adjustment ........................................................... 434
4.12.1 Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange ................................................... 395 4.15.2 Sensor Check ......................................................................................... 435
4.12.2 Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check ........................................... 396 4.15.3 Encoder Check ....................................................................................... 440
4.12.3 Ink Eject and Initial Charge ................................................................... 397 4.16 SpectroProofer Related Adjustments ............................................................. 442
4.12.3.1 Ink Eject ......................................................................................... 397 4.16.1 SpectroProofer Sensor Check ................................................................ 442
4.12.3.2 Ink Charge ...................................................................................... 398 4.16.1.1 Backing Sensor Check ................................................................... 442
4.12.4 Ink Selector Movement Check .............................................................. 399 4.16.1.2 Thermistor Check ........................................................................... 443
4.12.5 ILS & CSIC Check ................................................................................ 400 4.16.2 SpectroProofer Movement Check ......................................................... 444
4.12.5.1 ILS Check ....................................................................................... 400 4.16.2.1 Fan Function Check ....................................................................... 444
4.12.5.2 CSIC Check .................................................................................... 401 4.16.2.2 CR Function Check ........................................................................ 444
4.12.6 Tubes Cleaning (and Ink Charge per Two Rows) ................................. 402 4.16.2.3 Paper Press Function Check ........................................................... 445
4.12.6.1 Tubes Cleaning ............................................................................... 402 4.16.3 SpectroProofer Measurement Precision Check
4.12.6.2 Ink Charge ...................................................................................... 403 (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 only) ....................................................... 446
4.12.7 Leak Check (visually) ............................................................................ 404 4.16.4 SpectroProofer Serial Number Check & Input ...................................... 448
4.12.8 LLK/V Ink Change (SC-P5000 Series) ................................................. 405
4.17 SpectroProofer Checker (SC-P5000 Series) ................................................... 449
4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments ............................................... 406 4.17.1 Inspection Outline .................................................................................. 449
4.13.1 PF Belt Adjustment ................................................................................ 406 4.17.2 Inspection Procedure ............................................................................. 449
4.13.2 PF Encoder and Scale Check ................................................................. 408
4.13.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment ....................................... 409 Chapter 5 MAINTENANCE
4.13.4 Rear AD Adjustment ............................................................................. 412
4.13.5 Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment ....................................... 413 5.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 452
4.13.6 Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment ....................................... 416 5.2 Setting Up/Storing the Printer .......................................................................... 454
4.13.7 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment ..................................................... 418 5.2.1 Setting Up ................................................................................................ 454
4.13.7.1 PW Adjustment .............................................................................. 418 5.2.2 Storing the Printer and Cleaning the Ink Path ......................................... 454
4.13.7.2 T&B&S Adjustment ....................................................................... 418 5.3 Transportation .................................................................................................. 455
4.13.8 Cut Position Check & Adjustment ........................................................ 420
4.13.9 Cutter Belt Tension Check ..................................................................... 421 5.4 Cleaning ............................................................................................................ 456
4.13.10 Suction Check & Adjustment .............................................................. 423 5.4.1 Main Unit ................................................................................................. 456
5.4.2 Auto Color Measurement Device Mounter ............................................. 461
4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments ....................................................... 425
4.14.1 RTC&USB ID ....................................................................................... 425 5.5 Lubrication ....................................................................................................... 464
4.14.2 Serial Number Check & Input ............................................................... 426
4.14.3 AID Function Check .............................................................................. 427
Chapter 6 APPENDIX
4.14.4 MAC Address Check & Input ............................................................... 429 6.1 Block Wiring Diagram ..................................................................................... 475
4.14.5 USB Port and Network Communication Check .................................... 430 6.1.1 Main Body ............................................................................................... 475
4.14.6 Default Reset ......................................................................................... 431 6.1.2 SpectroProofer ......................................................................................... 476
4.14.7 Operation Panel Check (Buttons & LCD) ............................................. 432
6.2 Connection Diagram ......................................................................................... 477
4.14.7.1 Button Operation Check ................................................................. 432
6.2.1 Housing .................................................................................................... 477
4.14.8 Color Mode Settings (SC-P5000 Series) ............................................... 433
6.2.2 Electric Circuit Components 1 ................................................................ 477
4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments .......................................................... 434 6.2.3 Electric Circuit Components 2 ................................................................ 478
13
6.2.4 Carriage Mechanism ................................................................................ 478

6.2.5 Paper Feed Mechanism 1 ......................................................................... 479
6.2.6 Paper Feed Mechanism 2 ......................................................................... 479
6.2.7 ASF Unit .................................................................................................. 480
6.2.8 ROLL Unit ............................................................................................... 480
6.2.9 Cutter Unit ............................................................................................... 481
6.2.10 Ink System Mechanism 1 ....................................................................... 481
6.2.11 Ink System Mechanism 2 ....................................................................... 482
6.2.12 SpectroProofer ....................................................................................... 482
6.3 Panel Menu Map ............................................................................................... 483
6.4 Part names used in this manual ........................................................................ 487
6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List ........................................................................... 490
14
CHAPTER
1
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

1.1 Product Description  Violet set (EPSON UltraChrome HDX ink, 11color ink set): Featuring a
broad color reproduction area
SC-P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 is a wide-format color inkjet printer that
Color Abbreviation
supports up to 17 inch wide (A2) paper.
The main features are; Photo Black PK (Photo Black)
 Supports very large-sized paper Matte Black MK (Matte Black)

Cyan C (Cyan)
 Maximum available paper width: 432 mm
Vivid Magenta VM (Vivid Magenta)
 Maximum available paper size: 17 inch
Yellow Y (Yellow)
 Ink configuration
Orange OR (Orange)
Installs the following 11 ink cartridges. The ink selector function is equipped, and
Green GR (Green)
black ink can be switched between Photo Black and Matte Black depending on
media type. Light Cyan LC (Light Cyan)
SC-P5000 Series has the following two ink sets. Vivid Light Magenta VLM (Vivid Light Magenta)
Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 supports K3 set only. Light Black LK (Light Black)
 K3 set (EPSON UltraChrome HDX ink, 11 color ink set): Featuring accurate Violet V (Violet)
tone representation
 Super high print quality
Color Abbreviation
Achieves high quality printing with 11 colors of ink, resolution of up to 2880 x
Photo Black PK (Photo Black) 1440 dpi, and variable dot sizes (minimal 3.5 picoliter)
Matte Black MK (Matte Black)  Featuring accurate tone representation: K3 set (EPSON UltraChrome HDX
Cyan C (Cyan) ink, 11 color ink set)
Vivid Magenta VM (Vivid Magenta) • Improved black OD value: glossy paper (PGPP) 2.5 or more, matte paper
Yellow Y (Yellow) (Photo Rag): 1.75 or more
• Improved light resistance: more resistant than traditional models (glossy
Orange OR (Orange)
paper (PGPP) 45 years)
Green GR (Green) • Excellent PANTONE cover rate: 98%
Light Cyan LC (Light Cyan)  Featuring a broad color reproduction area: Violet set (EPSON UltraChrome
Vivid Light Magenta VLM (Vivid Light Magenta) HDX ink, 11color ink set)
Light Black LK (Light Black) • Improved black OD value: glossy paper (PGPP) 2.5 or more, matte paper
Light Light Black LLK (Light Light Black) (Photo Rag): 1.75 or more
• Improved light resistance: more resistant than traditional models (glossy
paper (PGPP) 45 years)
• Excellent PANTONE cover rate: 99% (Further improved the industry-
leading PANTONE cover rate. Reproduces exact colors that customers want.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 16

 Lower running cost  Ink configuration

 Employs 200 ml super high-capacity independent ink cartridges  K3 set (SC-P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910)
 Equips the on-demand cleaning function without excessive suction of ink
Left Side Right Side
using the independent ink suction system for every two rows and the AID
function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
 Media handling GR LLK Y LC VLM OR MK VM LK C PK
 Supports a variety of media  Violet set (SC-P5000 Series)

 Switches the roll paper and the ASF cassette automatically
Left Side Right Side
 Stores roll paper usage history and updates it automatically by reading a
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
barcode. This enables automatic detection of remaining amount of the paper.
GR V Y LC VLM OR MK VM LK C PK
 Equips high speed auto cutter for roll paper
 Borderless print is supported (for roll paper only) Note : 1-row starting from the left facing the front of the printer.
 The latest-type RIP

Supports various RIP made by 3rd parties
 Options
SpectroProofer is available. Enables color measurement after printing.
 Nozzle set configuration
 K3 set (SC-P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910)
A-row B-row C-row D-row E-row F-row G-row H-row I-row J-row
C VM PK/MK LK OR GR LLK Y LM LC
 Violet set (SC-P5000 Series)
A-row B-row C-row D-row E-row F-row G-row H-row I-row J-row
C VM PK/MK LK OR GR V Y LM LC
x

 SpectroProofer (Option)
 Full-fledged spectrophotometer realizes high precision color measurement.
 Selectable from specifications with/without the UV filter, which enables the
users to configure colorimetric system adjusted with their workflow.
 Drying Fans for drying ink stabilizes color in less than 2 minutes 30 seconds.
 Paper pressing function prevents degrading precision of colorimetry caused
by floating of paper.
 Selectable from the white backing or the black backing.
Figure 1-1. External View (Main body)
Figure 1-2. External View (SpectroProofer)

1.2 Basic Specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

Specification
1.2.1 Basic Specifications Item SpectroProofer is
Main body
installed
Item Specification
Rated voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Print method On-demand inkjet
Input voltage range 90 to 264 VAC
Black system:
360 nozzles x three colors Rated current 0.4 A to 0.7 A
(Photo Black, Matte Black, Light Black, Light Light Black) Rated frequency 50 to 60 Hz
Nozzle configuration Color system: Input frequency range 49.5 to 60.5 Hz
360 nozzles x seven colors
(Green, Yellow, Orange, Cyan, Light Cyan, Vivid Magenta, Vivid Operating Approx. 52 W Approx. 55 W
Light Magenta, Violet*) Standby 20 W 25 W
Maximum resolution 2,880dpi x 1,440dpi  SC-P5000 Series:  SC-P5000 Series:
Power Approx. 5.0 W Approx. 5.0 W
Control code ESC/P2 (command is nondisclosure)
consumption Sleep mode  Epson Stylus Pro 4900/  Epson Stylus Pro 4900/
Paper feed method Friction
4910: Approx. 8.5 W or 4910: Approx. 8.5 W or
For Main: 256 MB less less
RAM For Network: Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910: 64 MB Power off Approx. 0.5 W or less Approx. 0.5 W or less
SC-P5000 Series: 128 MB
10 M or more
USB 2.0 High Speed Insulation resistance
Interface (between AC line and chassis at 500 VDC)
Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000BASE-T*
1.0 kVrms AC for 1 min. or 1.2 kVrms AC for 1 sec.
Dielectric strength
Note "*": SC-P5000 Series only (between AC line and chassis)
Leek current 0.25 mA or less
Conforms to International Energy Star Program
Compliance with regulations (Category: the harmonic restraint measure guideline)
Conforms to VCCI Class B (with full options installed)
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 19

1.2.3 Ink Specifications 1.2.4 General Specifications

Item Specification Item Specification
Form Exclusive ink cartridge Operating: 10 to 35 °C
 Black system: Storage (before unpacked): -20 to 60 °C
Photo black, Matte black, Light black, Light light black (within 120 hours under 60 °C, and within 1 month under
Temperature
Pigment Ink colors  Color system: 40 °C)
Cyan, Light Cyan, Vivid magenta, Vivid light magenta, Storage (after unpacked): -20 to 40 °C
Yellow, Orange, Green, Violet* (within 1 month under 40°C)
200ml: 3 years Operating: 20 to 80% (no condensation)
Cartridge life
80ml: 2 years Storage (before unpacked):
Guaranteed life after installation Within 6 months after mounted in the printer -20 to 85% (no condensation)
Uninstalled -20 to 40 °C Storage (after unpacked):
(packed) 5 to 85% (no condensation)
(within 1 month under 40 °C)
-20 to 40 °C
Installed Humidity (%)
Storage (within 1 month under 40 °C)
-20 to 60 °C Humidity
Transporting
(within 72 hours under 60 °C, and within 1 month under
(packed)
40 °C)
Capacity 200ml/80ml (bundled item)
Dimensions 25 (W) x 200 (L) x 100 (H)
Maintenance box/
PXBMB1/PX17MB1
Maintenance box 2
Temperature (°C)
C A U T IO N
Never disassemble ink cartridges or refill ink in them.
Note "*": SC-P5000 Series only

1.2.5 Reliability/Durability
Item Specification Remarks
Until any one of the following conditions is met.
 5 years
 Carriage life:
Operating life of the printer ---
3,000,000 paths
 Approx. 25,000 pages
(Super A2 size/Plain paper/Quality mode/720x720 dpi)
 Standard paper: approx. 20,000 cuts
Cutter life (reference) ---
 Hard cut paper: approx. 5,000 cuts
RTC backup battery 5 years or longer ---

Approx. 25,000 pages
CR Motor Approx. 6,000,000 paths (Super A2 size/EPSON paper/Quality mode/Continuous printing/
720x720 dpi)
Head FFC Approx. 6,000,000 paths (Super A2 size/EPSON paper/Quality mode/Continuous printing/
720x720 dpi)
Oil Pad Approx. 6,000,000 paths (Super A2 size/EPSON paper/Quality mode/Continuous printing/
Parts life 720x720 dpi)
Ink Tube Approx. 6,000,000 paths (Super A2 size/EPSON paper/Quality mode/Continuous printing/
720x720 dpi)
Ink Selector Assy 10,000 times 4 times/day x 250days x 5years x 2 (safety factor)
IS Unit 1,200,000 EP EP: revolutions (EP) of the motor for pump suction
Home (Right) Side Cartridge
200,000 times 100,000 times (initial charge to product life) x 2 (safety factor)
Holder
Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder 200,000 times 100,000 times (initial charge to product life) x 2 (safety factor)

1.3 Printing Specifications 1.3.2 Paper Specification

1.3.2.1 Supported Paper
1.3.1 Paper Feed Specifications
The following explains the supported paper sizes and thickness.
Item Specification
C A U T IO N  Do not use wrinkled, scuffed, torn, or soiled paper.
Paper feed method Friction feed
 Load paper just before printing. Do not leave paper loaded on
Return pitch 2.2049 m (1/11,520 inch) the printer when not printing. Store paper properly following
 Roll paper manual feed the instruction that comes with the paper.
 Cut sheet manual feed  When large quantities of paper need to be prepared in advance,
Paper feeder make a test print using the paper before purchase.
 Cut sheet front manual feed
 Cassette paper feed
ROLL PAPER
Item Specification
Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper
Paper size 2-inch core: 203 to 432 mm x to 45 m

(within roll paper size) 3-inch core: 203 to 432 mm x to 30.5 m
2-inch core: Outer diameter 103 mm or less x 1 roll
Roll paper size
3-inch core: Outer diameter 150 mm or less x 1 roll
Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.11mm
Weight 64 to 90g/m2
A4/210 mm, A3/297 mm, Super A3/B/329 mm,
Available width for
SuperW A3/329 mm, A2/420 mm*, 11 inch*, 17 inch, 8 inch*,
borderless printing
10 inch, 16 inch, 30 cm
Note "*": Spacer for the borderless printing and 2-inch core are required.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 22

CUT SHEET
Item Specification
Paper type Plain paper, recycled paper
Width: 203 to 432 mm
Paper size
Length: 254 to 610 mm
Paper thickness 0.08 to 0.11mm
Weight 64 to 90g/m2
Available width for A4/210 mm, A3/297 mm, Super A3/B/329 mm, SuperW A3/329
borderless printing mm, 17 inch, 10 inch, 16 inch, 30 cm

1.3.2.2 Designated Paper
ROLL PAPER
Note "*1": OK!: Recommended for borderless printing

OK: Borderless printing is available
NA: Borderless printing is NOT available
Borderless printing on the borderless printing available paper (OK) may result in drop in print quality or fail to produce complete borderless (white margins may appear) due to expanding of the paper. Borderless
printing can be made on commercially available paper, however, note that the availability is restricted by the paper size.
"*2": Spacer for the borderless printing is required.
 SC-P5000 Series
Table 1-1. Designated Roll Paper List
Size
Borderless Core
Name Thickness Roll Paper Tension ICC Profile Black Ink
Print*1 Diameter
mm inch
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK

Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 406 16 OK 0.27 3" Normal PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper250.icc PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper250.icc
PremiumSemiglossPhotoPaper250.icc
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) 406 16 OK 0.27 3" Normal PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V
254 10
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260) 300 11.8 OK 0.27 3" Normal PremiumLusterPhotoPaper260.icc PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumLusterPhotoPaper260.icc
406 16
PremiumSemimattePhotoPaper260.icc
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260) 406 16 OK 0.27 3" Normal PK
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170) 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.18 2" Normal PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper170.icc PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper170.icc
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170) 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.18 2" Normal PK
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK PhotoPaperGloss250.icc
Photo Paper Gloss 250 432 17 OK 0.25 3" Normal PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PhotoPaperGloss250.icc

Size
Borderless Core
Print*1 Diameter
mm inch
329 13 LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK

EpsonProofingPaperWhiteSemimatte.icc
Epson Proofing Paper White Semimatte OK*2 0.25 3" Normal PK
432 17 V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V
329 13 LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK
EpsonProofingPaperCommercial.icc
Epson Proofing Paper Commercial OK*2 0.20 3 Normal PK
432 17 V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V
EpsonProofingPaperCommercial.icc
Singleweight Matte Paper 432 17 OK 0.15 2 Normal SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK
Enhanced Matte Paper 432 17 OK*2 0.25 3 Normal EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc MK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc
 PK selected
UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc
UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper 432 17 OK*2 0.34 3 Normal PK/MK
 MK selected
UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_MK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_MK.icc
Singleweight Matte Paper 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.15 2" Normal SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK
 PK selected
(LLK ink set, when PK is selected)SC-P5000_Series_LLK
EnhancedMattePaper_PK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V EnhancedMattePaper_PK.icc
Enhanced Matte Paper 432 17 NA 0.25 3" Normal MK
 MK selected
EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc
Plain Paper (line drawing) 420 (A2) --- NA 0.08 2" Higher SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK

Size
Borderless Core
Print*1 Diameter
mm inch
Plain Paper 420 (A2) --- NA 0.08 2" Higher SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK
Singleweight Matte Paper 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.15 2" Normal SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK Baryta.icc
Baryta 432 17 NA 0.356 3" Normal PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V Baryta.icc
 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

Size
Borderless Core
Print*1 Diameter
mm inch
Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910

Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) 406 16 OK! 0.27 3" Normal PK
PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper250.icc
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250) 406 16 OK! 0.27 3" Normal PK
254 10
Premium Luster Photo Paper (260) 300 --- OK! 0.27 3" Normal PK
PremiumLusterPhotoPaper260.icc
406 16
Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (260) 406 16 OK! 0.27 3" Normal PK
Photo Paper Gloss 250 432 17 OK! 0.25 3" Normal PK
PhotoPaperGloss250.icc
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (170) 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.18 2" --- PK
PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper170.icc
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (170) 420 (A2) --- OK*2 0.18 2" --- PK
Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper 432 17 OK 0.25 3" Normal MK
EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc
Singleweight Matte Paper 432 17 OK! 0.14 2" Normal MK
SingleweightMattePaper.icc
329 13 Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
Epson Proofing Paper Commercial OK 0.20 3" Normal PK
432 17 EpsonProofingPaperCommercial.icc

Size
Borderless Core
Print*1 Diameter
mm inch

Epson Proofing Paper White Semimatte OK 0.25 3" Normal PK
432 17 EpsonProofingPaperWhiteSemimatte.icc
Epson Proofing Paper Publication OK 0.20 3" Normal PK
432 17 EpsonProofingPaperPublication.icc
UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc/
UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper 432 17 OK 0.46 3” --- PK/MK
TexturedFineArtPaper_PK.icc/
Textured Fine Art Paper 432 17" OK 0.37 3" Normal PK/MK
TexturedFineArtPaper_MK.icc

CUT SHEET
Note "*": OK!: Recommended for borderless printing
OK: Borderless printing is available
NA: Borderless printing is NOT available
Borderless printing on the borderless printing available paper (OK) may result in drop in print quality or fail to produce complete borderless (white margins may appear) due to expanding of the paper. Borderless
printing can be made on commercially available paper, however, note that the availability is restricted by the paper size.
 SC-P5000 Series
Table 1-3. Designated Cut Sheet List
Print from Paper Sheets per Paper
Name Size Borderless Print* Thickness ICC Profile Black Ink
Cassette Cassette (Max.)
8" × 10" NA
100
A4 OK
11" × 14" NA
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper.icc
Premium Glossy Photo Paper US B (11" x 17") NA 0.27mm OK! PK
20 V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper.icc
A3 OK
A3+ OK
A2 NA 25
A4 OK
A3 OK LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper 0.27mm OK! 100 PremiumSemiglossPhotoPaper.icc PK
A3+ OK V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumSemiglossPhotoPaper.icc
A2 NA
A3 OK
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK PremiumLusterPhotoPaper.icc
Premium Luster Photo Paper A3+ OK 0.27mm OK! 100 PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V PremiumLusterPhotoPaper.icc
A2 NA
EPSON Proofing Paper White EpsonProofingPaperWhiteSemimatte.icc
A3+ OK 0.25 OK 100 PK
Semimatte V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V
A4 OK
US-B NA
100
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper A3 OK 0.12mm OK SC-P5000_Series Standard.icc MK
A3+ OK
A2 NA 30


A4 100
A3 LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK ArchivalMattePaper_MK.icc
Archival Matte Paper OK 0.25mm OK! MK
A3+ 50 V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V ArchivalMattePaper_MK.icc
A2
 PK selected
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK WatercolorPaper-
RadiantWhite_PK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V WatercolorPaper-RadiantWhite_PK.icc
Watercolor Paper - Radiant White A3+ OK 0.29mm --- --- PK/MK
 MK selected
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK WatercolorPaper-
RadiantWhite_MK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V WatercolorPaper-RadiantWhite_MK.icc
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LGY Baryta.icc

Baryta A3 + NA 0.356mm × --- PK
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V Baryta.icc
 PK selected
A3+ OK LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc
UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper 0.46mm --- ---  MK selected PK/MK
A2 NA UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_MK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_MK.icc
A4  PK selected
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK VelvetFineArtPaper_PK.icc
V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V VelvetFineArtPaper_PK.icc
Velvet Fine Art Paper A3+ OK 0.48mm --- --- PK/MK
 MK selected
LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK VelvetFineArtPaper_MK.icc
A2 V ink set: SC-P5000_Series_V VelvetFineArtPaper_MK.icc

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

8" x 10" NA 100
A4 OK!
Letter 50
NA
(8.5" x 11")
11" x 14" NA
US B (11" x 17") NA Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
Premium Glossy Photo Paper 0.27mm OK! PK
A3 OK! PremiumGlossyPhotoPaper.icc
20
Super A3 / B
(329mm x OK!
483mm)
A2 NA
25
US C (17" x 22") OK!
A4 OK!
Letter
NA
(8.5" x 11")
A3 OK!
Premium Semigloss Photo Paper Super A3 / B 0.27mm OK! 100 PK
PremiumSemiglossPhotoPaper.icc
(329mm x OK!
483mm)
A2 NA
US C (17" x 22") OK!
A4 OK!
Letter
NA
(8.5" x 11")
A3 OK!
Premium Luster Photo Paper Super A3 / B 0.27mm OK! 100 PK
PremiumLusterPhotoPaper.icc
(329mm x OK!
483mm)
A2 NA
US C (17" x 22") OK!


A4 OK*
Letter 100
NA
(8.5" x 11")
A3 Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
Archival Matte Paper/ ArchivalMattePaper_MK.icc/
Super A3 / B 0.26mm OK! MK
Enhanced Matte Paper OK* Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
(329mm x EnhancedMattePaper_MK.icc
483mm) 50
A2 NA
US C (17" x 22") OK*
A4 OK*
Letter
(8.5" x 11") NA
US B / 11"
100
A3 Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
Photo Quality Inkjet Paper 0.12mm OK! MK
Super A3 / B PhotoQualityInkJetPaper.icc
OK*
(329mm x
483mm)
A2 NA 30
US C (17" x 22") OK* 100
Super A3 / B
(329mm x
EPSON Proofing Paper 483mm) Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
OK* 0.25mm OK! 100 PK
White Semimatte SuperW A3 EpsonProofingPaperWhiteSemimatte.icc
(329mm x
559mm)
WatercolorPaper-
Super A3 / B
RadiantWhite_PK.icc/
Watercolor Paper - Radiant White (329mm x OK* 0.29mm --- --- PK/MK
483mm)
WatercolorPaper-
RadiantWhite_MK.icc
Super A3 / B
(329mm x OK* Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
483mm) UltraSmoothFineArtPaper_PK.icc/
UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper 0.32mm --- --- PK/MK
A2 NA
US C (17" x 22") OK*


Letter
NA
(8.5" x 11")
Super A3 / B Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
(329mm x OK* VelvetFineArtPaper_PK.icc/
Velvet Fine Art Paper 0.48mm --- --- PK/MK
483mm) Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910
VelvetFineArtPaper_MK.icc
A2 NA
US C (17" x 22") OK*

1.3.3 Printable Area Note "*1": When the “Roll Paper (Banner)” is selected for the “Source” in the “Paper Settings” of the
printer driver, the top and bottom margins become 0 mm.
"*2": When the Default is selected, “a” becomes 20mm for the following paper types; Premium
ROLL PAPER Glossy Photo Paper(250), Premium Semigloss Photo Paper(250), and Premium Luster Photo
Paper(260).
Margins for roll paper depends on the Roll Paper Margin settings in the Printer Setup
menu. CUT SHEET
254 to 432mm 3mm 3mm

3 to 15mm 3 to 15mm
203 to 432 mm
3mm
*1
3 to 35mm
127mm 254
to to
15m 610mm
*1 3 to 17mm*
3 to 15mm
Note "*": The default for printing with border is 14mm. The default for borderless printing is 17mm.
Roll Paper Margin settings Explanation
a = c = 15mm *2
Default
b = d = 3mm
a = c = 15mm
Top/Bottom 15mm
b = d = 3mm
a = 35mm
Top 35/Bottom 15mm c = 15mm
b = d = 3mm
3mm a, b, c, d = 3mm
15mm a, b, c, d = 15mm

1.3.4 Borderless Printing Specification Table 1-5. Borderless Printing Mode

Driver Setting Printer Operation Remarks
AVAILABLE PAPER TYPE Prints an image bleeding it off  Printing is interrupted
all the edges of paper. for cutting off the top
For the paper types and sizes that support the borderless printing, see The cutting methods is as margin of the first
"1.3.2.2 Designated Paper" (p24). follows. page. This may cause
color inconsistencies
 The auto refresh margin is
depending on the print
BORDERLESS PRINTING MODE applied as the top margin of data.
the first page, then the top  The top and bottom
The following types of borderless printing are available with the printer driver. margin is cut off during sides of each page are
Double Cut
printing. cut off at the position
*1*2
Table 1-5. Borderless Printing Mode  The bottom side of each slightly inward the
page is cut off without margin. image edges so that no
Driver Setting Printer Operation Remarks white margin appears
 The minimum width required for cutting is applied
Prints an image bleeding it off Default on the edges of the cut
as margins between pages.
the left and right edges of pages. This causes the
vertical length of the
paper. The top and bottom
cut page about 2mm
margins are determined by shorter than the
Normal Cut*2 Roll Paper Margin setting. specified length.
Note "*1": The cut pages vertical length becomes about 2mm shorter than the specified size.
"*2": Color inconsistencies or ink smudges due to the interruption of printing for cutting off top
margins are likely to occur on the following papers.
• Glossy media such as PGPP250
Prints an image bleeding it off
• Single Weight Matte Paper
all the edges of paper.
The cutting methods is as
follows.
 Printing is interrupted
 The minimum width for cutting off the top
required for cutting is margin of the first
applied as the top margin of page. This may cause
Single Cut the first page, then the top color inconsistencies
*1*2 margin is cut off during depending on the print
printing. data.
 No margin is provided between pages, and the  The cut line between
cutting is made on the border between the pages. pages may be slightly
off the border.
 When the job is finished, the bottom side of the last
page is cut off without margin.
 The minimum width required for cutting is applied
as margins between pages.

1.3.5 Cutting of Roll Paper  Setting from the printer

Select “Auto Cut” in the “Paper Setting” window of the printer driver.
The printer offers two ways of cutting for roll paper.
Cut Method Description HOW TO CUT

Auto cut The printer automatically cuts paper with the built-in cutter.  Auto cut
The user can manually move the built-in cutter to cut paper, or use a The printer automatically cuts paper with the built-in cutter each time a page is
Manual cut
commercially available cutter. printed.
 Manual cut
C A U T IO N  Some types of roll paper cannot be cut with the built-in cutter.
In such cases, cut it manually with a commercially available Follow the procedure below to cut paper at the desired position.
cutter or the like. 1. After a page is printed, press the button to advance the paper to the cut
 When cutting Clear Film, please hold it by hands so that it does position.
not fall on the floor in order to prevent scratches. 2. Press the button. Select [Cut] from the selection screen on the display,
and press [OK] button. The built-in cutter moves and cuts the paper.
C H E C K  It may take time for the cutting operation.
P O IN T  The minimum length of paper you can cut with the built-in C H E C K If the roll paper cannot be cut by the built-in cutter, press the
cutter is fixed to 80 or 127 mm and cannot be changed. The
P O IN T button to feed the paper to a position where you can cut it
length is 210 mm when the optional SpectroProofer is installed. manually.
When cutting the roll paper of the length which cannot be
automatically cut by the built-in cutter, press the button to
feed paper up to a position where the paper can be cut
manually, and then cut the paper with a commercially-available
cutter or a similar tool.
SETTING BEFORE PRINTING
The cut method setting can be made by the control panel or the printer driver.
 Setting on the computer
Press button to select the cut method.
Icon Description
Roll Auto Cut On
Roll Auto Cut Off

1.4 Hardware Specifications SPECTROPROOFER MOUNTER
This section provides the printer dimensions and shows the main components.
1.4.1 Dimensions and Weight 267 mm
MAIN UNIT
787 mm 199 mm
Figure 1-4. Dimensions
Height
External Dimensions
Weight*
Width Depth Height
787 mm 199 mm 267 mm Approx. 9.0 kg
Depth
Note *: Excluding the accessories and color measurement device.
Width
Figure 1-3. Dimensions
構成 Width Depth Height Weight*

Body (with Paper Eject Support retracted) 863 mm 766 mm 405 mm Approx. 52 kg
Body (with Paper Eject Support extracted) 863 mm 1134 mm 405 mm Approx. 52 kg
Body & Color Measurement Device 877 mm 1299 mm 405 mm Approx. 60.7 kg
Note *: Excluding the ink cartridges and paper
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Hardware Specifications 36

1.4.2 Part Names BACK SIDE OF MAIN UNIT/SPINDLE
FRONT SIDE OF MAIN UNIT
Edge guide
Paper guide
Rear paper feed slot
Roll paper feed slot
Printer cover
Roll paper cover
Spindle holders
Rear unit
Roll paper holder Airflow

unit connector vent AC inlet
USB interface
connector Status light (green, red)
Front cover LAN connector

CR Unit
Cartridge Attachment
cover (left) Large alert light
Control panel
Cartridge
Paper cassette cover (right)
Output tray
Front paper
Maintenance Box 2 feed slot
Paper eject Spindle
support Movable flange (black)
Spacer
Ink cartridges
Maintenance Box 1
Figure 1-5. Front side of Main Unit Figure 1-6. Back side of Main Unit/Spindle

SPECTROPROOFER MOUNTER
Color Measurement Device carriage Handles
ILS DC cable Front Cover

Paper Presser
ILS communication cable
Side Cover
Backing insert White calibration tile Printer connection cable

slot holder insert slot
ILS20EP ILS30EP
White calibration tile Lens DC connector cable
Lens White calibration tile

DC connector
Communication connector
Communication connector
DC connector
Figure 1-7. SpectroProofer Mounter

1.5 Control Panel

BUTTONS
1 [Power] button 2 [Pause/Cancel] button
10 [Paper
buttons
Feed]
3 [Paper Set] button
4 [Menu] button
9 [Paper Source]
button
5 [Paper Cut] button
7 [Paper Feed] buttons
8 [Ink menu] button 6 [OK] button
Figure 1-8. BUTTONS
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Control Panel 39

Function
Button Name When pressed down
When pressed normally For panel setting
for 2 sec.
1 [Power] button Turns the printer On or Off. Power-off
2 [Pause/Cancel] button When printing: Pauses the operation --- Cancels the panel settings.
• Locks/unlocks the paper presser.
3 [Paper Set] button • After printing the roll paper: Releases the paper pressure and rolls the roll paper for removal. --- ---
When Remaining Paper Setup is On: Rolls the paper while printing the barcode on the front edge.
• Goes to the setting menu.
4 [Menu] button --- Goes to the lower tier.
• When printing: Displays the Printer Status menu.
5 [Paper Cut] button Cuts the roll paper. --- ---
6 [OK] button During ink drying: Stops the operation. --- Sets/Executes the selected item.
• Feeds the roll paper forward.
Feeds the paper at high • Goes to the next item.
7 [Paper Feed (forward)] buttons • While the paper presser is released: Changes the setting of the suction fan.
speed • Decreases the set value.
• Feeds the cut sheet.
• SC-P5000 Series
Goes to the Maintenance Menu.
8 [Ink menu] button --- ---
• Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910
Goes to the Ink Menu.
9 [Paper Source] button Changes the paper type. --- Goes to the upper tier.
• Feeds the roll paper backward. Feeds the paper at high • Goes back to the previous item.
10 [Paper Feed (backward)] buttons
• While the paper presser is released: Changes the setting of the suction fan. speed • Increases the set value.

LIGHTS (LED) Name Color Status Description

ON The printer power is on.
B Paper Check light C Ink Check light A Power Green Flashing*1
The printer is receiving a data or performing the power-off
sequence.
OFF The printer power is off.
• No paper is loaded in the paper source.
ON
A Power light • The paper setting is not correct.
D Pause light
B Paper Check Orange • Paper is jammed.
Flashing*1
• Paper is not loaded straight.
OFF The printer is ready to print data.

• The installed ink cartridge is expended.
ON • The ink cartridge is not installed.
• The wrong ink cartridge is installed.
C Ink Check Orange
Flashing*1 The installed ink cartridge is nearly expended.
ON Pausing/Canceling a job.
D Pause Green
Note "*1": Repeats turning On and Off every 500 ms. When a maintenance error is occurring, the LED
repeats ON for 100 ms and OFF for 5 seconds.
Note : All the LEDs flash when a service call error is occurring.
Figure 1-9. LED

LCD No. Item Description
 Normal indication 1 Message Printer status, operating status, or an error message is displayed.
Displays the setting of “Platen Gap”.
 SC-P5000 Series
: “Narrow” is selected.
9
: “Standard” is selected.
1
2 Platen Gap
: “Wide” is selected.
2
: “Wider” is selected.
3 8
: “Widest” is selected.
7
3 Paper Source Selected paper type and roll paper cut settings are displayed.
4 6
4 SpectroProofer status SpectroProofer available to use is displayed as an icon.
5
5 Ink cartridge status The current ink level in each of the nine cartridges is indicated.
6
x
Black Ink selection The selected black ink is indicated.

Waste ink level in the The approximate amount of space in the Maintenance Box is
7
maintenance boxes indicated.
8 Paper Counter The remaining amount of the paper is displayed.
The setting made by the Roll Paper Margin menu is indicated
beside the [ ].
• Auto: “Default” is selected.
9 Roll Paper Margin • 15mm: “Top/Bottom 15 mm” is selected.
• 35/15mm: “Top 35/Bottom 15 mm” is selected.
• 3mm: “3mm” is selected.
x

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

No. Item Description
9 1 Message Printer status, operating status, or an error message is displayed.

Displays the setting of “Platen Gap”.
1
: “Narrow” is selected.
2
: “Wide” is selected.
3 8 2 Platen Gap
: “Wider” is selected.
7
: “Widest” is selected.
4 6 When the selected registered number in “Paper Number” is
displayed, “Platen Gap” is not displayed.
5
3 Paper Source Selected paper type and roll paper cut settings are displayed.
Figure 1-10. LCD (Normal indication)
4 SpectroProofer status SpectroProofer available to use is displayed as an icon.
5 Ink cartridge status The current ink level in each of the nine cartridges is indicated.
6 Black Ink selection The selected black ink is indicated.

Waste ink level in the The approximate amount of space in the Maintenance Box is
7
maintenance boxes indicated.
8 Paper Counter The remaining amount of the paper is displayed.
The setting made by the Roll Paper Margin menu is indicated
beside the [ ].
• Auto: “Default” is selected.
9 Roll Paper Margin • 15mm: “Top/Bottom 15 mm” is selected.
• 35/15mm: “Top 35/Bottom 15 mm” is selected.

ICONS ON THE LCD  Ink remaining

<SC-P5000 Series>
 Remaining ink level of each color
 Ink cartridge Icon Ink Cartridge
There is enough ink remaining. The height of the
No. Ink Color indicator changes with the level of ink remaining.
1 Green (GR)
2 Light Light Black (LLK) / Violet (V)*

Prepare a new ink cartridge.
3 Yellow (Y)
4 Light Cyan (LC)

The ink is expended so you cannot print.
5 Vivid Light Magenta (VLM) Replace the ink cartridge with a new one.
6 Orange (OR)
7 Matte Black (MK)

Cartridge error or no cartridge error has occurred.
8 Vivid Magenta (VM)
9 Light Black (LK)

<Epson Stylus Pro 4900/Epson Stylus Pro 4910>
10 Cyan (C)
11 Photo Black (PK) Icon Ink Cartridge
Note : “1” on the above table is the left end, and “11” is the right end.
Note "*": SC-P5000 Series only There is enough ink remaining.
Prepare a new ink cartridge.
The ink is expended so you cannot print.

Replace the ink cartridge with a new one.
Cartridge error or no cartridge error has occurred.

 Free space of the maintenance box

<SC-P5000 Series>
Icon
here is enough free space in the maintenance box. The
height of the indicator corresponds to the amount of
space.
Prepare a new maintenance box. (flashing)
The maintenance box becomes full. Replace the box

with a new one. (flashing)
<Epson Stylus Pro 4900/Epson Stylus Pro 4910>
Icon Free space of maintenance box
There is enough free space in the maintenance box.
Prepare a new maintenance box. (flashing)
The maintenance box becomes full. Replace the box

with a new one. (flashing)

1.5.1 Setup Menu

1.5.1.1 SC-P5000 Series Setup Menu
Table 1-6. Menu Mode Settings List
Settings
Menu Menu Item
(shaded one is the default)
When you press the OK button, you can check the status of the nozzles, and the results of clogging detection are displayed on the
Printless Nozzle Check
control panel. When clogged nozzles are detected, if you press the [Ink menu] button, then cleaning starts automatically.
Nozzle Check
Press the OK button to print a nozzle check pattern. Inspect the pattern visually and perform head cleaning if you detect faint or missing
Print Check Pattern
colors.
Check And Clean Nozzle When you press the OK button, you can check the status of the nozzles and automatically clean only the nozzle arrays that are clogged.
All Nozzles Normal, Heavy
Select both the ink colors for head cleaning and the strength of the cleaning. Only use this menu when nozzles are clogged.
C/VM Ink colors to be cleaned
PK(MK)/ Check the ink colors with faint or missing segments in the check pattern, and then specify which nozzles to clean. The displayed items
Head Cleaning differ depending on the ink sets.
GY
Select Normal, • If there are faint or missing segments in all colors: Select All Nozzles.
Nozzles OR/GR Heavy • If there are faint or missing segments in only a few colors: Select Nozzles, and then select the specific ink colors you want to clean.
LLK(V)/Y Cleaning strength
Normally, select Normal. If nozzles are clogged even after performing Normal head cleaning several times, perform Heavy cleaning.
VLM/LC
Maintenance
Paper Paper Type
Thickness Paper Thickness
Uni-D
Auto Bi-D 5-Color
Head Alignment Perform print head alignment when the print results look grainy or out-of-focus. First, do Paper Thickness, and then do Alignment.
Bi-D All
Alignment
Uni-D
Manual Bi-D 2-Color
Bi-D All
You can fine tune the cut position when printing to roll paper with no margins in all directions. The cut position can be adjusted in
Adjust Cut Position -3 to 3mm
increments of 0.2 mm.
Change Black Ink You can switch the type of black ink you want to use.


Settings
Menu Menu Item
Photo Paper
Proofing Paper
Fine Art Paper
Matte Paper Select the type of paper loaded. When loading commercially available paper, or when using customized paper settings, Proofing Paper
Paper Type
Plain Paper select the Custom Paper settings name.
Others
Custom Paper
No Paper Selected
Select Reference Paper
Platen Gap
Thickness Pattern
Paper Feed Adjust A Register paper information when using commercially available paper or when using customized paper settings for genuine Epson
Paper
paper.
Custom Paper Number Paper Feed Adjust B
You can register up to 10 by assigning them to Paper No. 1 to Paper No. 10. After registering, you can print using the saved settings
(1 to 10)
Drying Time simply by specifying the Paper No. Even when the printer is turned off, the saved settings are retained.
Paper Paper Suction
Set Roll Paper Tension
Remove Skew
Print Paper List Press the OK button to print a list of custom paper settings.
Select whether to display/record (On) or not to display/record (Off) the amount of remaining roll paper. If On is selected, you will be
ON
prompted to enter the length of the roll. When a length has been entered for the loaded roll paper, a barcode will automatically be
Remaining
printed on the roll stating the length remaining, the value selected for the roll remaining alert, and the paper type when the roll is
Paper Setup
OFF removed. The barcode is automatically read and settings adjusted the next time the paper is used, improving efficiency when multiple
rolls of paper are used.
Roll Paper Remaining
Roll Paper Displayed when On is selected for Remaining Paper Setup. Set the length for the loaded roll paper to 5.0 to 99.5 m. You can set in 0.5m
5.0 to 99.5m
Length increments.
Roll Length Displayed when On is selected for Remaining Paper Setup. Set within a range from 1 to 15 m to display a warning when the amount of
1 to 15m
Alert remaining roll paper drops below that limit. You can set in 1 m increments.
Sheet Set the number of sheets loaded in the paper cassette in a range from 10 to 990 sheets in increments of 10 sheets. The number of cut
10 to 990 sheets
Number sheets remaining is displayed on the control panel's screen based on the settings you choose for Sheet Number and Sheet Number Alert.
Cut Sheet Remaining Sheet You can set the number of sheets left in the paper cassette at which a warning is displayed by entering a number between 1 and 50
Number 1 to 50 sheets sheets in increments of 1 sheet. The number of cut sheets remaining is displayed on the control panel's screen based on the settings you
Alert choose for Sheet Number and Sheet Number Alert.


Settings
Menu Menu Item
ON Select whether to print (On) or not to print (Off) a page line (line along which to cut) on the roll paper.
Print Page This is not printed on cut sheets. However, a vertical line is printed when the roll paper width that is specified on the computer is
Line smaller than the width of the roll paper that is loaded in the printer.
OFF
The setting selected with the printer driver takes priority when the printer driver is used.
Standard
Top 15 mm/
Bottom 15 mm
Roll Paper When set to Standard, the top and bottom margins are 15 mm, and the left and right margins are 3 mm. Except for 15mm, the left and
Top35 mm/
Margin right margins for all other settings are 3 mm.
Bottom15 mm
3mm
Roll Paper Setup
15mm
Paper
When using the Epson special media UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper you must set this to Off before loading the paper. If set
to On for UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper, the roller of the pressure roller may leave a mark on the surface of the paper.
ON
When using paper other than UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper, set it to On.
When this is set to On, the following operations are available. When Off is selected, an error occurs and the following operations
Auto Roll cannot be performed.
Feeding • When a paper cassette is specified for printing from the printer driver and a print job is executed, roll paper is automatically set to
saved mode and printing is performed by feeding from the paper cassette, even if roll paper is being fed to the printer.
OFF
• Roll paper is automatically set to saved mode and cut paper can be fed when Cut Sheet is also selected from the Paper Type menu.
After printing the cut sheets, and Roll Paper/Cut or Roll Paper/No Cut is selected from the Paper Type menu, roll paper is
automatically fed from saved mode.
ON This setting is effective for roll paper only. After printing borderless on all edges, select whether to cut automatically (On) or not to cut
Refresh Margin (Off) the leading edge of the paper to remove any marks which may have been left in preparation for the next job when printing with
OFF margins.
Narrow
Select the platen gap, which is the distance between the print head and the paper. Normally, select Standard. Select a wider setting if
Standard
print results are scratched or smudged. If, upon performing head alignment, you feel that it is still not completely aligned, select
Platen Gap Wide Narrow.
This setting is cleared when the printer is turned off. When the printer is turned back on, this setting operates at the factory default
Wider
setting.
Widest
Printer Setup
ON Choose whether the printer automatically detects (On), or does not automatically detect (Off), the width of the media. We
generally recommend to operate with this setting set to On. Try choosing Off if a paper setting error is displayed when the
Paper Size Check
OFF paper is correctly loaded. Note, however, that the printer may print outside the paper when Off is selected. If it prints beyond the edges
of the paper, the inside of the printer becomes dirty with ink.
ON If On is selected, an error will be displayed in the control panel and printing will stop if the paper is skewed; select Off to
Paper Skew Check
OFF disable this feature. On is recommended in most circumstances as skewed paper may cause the printer to jam.


Settings
Menu Menu Item
On: Periodically Set the timing for performing an Auto Nozzle Check that will run before printing starts.
On:Periodically: Checks at fixed intervals at a timing determined by the printer.
Auto
On:Every Job: Checks at each job.
Cleaning On: Every Job
Off: Checks only under specific conditions.
Setting
Auto Nozzle Check Auto Nozzle Check sets the timing that you want the printer to check the status of the nozzles, and if clogged nozzles are
OFF detected, sets the number of times to perform auto cleaning. If the nozzles are not clogged, cleaning is not performed.
Auto
Cleaning 1 to 3 When set to On in Auto Cleaning Setting, sets the number of times to automatically repeat cleaning if clogged nozzles are detected.
Times
6 to 60 hours When the following operations are done after the set time has passed from the time the last print was completed, the status of the
nozzles is checked. If clogged nozzles are detected, cleaning is done automatically.
Timer Cleaning
• The printer is turned on.
OFF • The printer returns from sleep mode.
Every 10 pages This setting is effective for roll paper only.
Printer Setup Prints a nozzle check pattern at the top of the page after printing every page or every 10 pages.
Print Nozzle Pattern Every Page
You can check by viewing the pattern after printing, and determine if there are any problems in the print results before and after
OFF printing.
Auto If the black ink type setting in the printer and the printer driver differ, it can be changed automatically to the selected type by
the printer driver.
Auto Black Ink Change
Auto: The black ink type is changed automatically, and printing is performed.
Manual
Manual: An error message is displayed on the control panel's screen, and printing is paused.
Normal When you select Quick, you can reduce the time necessary for changing the black ink type. However, when using the black ink
BK Ink Change Setting immediately after changing, glossy sections may be uneven.
Quick Select Normal to maintain print quality immediately after changing the blank ink type.
ON You can make settings whether to enable the calibration data for Epson Color Calibration Utility.
Calibration Setting
OFF For details on the calibration procedure and so on, see the software manual.
Yes
Initialize Settings If Yes is selected, the Printer Setup is restored to default values.
No
Firmware Version You can see the firmware version.
Print Status Sheet Press the OK button to print a list of current printer settings. Choose this option to view settings at a glance.
Displays the latest Epson Color Calibration Utility execution log. You can check details on operations and so on in Epson Color
Printer Status Calibration Date
Calibration Utility.
Total Prints You can see the total number of pages you have printed (up to 6 figures).
Print Job Information You can print the job information saved in the printer (up to 10 jobs).


Settings
Menu Menu Item
Device Version:ILS Displays the version of the ILS installed on the mounter.
Calibration Tile S/N Displays the calibration tile serial number of the ILS installed on the mounter.
Firmware Version Displays the version of the mounter.
Device Temperature Displays the temperature of the ILS installed on the mounter.
SpectroProofer SProofer Status
Air Temperature Displays the air temperature around the mounter.
Displays the backing colors installed in the mounter. If the color differs from the actual color, check the status of the backing and make
Backing Color
sure it is installed correctly. For details on installing the SpectroProofer Mounter 17, see the Setup Guide (booklet).
Calibration Status The status of the ILS calibration appears as Successful or Failed.
Show
Network Settings The following items only appear when Show is selected.
Hide
Auto Select whether to use DHCP to set the IP address (Auto), or to set the address manually (Panel). When you select Panel, the IP, SM,
IP Address Setting
Network Setup Panel DG Setting Panel below is displayed.
IP, SM, DG Setting You can set the IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway. Contact your system administrator for detailed information.
Print Status Sheet Press the OK button to print a list of the Network Setup. Use this information for a complete overview of network settings.
Init Network Setting Press the OK button to restore all Network Setup content to default values.
Japanese
English
French
Italian
German
Preferences Language Portuguese Select the language used on the control panel's screen.
Spanish
Dutch
Russian
Korean
Chinese


Settings
Menu Menu Item
Metric
Length Units Select the unit of length which is displayed on the control panel's screen or printed on the patterns.
Feet/Inch
°C
Temperature Units Select the temperature units used in the control panel display.
°F
Sets the type of running low warnings to be displayed by the alert lamp.
Disable
If set to Disable, the alert lamp does not display any running low warnings.
Ink The alert lamp flashes when running low on ink.
Maintenance Box The alert lamp flashes when Maintenance Box 1/2 does not have enough empty space.
Maintenance Alert Ink Or Maint Box The alert lamp flashes when running low on ink or when Maintenance Box 1/2 does not have enough empty space.
If either Roll Paper Remaining or Cut Sheet Remaining is set, the alert lamp flashes when either of these reaches their respective
Paper
warning levels.
The alert lamp flashes when running low on ink, when Maintenance Box 1/2 does not have enough empty space, or when running low
Preferences All
on paper.
ON Choose whether or not to show (On/Off) Cut Sheet Remaining in the Menu. When set to On, you can set the number of pages to trigger
Cut Sheet Remaining
OFF a running low warning and the number of pages loaded in the paper cassette.
5 minutes
15 minutes
The printer will enter sleep mode if no errors have occurred, no print jobs have been received, and no actions are performed on the
Sleep Mode 60 minutes
control panel for an extended period of time. This setting selects the amount of time until the printer enters sleep mode.
120 minutes
210 minutes
Power Off Enable

Timer The printer turns off automatically when there are no errors, no print jobs being received, and no control panel or other
Disable
Power Management operations are performed for eight hours. The delay before the printer turns off can be selected from values between 1 and 24 hours in
Time To increments of 1 hour. If you do not want the printer to automatically turn itself off, set Power Off Timer to Disable.
1 to 24 hours
Off


Settings
Menu Menu Item
All Nozzles
C/VM
Performs more powerful cleaning than Head Cleaning from the Maintenance menu. Check the ink colors with faint or missing
PK(MK)/GY segments in the check pattern, and then specify which nozzles to clean.
Powerful Cleaning
OR/GR • If there are faint or missing segments in all colors: Select All Nozzles.
Administrator • If there are faint or missing segments in only a few colors: Select the specific ink colors you want to clean.
Menu LLK(V)/Y
VLM/LC
Clock Setting MM/DD/YY HH:MM Set the printer’s built-in clock. The time provided by the clock is used when printing logs and status sheets.
Pressing the OK button restores all settings, such as settings in the menus on the control panel and paper settings, to their factory
Reset All Settings
settings.

1.5.1.2 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 Setup Menu

Settings
Menu Menu Item Explanation
Narrow
Standard
Sets the platen gap (gap between the printhead and the platen).
Platen Gap Wide When the “Others” is selected in the Paper Type of the Paper Setup menu, the platen gap designated at the Custom Paper menu has a
priority over the setting made here. ("PG Settings List" on page 59)
Wider
Widest
On Sets whether to print a page line (line for manual cutting) on roll paper or not. The page line is printed when On is selected.
Page Line The vertical line may be printed when the roll paper width that is set in the printer driver is smaller than the width of the roll paper that
Off is loaded in the printer. This setting is available for roll paper only.
Default
Top/Bottom 15mm
Sets the margins for roll paper.
Roll Paper Margin Top 35/Bottom 15mm
When the Default is selected, the top and the bottom margins become 15mm and the right and the left margins become 3mm.
3mm
15mm
On Sets whether to detect the paper width and the top or not.
Setting to Off deactivates the sensor that detects the paper width when paper is loaded on the printer. This allows the user to use paper
Paper Size Check
Off whose width is out of the sensor’s detectable range. It means that the user can print an image larger than the paper size. The user should
Printer Setup
know that doing so soils the platen and may cause a print quality or any other trouble.
On This setting is effective for roll paper only.
Sets whether to detect the paper skew or not.
Paper Skew Check Setting to Off does not carry out the detection and printing is continued even if the paper is skewed. When this setting is set to Off, the
Off user should have known the risk.
This setting is not available for cut sheet because the skew detection function after printing is not provided for cut sheet.
On This setting is available only when roll paper is used.
Refresh Margin
Off When this is set to On, the top edge area of paper soiled by the previous borderless printing is automatically cut off.
On: Periodically
Sets the execution timing for the auto nozzle check. When the nozzle clogging is detected, the cleaning starts automatically. You can
Auto Nozzle Check On: Every Job
set the number of executions for cleaning from "1.5.2 Maintenance Mode (p62)".
Off
Off
The printer prints a nozzle check pattern automatically at the specified timing. This setting is available only when roll paper is used.
Print Nozzle Pattern On: Every Page When the set number of pages is reached, the nozzle check pattern is printed on the top of the page. The counter for counting the pages
is not reset even by power-off. When this setting is changed, the counter is cleared.
On: Every 10 Pages
Off When this is set to ON and the type of the black ink differs between the printer and the printer driver, the black ink of the printer is
Change Black Ink
On changed automatically in printing.


Settings
On
Auto Roll Feeding When this is set to ON, the paper is fed on the platen from the roll paper standby position.
Printer Setup Off
Initialize Settings Print All the settings made using the control panel are returned to their default.
Status Sheet Print Prints information on the printer status.
Network Status Sheet Print Prints information on the network status.
Test Print
Job Information Print Prints a print job history report (up to 10 jobs) that is stored in the printer.
Custom Paper Print Prints the settings made in the Custom Paper menu.
Cutter Adjustment -3.0mm to +3.0mm Fine tune the cut position when printing to roll paper with no margins in all directions. In increments of 8 mil (0.2 mm) in all directions.
Maintenance
Clock Setting MM/DD/YY HH:MM Sets the date and time for the internal clock.
"Firmware version information"
Version Displays the firmware version. Refer to "Firmware version information" on page 61.
on page 61
(Ink color)
Ink Level Displays the ink level in the installed ink cartridges.
[E**********F]
1
[E**********F]
Maintenance Box Displays the waste ink level in the installed maintenance boxes.
2
[E**********F]
 Job No.
No.0 to No.9
Printer Status Displays the job number that is stored in the printer. The latest job number is 0 (zero).
 The amount of ink consumed
Job History Ink xx.x ml
Displays the amount of ink consumed for each job.
 The amount of paper consumed
Paper xxxxxx cm2
Displays the total area of paper used for each job.
Total Prints nnnnnn Pages Displays the total printed pages using 6-digit decimal number.
Not Started, Enabled, Disabled
myEpsonPrinter Status Last Uploaded: This function is not supported in some areas or some countries.
(Not Uploaded)
MM/DD/YY HH:MM GMT


Settings
Make settings for the remaining roll paper.
[Off] (default)
Disables the roll paper remaining amount count function.
[On]
Remaining Paper Setup
Displays the roll paper remaining amount on the LCD. When you press the [Paper Set] button, a barcode that includes information on
Roll Paper Remaining the amount of remaining roll paper, the Roll Length Alert, and the Paper Type is printed.
When roll paper is replaced with a new one, the printer reads the barcode and automatically applies the read settings for the new roll
paper.
Roll Paper Length You can make these settings only when Remaining Paper Setup above is set to On.
The printer sets roll paper length, and the remaining length of roll paper to be alerted when the set amount is reached.
Roll Length Alert The printer displays the roll paper remaining amount and the alert for shortage of the remaining on the LCD.
Sheet Number You can make these settings only when Cut Sheet Remaining is set to On.
The printer sets the number of remaining cut sheets, and the number of remaining cut sheets to be alerted when the set number is
Cut Sheet Remaining
Sheet Number Alert reached.
Paper Setup The printer displays the number of remaining cut sheets and the alert for shortage of the remaining on the LCD.
Photo Paper
Proofing Paper
Fine Art Paper
Matte Paper
Paper Type Sets the paper type loaded on the printer.
Plain Paper
Others
Custom Paper
No Paper Selected
You can select a number (between 1 to 10) to register the settings (such as Paper Type, Platen Gap, Thickness Pattern, Paper Feed
Custom Paper
Paper No. No.1 to 10 Adjust, Drying Time, Paper Suction) or to recall these settings you have made. The number you select here is displayed on the LCD
(1-10)
panel. For the menu item, see Table 1-8 "Custom Paper Menu List" (p57).
Paper Type Sets thickness of paper to be used.
Paper Thickness • When Epson paper is used, select the paper type.
Paper Thickness • When not Epson paper is selected, enter the thickness of the selected paper.
Auto Sets whether to carry out the head alignment adjustment automatically or manually.
Head Alignment [Auto]
The adjustment is carried out automatically after the adjustment pattern is printed.
Alignment
Manual [Manual]
Select this to carry out the adjustment manually (visually check the patterns and enter selected values) after printing the adjustment
pattern.


Settings
Hide
Network Settings The Network Setup menu items appear on the LCD only when this is set to Show.
Show
Auto Sets whether to set the IP address automatically or manually.
IP Address Setting
Panel When the Panel is selected, the IP, SM, DG Setting menu is enabled to enter the address manually.
000.000.000.000
IP Address to Sets the IP address manually.
255.255.255.255
000.000.000.000
IP,SM,DG Setting Subnet Mask to Sets the subnet mask manually.
Network Setup 255.255.255.255
000.000.000.000
Default
to Sets the default gateway manually.
Gateway
255.255.255.255
On
Bonjour Enables or disables the Bonjour.
Off
Off
WSD Enables or disables the WSD.
On
Init Network Setting Execute Returns the network settings to their default.
Displays the status of each item of SpectroProofer, such as the version of SpectroProofer, the product numbers of the white calibration
SpectroProofer SpectroProofer Status Information tiles, the temperature of Color Measurement Device (ILS20EP/ILS30EP), ambient air temperature, and the color of the backing, and
ILS Calibration Status.

 Custom Paper Menu

Table 1-8. Custom Paper Menu List
Settings
Menu Item Explanation
Photo Paper
Proofing Paper
Fine Art Paper
Paper Type Sets the paper type loaded on the printer.
Matte Paper
Plain Paper
Others
Narrow
Standard Adjusts the platen gap (gap between the printhead and paper surface) according to the paper thickness.
Standard: use this setting under normal conditions
Platen Gap Wide
Narrow: select this when using thin paper.
Wider Wide, Wider, Widest: select this when smudges or blurring appear due to an excess pressure on the paper.
Widest
Thickness Pattern Print Prints a pattern for checking the thickness of the loaded paper.
0.00% Adjusts the paper feed line pitch when banding occurs in the area 1 to 2 cm from the end of paper.
Paper Feed Adjust A The larger the value is, the more the possibility to cause white bands on printout image.
-0.70% to +0.70% The smaller the value is, the more the possibility to cause black bands on printout image.
0.00%
Paper Feed Adjust B Adjusts the paper feed line pitch when banding occurs in the area 1 to 2 cm from the end of paper.
-0.70% to +0.70%
0.0 sec Sets a time period to pause the carriage movement for drying the printed surface. Depending on paper type and density, drying ink may take
Drying Time
0.0 to 10.0 sec longer. Check the result and set longer time period in such case.
Standard
Paper Suction Sets the power level of the suction fan.
-1 to -4
Normal
Set Roll Paper Tension High When using a cloth or thin paper or when winkles appear in the paper during printing, select “High” or “Extra High”.
Extra High
On
Remove Skew Sets whether to perform this operation to reduce the paper skew or not.
Off

 Ink Menu
Table 1-9. Ink Menu List

Menu Item Settings Explanation
No Selects Yes to execute Auto Nozzle Check and
Auto Cleaning
Yes head cleaning.
C/VM, PK (MK)/LK, O/
G, LLK(V)/Y, VLM/LC, Selects the color lines to be cleaned and the
Manual Cleaning
All Colors, All Colors power of cleaning.
(Powerful)
Executes Auto Nozzle Check. Displays the result
Auto Nozzle Check
Nozzle Check on the control panel.
Print Check Pattern Prints the nozzle check pattern.
Change Black Ink --- Changes the type of the black ink.

 PG Settings List Table 1-10. PG Settings List

The table below shows the actual platen gap amount specified by the printer driver Paper Thickness Sensor Panel mm
or the control panel. 1.2
<SC-P5000 Series> 1.2
Narrow
1.2
Table 1-10. PG Settings List
1.6
Paper Thickness Sensor Panel mm
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2 Standard
Narrow 1.6
1.2
2.1
1.6
1.2
1.2
1.6
1.2 Wide
Standard 0.5mm to 0.8mm 2.1
1.6
2.6
2.1
1.6
1.2
2.1
1.6 Wider
Wide 2.6
0.4mm or less 2.1
2.6
2.6
2.1
1.6
2.6
2.1 Widest
Wider 2.6
2.6
2.6
2.6
--- 2.6
2.1
0.9mm to 2.1mm --- 2.6
2.6
Widest
2.6
2.6
--- 2.6

<Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910> Table 1-11. PG Settings List
Table 1-11. PG Settings List Paper

Paper Thickness Media Table or Printer
Thickness Menu Setting PG Value (mm)
Setting by Driver Driver PG Setting
Paper Sensor
Paper Thickness Media Table or Printer
Thickness Menu Setting PG Value (mm)
Setting by Driver Driver PG Setting Narrow 1.2
Sensor
Standard 1.2
Narrow 0.8 Narrow
Wide 1.2
Standard 0.8
Narrow Wider 1.6
Wide 1.2
Narrow 1.2
Wider 1.6
Standard 1.2
Narrow 0.8 Standard
Wide 1.6
Standard 1.2
Standard Wider 2.1
Wide 1.6
Narrow 1.2
Wider 2.1
No setting Standard 1.6
Narrow 1.2 Wide
0.5mm to 0.0 to 0.8mm Wide 2.1
No setting Standard 1.6 0.8mm
Less than Wide Wider 2.6
0.0 to 0.8mm Wide 2.1
0.4mm
Narrow 1.6
Wider 2.6
Standard 2.1
Narrow 1.6 Wider
Wide 2.6
Standard 2.1
Wider Wider 2.6
Wide 2.6
Narrow 2.1
Wider 2.6
Standard 2.6
Narrow 2.1 Widest
Wide 2.6
Standard 2.6
Widest Wider 2.6
Wide 2.6
0.9mm to 1.5mm -- -- 2.6
Wider 2.6
0.9mm to
0.9mm to 1.5mm -- -- 2.6 -- -- -- 2.6
2.1mm

 Firmware version information

The table below explains the firmware version information printed by selecting the
Version in the Printer Status menu.
<Format>
M0XXXX,xx.xx,IBCC
Table 1-12. Firmware Version Information

Item Explanation
The code assigned to this printer: M0
**0
“0” (zero) is assigned to a special version of printer.
XXXX Indicates the firmware version installed on the printer.
xx.xx Indicates the network firmware version.
I “A” is indicated for this printer.
B “0” is indicated for this printer.
A hexadecimal number (00H-FFH) appears to indicate the specified custom
C number that registers a special operation setting. When no custom operation
is specified, “00” appears.

1.5.2 Maintenance Mode Settings

Menu Item (shaded one is the Explanation
The maintenance mode allows you to change the environmental settings such as default)
language and unit settings to be displayed, or to return all the settings to their default.
°C Selects the unit of temperature displayed on
The user can also access this mode. Temperature Units
F the LCD panel.
HOW TO START & QUIT 1

Sets the number of cleanings when nozzle
Auto Cleaning Times 2
1. While holding down the [Pause/Cancel] button, turn the printer on. clogging is detected at auto nozzle check.
3
2. Turn the printer off to quit the maintenance mode.
Disable
Ink
MAINTENANCE MODE MENU LIST
Maintenance Box Selects the type whose remaining amount is
 SC-P5000 Series Maintenance Alert
Ink Or Maint Box displayed with the large alert lamp.
Menu Item Settings Explanation Papers

CUSTOM 0 to 255 Save the custom setting. All
Off Displays Cut Sheet Remaining in Setting menu
 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 Cut Sheet Remaining
On when setting to On.
Settings 5 minutes
default) 15 minutes
Sets the time to turn to the sleep mode
Japanese Time To Low Power 60 minutes
automatically.
English 120 minutes
French 180 minutes
Italian
German Selects the language used for the control panel
Language
Portuguese display.
Spanish
Dutch
Korean
Chinese
Metric Selects the unit of length to be used for various
Length Units
Feet/Inch length information.

Settings
default)
Sets whether to enable or disable the Power
Power Off Timer Off Timer after turning to the sleep mode. The
Power Management default is disabled.
Time To Off Sets per hour in a range from 1 to 24 hours.
Returns all the settings made by the control
Default Panel Execute
panel to their default.
Custom 0 to 255 Stores custom settings.

1.5.3 Serviceman Mode

The Serviceman Mode is intended to be used by a service personnel for servicing the
printer.
HOW TO START & QUIT
1. Turn the printer on by pressing the [OK], [Paper Feed/Down], and [Menu/Right] buttons together.
2. Turn the printer off to quit the Serviceman Mode.
SERVICEMAN MODE MENU LIST
Menu Explanation
Paper Displays the Paper Thickness Sensor response for adjustment.
Rear AD Adjusts the AD value of the Rear Sensor (PE Sensor).
CR Un Cap Unlocks or re-locks the carriage and uncaps/re-caps the Printhead.
Red
LCD RGB Check Green Checks the operation of the LCD.
Blue
Mecha Adjustment
Panel Check Checks the operation of the Buttons and the LEDs.
Roll Unit
Roll Support
Sensor Check ASF Cassette Checks the operation of sensors.
ASF Paper
Front Cover

Menu Explanation
PG
H to F Speed
F to H Speed
CR
Page Size
Fan
Life Count
Feed Amount 1
Feed Speed 1
Feed Amount 2
Feed Speed 2
PF Wait
Fan
GS Change Position 1
Life GS Change Position 2 Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Life Count
Wait1
RLS Wait2
Life Count
PG
APG Wait
Life Count
Length
Return Length
Cutter
Wait
Life Count

Menu Explanation
Wait1
Wait2
GS
Life Wait3 Used only in manufacturing processes. Not used in service operations.
Life Count
Display Count Display Count

CHAPTER
2
TROUBLE SHOOTING

2.1 Overview 2.1.1.2 Recurrence check of the trouble

Check if the trouble the user claims recurs with the returned printer.
This section explains the basic procedure for troubleshooting problems on the printer
quickly and efficiently.  If RIP was used, check if the trouble recurs when the driver is used.
When carrying out the troubleshooting procedures, take a flexible measure following  If 3rd party's media were used, check if the trouble recurs when the genuine
your sales company's policy and considering the troubling situation. media is used.
 If 3rd party's ink was used, check if the trouble recurs when the genuine ink is
2.1.1 Preliminary Check used.
Make sure to verify or perform the following basic items whenever servicing the  If the F/W was not the latest, check if the trouble recurs when the latest F/W is
printer. used.
2.1.1.1 Check for the usage environment 2.1.1.3 Check for the counter values/history
Check the user's usage environment. Download NVRAM and check the following with NVRAM Viewer. (For the check
method, see P.340.)
 Temperature/humidity of the installation site
(For the guaranteed environment, see P.20.)  Counter history of the periodic replacement parts. (if any part's life is near.)
 Drivers/RIP that the user uses  Printer's operating history (if any cause for the trouble exists)
 Genuine media or 3rd party's media?  Error history (the frequency/history of errors related with the trouble)
 Genuine ink or 3rd party's ink? 2.1.1.4 Test print check

 F/W version (the latest?)
For the trouble related with print quality, carry out “Test Print” and check the current
 Check also the following if necessary. adjustment status. (For the procedure of test print, see P.349.)
Phenomenon Check Item

The installation site inclined?
Any vibrating equipment near the site?
Bad print quality The user's panel settings
Is the interior dirty?
Clean it if dirty.
Missing dots/bad print quality Near a conditioner's ventilation duct?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 68

2.1.2 Troubleshooting Procedure 2.1.3.2 If necessary to escalate the trouble case

Refer to the following items according to the observed symptom, carry out the Make a report with the following data.
corresponding troubleshooting following the procedures described in the next sections.  Backed-up NVRAM data
1. Trouble with a Maintenance Request or Service Call Error. (See P.70, P. 73)  For bad print quality: a print sample with the marked symptom and a printed
2. Trouble on print quality (See P.99) test pattern.
3. Trouble on paper feeding (See P.106)
4. When the printer does not operate (See P.110)  For faulty parts: the faulty parts themselves and a photos of the troubling
section.
5. Trouble on printer operations (See P.112)
6. Trouble on SpectroProofer (See P.114)  Information on the user/the repair listed below
7. Trouble on Service Program (See P.118) This is a format of the escalation report. At least check out the items on the
list and register the case in the escalation system.
2.1.3 Procedure after troubleshooting  Model name
 Serial number
2.1.3.1 If the trouble has been successfully solved  With or without options
 Content of the claim from the user
 Check if the movement of the covers is normal (without any damage, noises).
 Date of occurrence
If any abnormality is found, lubricate or replace the faulty parts.
 Trouble occurrence conditions/recurrence method
 Carry out the cleaning after repair.  What the service person actually observed
(Check items before check, the content of troubleshooting and repair.)
 Prepare a report on the repair. (follow your company/local office's policy.)
 Date of escalation
 Purpose of escalation
(Measures which the user/service person)
 Degree of urgency (S/A/B/C)
S: High (those which may cause a death, ignition, etc.)
A: Problems, bugs
B: Strong request
C: Inquiry
 Deadline for the response
 Repair history
 Part-replacement history
TROUBLE SHOOTING Overview 69

2.2 Remedies for Maintenance Requests

This section describes the remedies for maintenance requests. Maintenance requests do not effect the printer’s operation; therefore, you can continue the current printing. When a
maintenance request error occurs, the printer displays on the LCD a hexadecimal code of “NNNN” which correspond to the bit numbers assigned to error statuses as shown in the
table below.
Table 2-1. About the Maintenance Request NNNN (Bit assignment)

Bit assignment (Binary) NNNN
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 (Hexadecimal)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0000002
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000008
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 00000010
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000040
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000080
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00000400
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00001000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00004000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00020000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00400000
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04000000
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10000000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 (e.g.) 0088
RTC backup battery

(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
RTC backup
(Reserved)
(Reserved)
Cartridge holder life
Suction pump life
CR life (tube life)
(Reserved)
exhaustion
Ink selector life
AID error
Near the end of

Ink selector life
Near the end of
Near the end of
AID error
Near the end of CR life

Cartridge Holder like
Ink System life

Date not set
Description
Note "*1":Ex): When “Maintenance Request 0088” is displayed.

As “0088” in hexadecimal means “1000 1000” in binary, you can find out the code is assigned to Bit-3 and Bit-7 referring to the above table. In this case, two errors are
occurring simultaneously. (Bit-3: battery exhaustion/ Bit-7: the date and time has not been set.)
"*2":Do not reset the counter without replacing the part. Doing so will result in increasing chance of ink leakage and failure rate. It is not only a quality assurance issue, but
also causes the customer so much trouble.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Maintenance Requests 70

Table 2-2. About the Maintenance Request NNNN (Bit assignment)

NNNN
Cause Remedy
(Hexadecimal)
Replace the following parts and reset the counter of the CR Motor and the FFC, Ink Tubes and CR
Pads Counter.
The CR scan pass counter has come near the specified life. (Six million passes = the end of life of the  Ink Tubes
0000002
Ink Supply Tube.)  CR Motor
 Head FFC
 Oil Pad
00000008 The RTC backup battery on the Main Board reached the end of its life. Replace the battery and set date and time.
00000010 (Non-recoverable AID error due to breakdown) See "Remedy for No. 0010/4000 (p. 72)".
00000040 The pump counter has come near the specified life. (The end of the IS Unit’s life.) Replace the IS Unit and reset the counter.
00000080 The date has not been set. Set date and time.
Operations of the diaphragm in the Cartridge Holder comes near the specified life (The end of the Check which Cartridge Holder (the left one or the right one) has trouble with the NVRAM Viewer.
00000400
Cartridge Holder's life). Replace the Cartridge Holder and reset the counter.
00001000 The number of operation counter of the Ink Selector has come near the specified life. Replace the Ink Selector and reset the counter.
00004000 (All nozzle clogging error) See "Remedy for No. 0010/4000 (p. 72)".
00020000 The Ink Tube has reached the end of its life. Replace the Ink Tube and reset the counter.
00400000 The Suction Pump has reached the end of its life. Replace the IS Unit and reset the counter.
04000000 The Cartridge Holder has reached the end of its life. Replace the Cartridge Holder and reset the counter.
10000000 The Ink Selector has reached the end of its life. Replace the Ink Selector and reset the counter.
(e.g.) 0088 The RTC backup battery becomes exhausted and the date has not been set. Carry out the remedy for 0008 and 0080.
x

REMEDY FOR NO. 0010/4000
If the Maintenance Request No. 0010 or No. 4000 occurs, take the following measure according to the procedure below.
NOTE : There is a priority for occurrence of No. 0010 and No. 4000. Because No. 0010 has the priority, when both No. 0010 and No. 4000 occur at the same time, No. 4000 is not displayed,
but No. 0010 is displayed only. When the cause of No. 0010 is removed, No. 4000 is displayed then.
Table 2-3. Remedy for Maintenance Request No. 0010/4000

Request No. Description Cause Remedy/Check Point
Check the connection to the AID Board, and correct it if
Communication with the AID Board is not established. Connection failure of FFC or FFC is broken. 1
any failure found.
Check around the Flushing Box, and remove accumulated
0010 Due to accumulated ink and such around the Flushing 2 ink or dust if any. (Through accumulated ink or dust, the
The voltage applied to the Flushing Box does not reach Box, the electric current is leaking. electric current may leak.)
the specified level.
3 Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)
High voltage power module in the AID Board is broken. 4 Replace the AID Board. (See P.192)
Print the nozzle check pattern to check this. If all the
Printhead is broken. 1 colors have nozzle clogging, replace the Printhead. (See
P.265)
4000 It detects twice in a row that all the nozzles are clogging.
Check the connection to the AID Board, and correct it if
2
Connection failure of AID cable or AID cable is broken. any failure found.
3 Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)

2.3 Remedies for Service Call Error

The following tables explains the Service Call error messages and remedies.
 11XX Series CR error code
Code Error Name Cause Check Item Remedy

Replace the following parts and
reset the counter of the CR Motor
and the FFC, Ink Tubes and CR
The maintenance counter for the Ink Supply Tube exceeded Pads Counter.
1101 CR life error the threshold value. (CR scan pass counter has reached the ---
 Ink Tubes
specified value (six million passes)).
 CR Motor
 Head FFC
 Oil pad
1. Re-install the CR Encoder. (See
P.197)
The CR Unit cannot track the Home position to set the CR
1. Check if the paper is jammed. 2. Clean the CR Scale with
origin.
2. Check if the CR Scale is read out properly (See P.198). ethanol.
1125 CR HP detection error  False origin detection due to paper jam or the like
 Check if the CR Scale is damaged or contaminated. 3. Replace the CR Scale. (See
 Misreading of CR Scale
3. Check if the CR Lock functions normally. (See P.148) P.198)
 CR Lock is damaged.
4. Replace the IS Unit. (See
P.266)
1. Check the following connection for disconnection and 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
1. Connection failure of the CR Motor or the CR Encoder. P.197)
damage.
2. Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of 2. Replace the CR Motor. (See
 CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102)
times that the electric current which flows when driving the P.195)
CR Motor motor is irregularly large.  CR Motor to SUB-B Board (CN204)
1138 3. If the printer does not recover
over current error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder
 Irregular load from the error, it may be caused
functions normally. (See P.440)
 CR Encoder failure by irregular load of the CR
3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR Motor)” to Mechanism. Replace the Printer
 CR Motor failure
check if CR Motor functions normally. (See P.434) Mechanism.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Service Call Error 73


1. Check if the CR Unit is attached correctly.
2. Check if any foreign material exists in CR Unit’s drive
The electric current flowing when driving the motor is section.
irregularly large. 1. Re-install the CR Unit. (See
3. Check the following connection for disconnection and
P.195)
 CR Encoder cable is damaged. damage.
CR Motor 2. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
113A  CR Motor cable is damaged.  CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102)
overload error P.197)
 Irregular load  CR Motor to SUB-B Board (CN204)
3. Replace the CR Motor. (See
 CR Encoder failure 4. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder P.195)
 CR Motor failure functions normally. (See P.440)
5. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR Motor)” to
check if the CR Motor functions normally. (See P.434)
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
than the specified value just before stopping. P.197)
CR Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
113B
over speed error  CR Encoder failure functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 SUB Board is damaged. 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 CR Motor driver failure P.179)
Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of 1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
times that it is being driven in the opposite direction to the  CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102)
specified driving direction. 1. Adjust the tension of the CR
 CR Motor to SUB-B Board (CN204)
CR Motor Timing Belt. (See P.359)
113C  The polarity of CR Encoder cable is opposite. 2. Check if the tension of the CR Timing Belt is proper. (See
reversing error 2. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
 The polarity of CR Motor cable is opposite. P.359)
P.197)
 Slipping of the teeth of CR Timing Belt 3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder
 CR Encoder failure functions normally. (See P.440)
Detects that the driving period is irregularly long.
CR Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
113D  Irregular load ---
driving time-out error P.179)
 Firmware becomes out of control.
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified P.197)
value. 1. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder 2. Replace the CR Motor. (See
CR Motor  Irregular load functions normally. (See P.440) P.195)
113E
velocity deviation error  CR Encoder failure 2. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR Motor)” to 3. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
 CR Motor failure check if the CR Motor functions normally. (See P.434) P.189)
 CR Motor driver failure P.179)


Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed damage.
than the specified value.
 CR Encoder to SUB Board (CN102) 1. Replace the CR Encoder. (See
 CR Encoder cable is damaged.
CR Motor  CR Motor to SUB-B Board (CN204) P.197)
113F  CR Motor cable is damaged.
lock error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the CR Encoder 2. Replace the CR Motor. (See
 Irregular load
functions normally. (See P.440) P.195)
 CR Encoder failure
 CR Motor failure
3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR Motor)” to
check if the CR Motor functions normally. (See P.434)
 12XX Series paper feed error code

1. Check the following connection for disconnection and 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (See
The electric current flowing when driving the motor is damage. P.211)
irregularly large. 2. Replace the PF Motor. (See
 PF Encoder to SUB-C Board (CN303)
 PF Encoder cable is damaged. P.210)
PF Motor  PF Motor to SUB-C Board (CN302)
122A  PF Motor cable is damaged. 3. If the printer does not recover
overload error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the PF Encoder
 Irregular load from the error, it may be caused
 PF Encoder failure by irregular load of the PF
 PF Motor failure
3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (PF Motor)” to Mechanism. Replace the Printer
check if the PF Motor functions normally. (See P.434) Mechanism.
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (See
PF Motor  PF irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the PF Encoder 2. Replace the SUB-C Board. (See
122B
over speed error  PF Encoder failure functions normally. (See P.440) P.190)
 PF Motor driver failure P.179)
Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of installation direction.
times that it is being driven in the opposite direction to the
 PF Encoder to SUB-C Board (CN303) 1. Adjust the tension of the PF
specified driving direction.
PF Motor  PF Motor to SUB-C Board (CN302) Timing Belt. (See P.406)
122C  The polarity of PF Encoder cable is opposite.
reversing error 2. Check if the tension of the PF Timing Belt is proper. (See 2. Replace the PF Encoder. (See
 The polarity of PF Motor cable is opposite.
P.406) P.211)
 Slipping of the teeth of PF Timing Belt
 PF Encoder failure
3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the PF Encoder


PF Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (See
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified P.211)
value. 1. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the PF Encoder 2. Replace the PF Motor. (See
PF Motor  Irregular load functions normally. (See P.440) P.210)
122E
velocity deviation error  PF Encoder failure 2. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (PF Motor)” to 3. Replace the SUB-C Board. (See
 PF Motor failure check if the PF Motor functions normally. (See P.434) P.190)
 PF Motor driver failure P.179)
1. The PF Motor or the PF Encoder is not connected correctly. damage.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed  PF Encoder to SUB-C Board (CN303) 1. Replace the PF Encoder. (See
PF Motor than the specified value.  PF Motor to SUB-C Board (CN302) P.211)
122F
lock error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the PF Encoder 2. Replace the PF Motor. (See
 PF Encoder failure functions normally. (See P.440) P.210)
 PF Motor failure 3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (PF Motor)” to
check if the PF Motor functions normally. (See P.434)
 13XX Series head driver error code

1. Turn the power off and then on again to check if the printer 1. Replace the Head FFC. (See
Head driver recovers from the error. P.282)
The temperature of the Head driver rises, and reaches the
131B (transmission gate)
specified level. 2. Check the connection of the Head FFC. 2. Replace the Printhead. (See
overheat error
 Any slant connection or a similar abnormality? P.265)

 14XX Series IS unit error code

IS Motor The number of pump operation counter of the IS Unit reached
1412 --- Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)
life error the specified upper limit.
The electric current flowing when driving the motor is damage.
irregularly large.  IS Motor Assy to SUB-B Board (CN228, CN229)
IS Motor  IS Motor Assy cable is damaged. 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the IS Motor Assy
141A Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)
overload error  Irregular load encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 IS Motor Assy encoder failure 3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (IS Motor
 IS Motor failure Assy)” to check if the IS Motor functions normally. (See
P.434)
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the IS Unit. (See
IS Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the IS Motor Assy 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
141B
over speed error  IS Motor Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 IS Motor driver failure P.179)
Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of
1. Check the following connection and installation direction.
IS Motor specified driving direction.  IS Motor Assy to SUB-B Board (CN228, CN229)
141C Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the IS Motor Assy
 The polarity of IS Motor Assy cable is opposite.
encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 IS Motor Assy encoder failure
IS Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the IS Unit. (See
value. 1. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the IS Motor Assy P.266)
IS Motor  Irregular load encoder functions normally. (See P.440) 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
141E
velocity deviation error  IS Motor Assy encoder failure 2. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (IS Motor)” to P.189)
 IS Motor failure check if the IS Motor functions normally. (See P.434) 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 SUB Board is damaged. P.179)
 IS Motor driver failure


1. Connection failure of the IS Motor Assy.
damage.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed
 IS Motor Assy to SUB-B Board (CN228, CN229)
IS Motor than the specified value.
141F 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the IS Motor Assy Replace the IS Unit. (See P.266)
lock error  Irregular load
 IS Motor Assy encoder failure
3. Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (IS Motor)” to
 IS Motor failure
check if the IS Motor functions normally. (See P.434)
Ink Selector The number of operation counter of the Ink Selector has Replace the Ink Selector Assy.
1431 ---
life error reached the specified life. (10,000 times) (See P.262)
Using NVRAM Viewer, check which Cartridge Holder (the
Cartridge Holder Operations of the diaphragm in the Cartridge Holder exceeded Replace the Cartridge Holder.
1432 left one or the right one) has reached the end of the specified
life error the specified value. (See P.272) (See P.275)
life. (See P.340)
Positions of the ink system components do not match with the 1. Check the connection between the Wiper and the Cap 1. Replace the Wiper and Cap
sensor condition. Sensor (CN231), and conduct “Sensor Check” for function Sensor.
IS Unit position check (See P.435).
1433  Connection failure of the sensor 2. Replace the IS Unit HP Sensor.
sensor error
 Sensor failure 2. Check the connection of IS Unit HP Sensor (CN230), and 3. Replace the IS Unit. (See
 IS Unit failure conduct “Sensor Check” for function check (See P.435). P.266)
Ink select operation failed.
 Ink Selector’s load is abnormal. Discharge ink, and carry out “Ink Selector Movement Check” Replace the Ink Selector Assy.
1494 Ink Selector error
 Ink Selector Sensor failure for function check (See P.370). (See P.262)
 Ink Selector Motor failure
Ink Selector Sensor Ink select operation failed. Replace the Ink Selector Assy.
1496 ---
error detection  Ink Selector Sensor failure (See P.262)
1. The Ink Selector Motor or the Ink Selector Sensor is not
connected correctly.
damage.
2. Connection between the SUB Board and the Main Board
Ink Selector  Ink Selector Motor to SUB Board (CN105)
has an abnormality. Replace the Ink Selector Assy.
1497 Switching time-out  Ink Selector Sensor to SUB Board (CN106)
3. Ink selection is not completed after the specified time has (See P.262)
error  SUB Board to Main Board (CN100)
passed.
 Ink Selector Motor failure 2. Discharge ink, and carry out “Ink Selector Movement
Check” for function check (See P.399).
 Ink Selector Sensor failure
Ink Selector Replace the Main Board. (See
149D  Ink Selector irregular load ---

 150X Series PG unit error code

1. Connection failure of the APG Sensor.
2. When PG is being adjusted, the APG Sensor cannot detect
its origin. 1. Check the connection of the APG Sensor (CN104) for 1. Replace the APG Sensor. (See
PG origin detection disconnection and damage. P.207)
150C  APG Sensor failure
error 2. Run “FFC Position Check” to check the attachment status of 2. Replace the APG Motor Assy.
 APG Motor failure
FFC, tubes, and clamps.(See P.356) (See P.206)
3. Carriage is not moved to the PG adjustment position.
 FFC connection failure
 151X Series APG unit error code

1. Connection failure of the APG Motor.
2. The electric current flowing when driving the motor is
irregularly large.
APG Motor  APG Motor Assy cable is damaged.
Check the connection of the APG Motor Assy (CN207, Replace the APG Motor Assy.
151A
overload error CN206) for disconnection and damage. (See P.206)
 Irregular load
 APG Motor Assy encoder failure
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the APG Motor Assy.
than the specified value just before stopping. (See P.206)
APG Motor  Irregular load 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
151B ---
over speed error  APG Motor Assy encoder failure P.189)
 APG Motor driver failure P.179)
APG Motor specified driving direction. Check the connection of the APG Motor Assy (CN207, Replace the APG Motor Assy.
151C
reversing error CN206) for disconnection and damage. (See P.206)
 The polarity of APG Motor Assy cable is opposite.
 APG Motor Assy encoder failure
APG Motor Replace the Main Board. (See


being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the APG Motor Assy.
value. (See P.206)
APG Motor  Irregular load 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
151E ---
velocity deviation error  APG Motor Assy encoder failure P.189)
 APG Motor failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 APG Motor driver failure
1. Connection failure of the APG Motor Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed
APG Motor than the specified value. Check the connection of the APG Motor Assy (CN207, Replace the APG Motor Assy.
151F
lock error  Irregular load CN206) for disconnection and damage. (See P.206)
 APG Motor Assy encoder failure
 152X Series ROLL unit error code

1. Detects an irregular load of the Roll Feeding Motor. 1. Replace the Roll Lock Sensor.
 Roll Lock Sensor failure (See P.248)
 Roll Feeding Motor failure 2. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
1. Check if the Spindle is correctly attached to the printer.
Roll Feeding Motor 2. Detects the velocity deviation error of the Roll Feeding Assy. (See P.251)
1520 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Roll Lock Sensor
lock retry error Motor. 3. Replace the SUB-D Board. (See
 Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure P.191)
 SUB Board is damaged. 4. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Roll Feeding Motor driver failure P.179)
1. Connection failure of the Roll Lock Sensor. 1. Check the connection of the Roll Lock Sensor (CN607) for 1. Replace the Roll Lock Sensor.
Roll Lock Sensor 2. Cannot detect Roll lock operation. disconnection and damage. (See P.248)
1521
detection error  Roll Lock Sensor failure 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Roll Lock Sensor 2. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
 Roll Feeding Motor failure functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.251)
1. Connection failure of the Roll Feeding Sensor. 1. Check the connection of the Roll Feeding Sensor (CN606) 1. Replace the Roll Feeding
Roll Feeding Sensor 2. Roll Feeding Sensor does not detect the end of paper. for disconnection and damage. Sensor. (See P.253)
1522
detection error  Roll Feeding Sensor failure 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Roll Feeding 2. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
 Roll Feeding Motor failure Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.251)
1. Check the connection of the Roll Sensor (CN605) for
Cannot detect the end of the roll paper if it is fed.
Roll Sensor disconnection and damage.
1523  Connection failure of the Roll Sensor. Replace the Roll Sensor.
error 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Roll Sensor
 Roll Sensor failure


The electric current flowing when driving the motor is
irregularly large. 1. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
2. Check the connection of the Roll Feeding Motor Assy
Roll Feeding Motor  Roll Feeding Motor Assy cable is damaged. Assy. (See P.251)
152A (CN601, CN602) for disconnection and damage.
overload error  Irregular load 2. Replace the Roll Lock
3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Roll Feeding
 Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure Sensor.(See P.248)
Motor Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Roll Feeding Motor failure
1. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed Assy. (See P.251)
than the specified value just before stopping. 2. Replace the SUB-D Board. (See
Roll Feeding Motor  Irregular load P.191)
152B 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Roll Feeding
over speed error  Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Roll Feeding Motor driver failure 4. Replace the Roll Lock
Sensor.(See P.248)
Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of 1. Check if the Spindle is correctly attached to the printer.
1. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
times that it is being driven in the opposite direction to the 2. Check the connection of the Roll Feeding Motor Assy
Roll Feeding Motor Assy. (See P.251)
152C specified driving direction. (CN601, CN602) for disconnection and wrong installation.
reversing error 2. Replace the Roll Lock
 The polarity of Roll Feeding Motor Assy cable is opposite. 3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Roll Feeding
Sensor.(See P.248)
 Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure Motor Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
1. Replace the Main Board. (See
Roll Feeding Motor P.179)
152D  Irregular load Check if the Spindle is correctly attached to the printer.
driving time-out error 2. Replace the Roll Lock
Sensor.(See P.248)
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is 1. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified Assy. (See P.251)
value. 2. Replace the SUB-D Board. (See
Roll Feeding Motor  Irregular load P.191)
152E 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Roll Feeding
velocity deviation error  Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Roll Feeding Motor failure P.179)
 SUB Board is damaged. 4. Replace the Roll Lock
 Roll Feeding Motor driver failure Sensor.(See P.248)
1. Connection failure of the Roll Feeding Motor Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 1. Replace the Roll Feeding Motor
than the specified value. 2. Check the connection of the Roll Feeding Motor Assy
Roll Feeding Motor Assy. (See P.251)
152F (CN601, CN602) for disconnection and damage.
lock error  Irregular load 2. Replace the Roll Lock
3. Carry out “Encoder check” to check if the Roll Feeding
 Roll Feeding Motor Assy encoder failure Sensor.(See P.248)
 Roll Feeding Motor failure

 153X Series release motor error code

When detecting the origin of the driven roller (to reset the
1. Check the connection of the Release Sensor (CN307) for 1. Replace the Release Sensor.
driven roller), the status of the Release Sensor and the current
Release sensor disconnection and damage. (See P.226)
1530 roller position do not match.
HP detection error 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Release Sensor 2. Replace the Release Motor
 Release Sensor failure
functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.225)
 Release Motor failure
1. Connection failure of the Release Sensor.
1. Check the connection of the Release Sensor (CN307) for 1. Replace the Release Sensor.
2. Cannot detect the switching operation status of the driven
Release Sensor disconnection and damage. (See P.226)
1531 roller.
error 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Release Sensor 2. Replace the Release Motor
 Release Sensor failure
functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.225)
 Release Motor failure
irregularly large. 1. Check the connection of the Release Motor Assy (CN305,
Release Motor  Release Motor Assy cable is damaged. CN306) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Release Motor Assy.
153A
overload error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Release Motor (See P.225)
 Release Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Release Motor failure
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the Release Motor
than the specified value just before stopping. Assy. (See P.225)
Release Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Release Motor 2. Replace the SUB-C Board. (See
153B
over speed error  Release Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.190)
 Release Motor driver failure P.179)
1. Check the connection of Release Motor Assy (CN305,
Release Motor CN306) for disconnection and wrong installation. Replace the Release Motor Assy.
153C specified driving direction.
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Release Motor (See P.225)
 The polarity of Release Motor Assy cable is opposite.
Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Release Motor Assy encoder failure
Release Motor Replace the Main Board. (See


1. Connection failure of the Release Sensor.
2. Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the Release Motor
value. 1. Check the connection of the Release Sensor (CN307) for Assy. (See P.225)
Release Motor  Irregular load
disconnection and damage. 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
153E
velocity deviation error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Release Motor P.189)
 Release Motor Assy encoder failure
Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440) 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
P.179)
 SUB Board is damaged.
 Release Motor driver failure
1. Connection failure of the Release Motor.
1. Check the connection of the Release Motor (CN305) for
2. Connection failure of the Release Encoder.
disconnection and damage.
3. Connection between the SUB-C Board and the Main Board
2. Check the connection of the Release Encoder (CN306) for
has an abnormality.
Release Motor disconnection and damage. Replace the Release Motor Assy.
153F 4. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed
lock error 3. Check the connection between the SUB-C Board and Main (See P.225)
Board for disconnection and damage (CN301).
 Irregular load
4. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Release Motor
 Release Encoder failure
 154X Series cutter unit error code

1. Check if the paper is jammed around the Cutter Unit.
The home position of the Cutter is not detected. 1. Replace the Cutter HP Sensor.
2. Check the connection of the Cutter HP Sensor (CN315) for
Cutter HP Sensor  Operation failure due to paper jam (See P.304)
1540 disconnection and damage.
detection error  Cutter HP Sensor failure 2. Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
3. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Cutter HP Sensor
 Cutter Motor Assy failure (See P.258)
1. Check if the tension of the Cutter Timing Belt is proper.
The Cutter cannot return to its home position.
Cutter (See P.421) Replace the Cutter HP Sensor.
1541  Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt.
return error 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if Cutter HP Sensor (See P.304)
 Cutter HP Sensor failure
1. Connection between the SUB-B Board and the Main Board
has an abnormality. 1. Check the connection between the SUB-B Board and Main
Board for disconnection and damage (CN201).
2. The Cutter Unit operation is not detected.
Cutter Motor  Irregular load
2. Check the connection of the Cutter Motor Assy (CN222, Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
1549
disconnection error CN223) for disconnection and damage. (See P.258)
 Cutter Motor Assy cable is damaged.
3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor
 Cutter Motor Assy encoder failure
 Cutter Motor Assy failure


1. Connection failure of the Cutter HP Sensor.
1. Check the connection of the Cutter HP Sensor (CN315) for
2. The electric current flowing when driving the motor is
disconnection and damage.
irregularly large.
Cutter Motor  Irregular load
2. Check if any abnormal load is applied to the cutter Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
154A
overload error mechanism. (See P.258)
 Cutter Motor Assy cable is damaged.
3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor
 Cutter Motor Assy encoder failure
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed
1. Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
than the specified value just before stopping.
1. Check if the tension of the Cutter Timing Belt is proper. (See P.258)
 Irregular load
Cutter Motor (See P.421) 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
154B  Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt.
over speed error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor P.189)
 Cutter Motor Assy encoder failure
 SUB Board is damaged.
P.179)
 Cutter Motor Assy driver failure
1. Check the connection of the Cutter Motor Assy (CN222,
Cutter Motor CN223) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor (See P.258)
 The polarity of Cutter Motor Assy cable is opposite.
Cutter Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed
1. Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
1. Check if the tension of the Cutter Timing Belt is proper. (See P.258)
 Irregular load
Cutter Motor (See P.421) 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
154E  Slipping of the teeth of the Cutter Timing Belt.
velocity deviation error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor P.189)
 SUB Board is damaged.
P.179)
 Cutter Motor Assy driver failure
1. Connection failure of the Cutter Motor Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 1. Check the connection of the Cutter Motor Assy (CN222,
Cutter Motor than the specified value. CN223) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Cutter Motor Assy.
154F
lock error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Cutter Motor (See P.258)
 Cutter Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)

 155X Series paper thickness sensor/DCP motor error code

1. Check if the Paper Thickness Sensor is secured firmly.(See
1. During detection of paper thickness, the thickness cannot be
P.223)
determined because the sensor is not stable due to vibration
Paper Thickness 2. Check if the cable of the Paper Thickness Sensor is routed Replace the Paper Thickness
1551 or the like.
Sensor error correctly and secured with hooks. (See P.223) Sensor. (See P.223)
2. The Paper Thickness Sensor is damaged and cannot detect
the paper thickness correctly. 3. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Paper Thickness
Sensor functions normally. (See P.435)
irregularly large. 1. Check the connection of the Decompression Pump (CN232,
DCP Motor  Decompression Pump cable is damaged. CN233) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Decompression
155A
overload error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Decompression Pump. (See P.287)
 Decompression Pump encoder failure Pump encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Decompression Pump failure
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the Decompression
than the specified value just before stopping. Pump. (See P.287)
DCP Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Decompression 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
155B
over speed error  Decompression Pump encoder failure Pump encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 Decompression Pump driver failure P.179)
times that it is being driven in the opposite direction to the 1. Check the connection of the Decompression Pump Assy
DCP Motor specified driving direction. (CN232, CN233) for disconnection and wrong installation. Replace the Decompression
155C
reversing error  The polarity of Decompression Pump Assy cable is 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Decompression Pump. (See P.287)
opposite. Pump encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Decompression Pump Assy encoder failure
DCP Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the Decompression
value. Pump. (See P.287)
DCP Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Decompression 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
155E
velocity deviation error  Decompression Pump Assy encoder failure Pump encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 Decompression Pump failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Decompression Pump driver failure


1. Connection failure of the Decompression Pump Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 1. Check the connection of the Decompression Pump (CN232,
DCP Motor than the specified value. CN233) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Decompression
155F
lock error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Decompression Pump. (See P.287)
 Decompression Pump Assy encoder failure Pump encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Decompression Pump failure
 156X Series ASF motor error code

1. Check if the paper with the thickness more than 2.2 mm is
loaded.
Paper thickness at At power-on, the paper thickness sensor detects more than 2.2 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Paper Thickness Replace the Paper Thickness
1561
power-on error mm paper thickness. Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) Sensor. (See P.223)
3. Check and adjust the position of Paper Thickness Sensor
(See P.409).
When driving the ASF motor, the electric current to drive the
motor exceeded the threshold value continuously more than
1. Check if the paper is correctly loaded into the ASF Cassette.
specified times.
ASF Motor 2. Check the connection of the ASF Motor Assy (CN311,
 Paper feed error at the ASF Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
1562 abnormal load CN312) for disconnection and damage.
 Connection between the ASF Motor and the SUB-C Board (See P.230)
detection error 3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy
has an abnormality.
 ASF Motor Assy encoder failure
 ASF Motor failure
irregularly large. 1. Check the connection of the ASF Motor Assy (CN311,
ASF Motor  Irregular load CN312) for disconnection and damage. Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
156A
overload error  ASF Motor Assy cable is damaged. 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy (See P.230)
 ASF Motor Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly faster speed 1. Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
than the specified value just before stopping. (See P.230)
ASF Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy 2. Replace the SUB-C Board. (See
156B
over speed error  ASF Motor Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.190)
 ASF Motor driver failure P.179)


1. Check the connection of the ASF Motor Assy (CN311,
ASF Motor CN312) for disconnection and wrong installation. Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy (See P.230)
 The polarity of ASF Motor Assy cable is opposite.
ASF Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
value. (See P.230)
ASF Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy 2. Replace the SUB-C Board. (See
156E
velocity deviation error  ASF Motor Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.190)
 ASF Motor failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 ASF Motor driver failure
Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed
ASF Motor Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Motor Assy Replace the ASF Motor Assy.
156F  Irregular load
lock error encoder functions normally. (See P.440) (See P.230)
 157X Series ASF unit error code

ASF Retard Roller is not operating. 1. Check the connection of the Retard Roller Sensor (CN216) 1. Replace the Retard Roller
ASF Retard Roller  Connection failure of the Retard Roller Sensor. for disconnection and damage. Sensor. (See P.236)
1571
Sensor operation error  Retard Roller Sensor failure 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Retard Roller 2. Replace the ASF Sub Motor
 ASF Sub Motor failure Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.231)
ASF Pickup Roller is not operating. 1. Check the connection of the Pickup Unit Sensor (CN215) 1. Replace the Pickup Unit
ASF Pickup Roller  Connection failure of the Pickup Unit Sensor. for disconnection and damage. Sensor. (See P.236)
1572
operation error  Pickup Unit Sensor failure 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Pickup Unit 2. Replace the ASF Sub Motor
 ASF Sub Motor failure Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.231).
ASF Assist Roller is not operating. 1. Check the connection of the Assist Roller Sensor (CN217) 1. Replace the Assist Roller
ASF Assist Roller  Connection failure of the Assist Roller Sensor. for disconnection and damage. Sensor. (See P.236)
1573
operation error  Assist Roller Sensor failure 2. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Assist Roller 2. Replace the ASF Sub Motor
 ASF Sub Motor failure Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) Assy. (See P.231)


irregularly large. 1. Check the connection of the ASF Sub Motor Assy (CN213,
ASF Sub Motor  Irregular load CN214) for disconnection and damage. Replace the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
157A
overload error  ASF Sub Motor Assy cable is damaged. 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Sub Motor (See P.231)
 ASF Sub Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 ASF Sub Motor failure
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the ASF Sub Motor
value. Assy. (See P.231)
ASF Sub Motor over  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Sub Motor 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
157B
speed error  ASF Sub Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 ASF Sub Motor failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 ASF Sub Motor driver failure
1. Check the connection of the ASF Sub Motor Assy (CN213,
ASF Sub Motor CN214) for disconnection and wrong installation. Replace the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Sub Motor (See P.231)
 The polarity of ASF Sub Motor Assy cable is opposite.
 ASF Sub Motor Assy encoder failure
ASF Sub Motor driving Replace the Main Board. (See
time-out error P.179)
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the ASF Sub Motor
value. Assy. (See P.231)
ASF Sub Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Sub Motor 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
157E
velocity deviation error  ASF Sub Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 ASF Sub Motor failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 ASF Sub Motor driver failure
1. Connection failure of the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 1. Check the connection of the ASF Sub Motor Assy (CN213,
ASF Sub Motor lock than the specified value. CN214) for disconnection and damage. Replace the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
157F
error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ASF Sub Motor (See P.231)
 ASF Sub Motor Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 ASF Sub Motor failure

 158X Series edge release assy error code

When paper eject position is shifting, it cannot be shifted 1. Check if any foreign object is stuck in the paper eject
properly or this operation itself cannot be detected (Release => mechanism.
low load star wheels => high load star wheels). 2. Check the connection of the Eject Star Wheels Position 1. Replace the Eject Star Wheels
Paper eject position  Foreign object is stuck. Sensor (CN235) for disconnection and damage. Position Sensor.
1581
error  Connection error of the Eject Star Wheels Position Sensor 3. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Eject Star Wheels 2. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
 Eject Star Wheels Position Sensor failure Position Sensor functions normally. (See P.435) (See P.227)
 Edge Release Assy encoder failure 4. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release
 Edge Release Assy failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
1. Check the connection of the EG Sensor (CN220) for
ASF Edge Guide is not operating. The operation of the ASF disconnection and damage.
Edge Guide is not detected. 2. Check the connection of the Edge Release Assy (CN218, 1. Replace the Edge Sensor. (See
ASF Edge Guide  Connection failure of the EG Sensor. CN219) for disconnection and damage. P.229)
1582
open/close error  EG Sensor failure 3. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Edge Sensor 2. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
 Edge Release Assy encoder failure functions normally. (See P.435) (See P.227)
 Edge Release Assy failure 4. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release
irregularly large. 1. Check the connection of the Edge Release Assy (CN218,
EG Motor  Irregular load CN219) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
158A
overload error  Edge Release Assy cable is damaged. 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release (See P.227)
 Edge Release Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Edge Release Assy failure
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
value. (See P.227)
EG Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release Assy 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
158B
over speed error  Edge Release Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 Edge Release Assy failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Edge Release Assy driver failure
1. Check the connection of the Edge Release Assy (CN218,
EG Motor CN219) for disconnection and wrong installation. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
reversing error 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release (See P.227)
 The polarity of Edge Release Assy cable is opposite.
 Edge Release Assy encoder failure


EG Motor Replace the Main Board. (See
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified 1. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
value. (See P.227)
EG Motor  Irregular load Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release Assy 2. Replace the SUB-B Board. (See
158E
velocity deviation error  Edge Release Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440) P.189)
 Edge Release Assy failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 Edge Release Assy driver failure
1. Connection failure of the Edge Release Assy.
2. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 1. Check the connection of the Edge Release Assy (CN218,
EG Motor than the specified value. CN219) for disconnection and damage. Replace the Edge Release Assy.
158F
lock error  Irregular load 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the Edge Release (See P.227)
 Edge Release Assy encoder failure Assy encoder functions normally. (See P.440)
 Edge Release Assy failure
 159X Series ATC motor error code

irregularly large. 1. Replace the ATC Motor Assy.
2. Check the connection of the ATC Motor Assy (CN603,
ATC Motor  Irregular load (See P.250)
159A CN604) for disconnection and damage.
overload error  ATC Motor Assy cable is damaged. 2. Replace the Roll Lock
3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ATC Motor Assy
 ATC Motor Assy encoder failure Sensor.(See P.248)
 ATC Motor failure
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is 1. Replace the ATC Motor Assy.
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified (See P.250)
ATC Motor  Irregular load P.191)
159B 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ATC Motor Assy
over speed error  ATC Motor Assy encoder failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 ATC Motor failure P.179)
 ATC Motor driver failure Sensor.(See P.248)
Detects accumulatively more than the specified number of 1. Check if the Spindle is correctly attached to the printer.
1. Replace the ATC Motor Assy.
times that it is being driven in the opposite direction to the 2. Check the connection of the ATC Motor Assy (CN603,
ATC Motor (See P.250)
159C specified driving direction. CN604) for disconnection and wrong installation.
reversing error 2. Replace the Roll Lock
 The polarity of ATC Motor Assy cable is opposite. 3. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ATC Motor Assy
Sensor.(See P.248)
 ATC Motor Assy encoder failure encoder functions normally. (See P.440)


ATC Motor P.179)
159D  Irregular load Check if the Spindle is correctly attached to the printer.
driving time-out error 2. Replace the Roll Lock
Sensor.(See P.248)
Detects, when accelerating/decelerating the motor, that it is 1. Replace the ATC Motor Assy.
being driven at an irregularly faster speed than the specified (See P.250)
ATC Motor  Irregular load P.191)
159E 2. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ATC Motor Assy
velocity deviation error  ATC Motor Assy encoder failure 3. Replace the Main Board. (See
 ATC Motor failure P.179)
 ATC Motor driver failure Sensor.(See P.248)
1. There is an error on the Roll Unit. 2. Check if the Roll Unit and the printer are correctly
2. Connection failure of the Roll Lock Sensor. connected with the cable.
1. Replace the Roll Lock Sensor.
3. Connection between the SUB-D Board and the Main Board 3. Check the connection of the Roll Lock Sensor (CN607) for
(See P.248)
has an abnormality. disconnection and damage.
ATC Motor 2. Replace the ATC Motor Assy.
159F 4. Detects that it is being driven at an irregularly slower speed 4. Check the connection between the SUB-D Board and Main
lock error (See P.250)
than the specified value. Board (CN600) for disconnection and damage.
3. Replace the Roll Lock
 Irregular load 5. Carry out “Sensor Check” to check if the Roll Lock Sensor
Sensor.(See P.248)
 ATC Motor Assy encoder failure functions normally. (See P.435)
 ATC Motor failure 6. Carry out “Encoder Check” to check if the ATC Motor Assy
 18XX Series AID error code

1. Turn the power off and then on again to check if the printer
recovers from the error.
An error occurs during AID communication check. 2. Check the connection between the AID Board and Main
AID Replace the AID Board. (See
1801  Connection failure of the AID Board. Board for disconnection and damage (Main Board side:
communication error P.192)
 AID Board failure CN8, AID Board side: CN1).
3. Carry out “AID Function Check” to check if the AID Board

 1AXX/1FXX/200X/3000/4000/DXXy/FXXX Series main board/other error code

1. Replace the RTC backup
Incorrect RTC data The value information on various absolute time stored on Check and adjust the RTC status from “RTC&USB ID Check battery.
1A23
error NVRAM is abnormal. and Adjustment” (See P.425). 2. Replace the Main Board. (See
P.179)
1. Turn the power off and remove
the RTC backup battery.
2. After several seconds, re-attach
the battery and turn the power
RTC Access
1A26 The RTC circuit on the Main Board malfunctions. --- back on.
T/O error
3. If the printer recovers from the
error, set date and time using
“RTC&USB ID check and
adjustment”. (See P.425)
1. The Head FFC is not connected correctly. 1. Replace the Head FFC. (See
Check the connecting part of Head FFC if there is any loose or
2. The thermistor detects a temperature out of the P.282)
1A37 Thermistor error slant connection, or ripped terminals or the breaking of the
specification. 2. Replace the Printhead. (See
FFC (CN101, 102).
3. Head thermistor failure P.265)
Transistor 1. Transistor failure
Replace the Printhead. (See
1A38 environmental 2. The thermistor detects a temperature out of the ---
P.265)
temperature error specification.
1. Replace the Head FFC. (See
P.282)
1. Connection failure of the Head FFC.
2. Replace the Printhead. (See
2. The head is damaged due to a slant connection of the Head Check the connecting part of Head FFC if there is any loose or
P.265)
1A39 Head error FFC or the like. slant connection, or ripped terminals or the breaking of the
 The drive circuit in the Printhead is damaged. FFC (CN101, 102). 3. If the printer does not recover
from the error after trying 1 and
 The fuse of the Main Board has blown.
2, replace the Main Board. (See
P.179)
Head rank ID Carry out “Head ID Check & Input” to check the current ID.
1A41 The information of the Head rank ID is wrong. Configure the Head rank ID again.
input error (See P.372)
I2C communication
error (Between Replace the Main Board. (See
1A50 The I2C communication error has occurred in the Main Board. ---
elements on ASIC and P.179)
MAIN)


1. Replace the FFC (CN100)
between the Main Board and
I2C communication SUB Board.
Check the connection between the Main Board and the SUB
error (Between The I2C communication error between the Main Board and
1A51 Board if there is any loose or slant connection, or ripped 2. Replace the SUB Board. (See
elements on ASIC and SUB Board has occurred.
terminals or the breaking of the FFC (CN100). P.188)
SUB)
P.179)
Main Board
Turn the power off and then on again to check if the printer Replace the Main Board. (See
1AB0 communication error IC failure has occurred on the Main Board.
recovers from the error. P.179)*
(0)
Main Board
(1)
Main Board
(2)
Main Board
(3)
Main Board
(4)
Main Board
(5)
Main Board
(6)
Main Board
(7)
ILS (Cartridge Ink Level Sensor) control error has occurred. Replace the Main Board. (See
1F80 ILS error (1) ---
 The fuse of the Main Board has blown. P.179)*
1. Replace the Cartridge Holder.
(Check both right/left ones
ILS (Cartridge Ink Level Sensor) control error has occurred.
respectively.) (See P.272)(See
1FB8 ILS error (2)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
 Main Board failure
P.179)*


CSIC control error has occurred. Replace the Main Board. (See
1FB9 CSIC error (1) ---
 Main Board failure P.179)*
CSIC control error has occurred.
1FBE CSIC error (2)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
1FBF CSIC error (3)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
1. Replace the FFC between the
Cartridge Holder and Main
Check the following connections if there is any loose or slant Board. (Check both right/left
Communication failure between the Cartridge Holder and
connection, or ripped terminals or the breaking of cables. ones respectively.)
Main Board.
 Cartridge Holder (left) to Main Board (Main Board side: 2. Replace the Cartridge Holder.
1FC0 CSIC error (4)  Connection failure of the FFC.
CN500, IH side: CN1) (Check both right/left ones
 Cartridge Holder Board failure
 Cartridge Holder (right) to Main Board (Main Board side: respectively.) (See P.272)(See
 Main Board failure P.275)
CN400, IH side: CN1)
P.179)*
1FC1 CSIC error (5)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
1FC2 CSIC error (6)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
CSIC control error has occurred. Replace the Main Board. (See
1FC3 CSIC error (7) ---
 Main Board failure P.179)*


ILS control error has occurred. Replace the Main Board. (See
1FC4 ILS error (3) ---
ILS control error has occurred. Replace the Main Board. (See
1FC5 ILS error (4) ---
ILS control error has occurred.
1FC6 ILS error (5)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
P.179)*
P.179)*
P.179)*
1FCA ILS error (9)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*


1FCB ILS error (10)  Cartridge Holder Board failure --- P.275)
P.179)*
Replace the Main Board. (See
2000 NVRAM error NVRAM erase or write error has occurred. ---
P.179)*
Any value cannot be input when accessing SDRAM to write Replace the Main Board. (See
2002 SDRAM error ---
the value. P.179)
1. Re-install the firmware. (See
FLASH BOOT SUM 1. Installation of the firmware has been failed. P.347)
2003 ---
CHECK error 2. The Flash ROM is damaged. 2. Replace the Main Board. (See
P.179)
P.347)
200A F/W load error Reading/decompressing the firmware has been failed. ---
P.179)
System interrupt
A system failure such as CPU failure, defective cash or the like Replace the Main Board. (See
200D watchdog time-out ---
has occurred. P.179)
error
1. Replace the Power Supply
The AC power has been shut off due to a power failure, Board. (See P.186)
3000 AC shut-off unplugged, Power Supply Board failure, or Main Board failure Check if the Power cable is correctly connected.
or the like.
P.179)
1. Check the exchange part using
Make sure which parts have already reached the End of Life NVRAM viewer.
4000 Replace Parts Exchange parts is reached the end of life.
using NVRAM viewer. 2. Replace the parts which have
already reached the End of Life.
Turn the power off once and turn it back on to check if the
Service call for FW This is an error for debugging in the design stage. However, it P.347)
Dxxy printer recovers from the error. (Ignore it if the error does not
debugging may occur due to unexpected reasons such as external noises. 2. Replace the Main Board. (See
occur again).
P.179)
CPU related service  The firmware has a defect. P.347)
Fxxx Check if the installed firmware supports this printer.
call  The Main Board is broken. 2. Replace the Main Board. (See
P.179)
Note *: When replacing these parts, collect and send them to SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION to request error analysis (See P.69).

2.4 Remedies for Error Messages related to SpectroProofer

The Error messages and their corresponding remedies are explained below.
Code Details Cause Check Item Remedy

1. Turn the power off and re-install the SpectroProofer.
SpectroProofer The SpectroProofer or the Backing is not installed 2. Check the connection between the SpectroProofer and
01 ---
uninstallation error correctly. Main Board for disconnection and damage (Main
Board side: CN2, CN7).
Paper Eject Support Turn the power off and re-install the SpectroProofer and
02 The Paper Eject Support is not installed correctly. ---
uninstallation error Paper Eject Support.
1. Check the Backing Sensor from “SpectroProofer
Sensor Check”. (See P.442)
The Paper Pressing Plate does not work correctly. 2. Check if paper which meets the specifications is used, Replace the Paper Pressing Motor. (See
and the printer is used in the specified usage P.302)
Foreign material  Backing is not installed correctly.
environment. If the printer does not recover from the
13 detection error in paper  Paper that does not meet the specifications is used.
error, the paper pressing mechanism may
pressing  Connection failure of the Paper Pressing Motor 3. Check the connection of the Paper Pressing Motor for
have a phase shifting. Replace the
 Paper Pressing Motor failure disconnection and damage.
SpectroProofer.
4. Carry out “Paper Press Function Check” from
“SpectroProofer Movement Check”. (See P.444)
Paper pressing origin Origin position detection was not successfully made.
14 position detection --- Replace the SpectroProofer.
 Paper Pressing Unit failure
failure error
1. CR HP Sensor failure
2. The Paper Pressing Plate does not work correctly. 1. Check the Backing Sensor from “SpectroProofer
Sensor Check”. (See P.442)
 There is some foreign material within the carriage
movement range. 2. Check if paper which meets the specifications is used,
1. Replace the CR HP Sensor. (See P.304)
and the printer is used in the specified usage
CR HP Sensor no  Backing is not installed correctly. 2. Replace the Paper Pressing Motor. (See
15 environment.
detection error  White calibration tile holder is not installed P.302)
3. Check if the White calibration tile holder is installed
correctly. 3. Replace the SpectroProofer.
correctly.
 Paper that does not meet the specifications is used.
4. Carry out “CR Function Check” from “SpectroProofer
 Paper Pressing Unit failure Movement Check”. (See P.444)
3. Carriage mechanism failure
Paper pressing system Detects a load over the specified range when measuring it. 1. Replace the Paper Pressing Motor. (See
Carry out “Paper Press Function Check” from
16 abnormal measurement  Paper Pressing Motor failure P.302)
“SpectroProofer Movement Check”. (See P.444)
value error  Paper Pressing Unit failure 2. Replace the SpectroProofer.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Error Messages related to SpectroProofer 97

Code Details Cause Check Item Remedy

1. Check if there is any foreign material on the fan, and
The Drying Fan is not rotating. the fan can rotate manually.
Drying Fan lock  There is a foreign object stuck in the fan. 2. Check the connection of the Drying Fan for
65 Replace the Drying Fan. (See P.301)
detection error  Connection failure of the Drying Fan disconnection and damage.
 Drying Fan failure 3. Carry out “Fan Function Check” from “SpectroProofer
Movement Check”. (See P.444)
1. Check if the White calibration tile holder is installed,
Color measurement is not properly conducted. and the tile is not contaminated.
Replace the SpectroProofer and White
80 ILS calibration error  White calibration tile holder failure 2. Check if there is any dirt on the lens of the
calibration tile
 SpectroProofer failure SpectroProofer.
3. Check if the SpectroProofer lamp burned out.
Detects that the driving period of the CR Motor is
irregularly long.
D5 CR related drive error --- Replace the Main Board. (See P.179)
 Irregular load
1. Check the following connection for disconnection and 1. Replace the encoder for Paper Pressing
damage, and cable installation is correct. Motor. (See P.299)
Paper pressing related Fatal error related to the Paper Pressing Motor control  Encoder for paper pressing motor to Main-C Board 2. Replace the Paper Pressing Motor. (See
D6 P.302)
operating error occurred.  Paper Pressing Motor to Main-C Board
2. Carry out “Paper Press Function Check” from 3. Replace the Main-C Board. (See P.297)
“SpectroProofer Movement Check”. (See P.444) 4. Replace the Main Board. (See P.179)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Error Messages related to SpectroProofer 98

2.5 Remedies for Print Quality Troubles

This section provides troubleshooting of print quality troubles classifying them by observed symptom. Before performing troubleshooting, refer to "Nozzle Check" (p374) and print
nozzle check pattern. Confirm the printed result of the nozzle check pattern, and if any dot missing is found, perform the cleaning. Carry out “CL1” if nine nozzles or less are found,
and “CL2” if 10 nozzles or more are found.
Table 2-4. Print Quality Troubles

Symptom Cause Check Item Remedy
Clean the Wiper. (See P.457)
If the printer does not recover from the error after
The Wiper is contaminated. Check if the Wiper or the Wiper Cleaner is contaminated. cleaning, replace the following parts at a time.
 Wiper (See P.269)
 Wiper Cleaner (See P.270)
Clean the Head Cap. (See P.271)
The Head Cap is contaminated. Check if the Head Cap is contaminated. If the printer does not recover from the error after
cleaning, replace the Head Cap. (See P.271)
There is some foreign material on the Check if there is some foreign material on the Printhead.
Remove the foreign material if any. (See P.456)
Printhead. (See P.456)
There is something wrong in the pump If the tube is caught, re-install the IS Unit. (See
Check if the pump tube of the IS Unit is caught.
tube. P.266)
Eject ink, and re-attach the connected parts with a
Check if the Cartridge Holder, Ink Tubes and Ink Selector
The ink is leaking. torque driver. Be sure to attach the O ring correctly
The nozzles are still clogging after are connected correctly.
when reattaching them.
cleaning.
There is air in the Ink Tubes. Check if there is air in the Ink Tubes. Perform a cleaning (CL3).
Check the connection of the Head FFC. Connect the Head FFC again.
The Head FFC is not connected  Check if the Head FFC is connected at a slant. If the printer does not recover from the error, the
correctly.  Check if the Head FFC is damaged. cause may be the breaking of the Head FFC.
 Check if the terminal is peeled off. Replace the Head FFC (See P.282).
Replace the following parts in the order below.
If any of the remedies above does not help, conduct the  Printhead (See P.265)
---
remedy in the column on the right.  Main Board (See P.179) (The fuse may have
blown)
Clean the Antistatic Cloth using a cleaning sheet
Dust and such accumulate on the (See P.458).
Antistatic Cloth (SC-P5000 Series Check if any dust accumulates on the Antistatic Cloth. Replace it if not improved after cleaned, or it is
only) dirty or damaged (ripped or becomes fluffy) (See
P.254).
TROUBLE SHOOTING Remedies for Print Quality Troubles 99


If it is not correctly adjusted, carry out the
Carry out “Test Pattern Print” from the Service Program.
following adjustments.
Adjustment failure of the Ink Mark (See P.349)
 Auto Bi-D Adjustment (See P.381)
Sensor  Check if “Auto Bi-D Adjustment” is carried out
 Ink Mark Sensor check & adjustment (See
properly.
P.370)
Carry out the function check of the Ink Mark Sensor. (See
Replace the Ink Mark Sensor if the function check
Ink Mark Sensor is damaged. P.370)
shows trouble (See P.200).
 Check if it functions normally.
Gaps can be seen in the borders. Print the following adjustment patterns to check if the following adjustments.
The printhead has not been adjusted adjustment is correctly made.  CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment (See
properly.  CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment (See P.376) P.376)
 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (See P.379)  PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (See
P.379)
1. Check if the paper type setting is proper.
1. Correct the paper type setting.
2. Check the height of the Printhead. (See P.361) Check if
Adjustment failure of the height of PG it is within the specified range. 2. Adjust the values of check items in the left
column, if any of them is out of the specified
3. Check the position of the Paper Thickness Sensor. (See
range.
P.409) Check if it is within the specified range.


Check the paper type setting screen.
The print setting is not proper.  Check if the paper type setting is proper.
2. Select a higher print quality mode.
 Check if the low print quality mode is selected.
Print the following adjustment patterns to check if the following adjustments.
P.379)
Check if the Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment
Carry out the adjustment if it is out of the specified
The paper feed amount is not proper. are made properly (See P.413).
range. (See P.413)
 Check if it is in the specified range.
Carry out the following adjustments if it is out of
Horizontal bandings (black/white lines or 1. Check the PG of the Printhead. (See P.361) Check if it is
the specified range.
uneven color) can be seen. within the specified range.
Adjustment failure of the PG  PG Height Check & Adjustment (See P.361)
2. Check the position of the Paper Thickness Sensor. (See
 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment
P.409) Check if it is within the specified range.
(See P.409)
1. Re-attach any parts with trouble (See P.211)(See
Carry out “PF Encoder and Scale Check”. (See P.408) P.212).
PF Scale/PF Encoder cannot be  Check if the PF Scale is damaged or contaminated. 2. Clean the PF Scale with ethanol if it is
encoded properly.  Check if the PF Scale is not skewed. contaminated.
 Check if the PF Encoder is installed correctly. 3. Replace it if it is damaged. (See P.211)(See
P.212)
The tension of the PF Timing Belt is not Measure the tension of the PF Timing Belt to check if it is Carry out “PF Belt Adjustment” if it is out of the
proper. in the specified range. (See P.406) specified range. (See P.406)
Carry out Motor Measurement Adjustment for PF Motor If the printer does not recover from the error,
Adjustment failure of the PF Motor
(See P.434). replace the PF Motor (See P.210).


Carry out “Test Pattern Print” from the Service Program. following adjustments.
Adjustment failure of the Ink Mark (See P.349)  Auto Bi-D Adjustment (See P.381)
Sensor
 Check if “Gap Adjustment” is carried out properly.  Ink Mark Sensor check & adjustment (See
P.370)
Print the following adjustment patterns to check if the following adjustments.
P.379)
Carry out the following adjustments if it is out of
1. Check the PG of the Printhead. (See P.361) Check if it is
the specified range.
within the specified range.
Adjustment failure of the PG  PG Height Check & Adjustment (See P.361)
Vertical bandings (black/white lines or 2. Check the position of the Paper Thickness Sensor. (See
uneven color) can be seen. P.409) Check if it is within the specified range.
(See P.409)
1. Re-attach any parts with trouble (See P.198)(See
Check the CR Scale encoding status (See P.367). P.197).
CR Scale/CR Encoder are not properly
 Check if the CR Scale is damaged or contaminated. 2. Clean the CR Scale with ethanol if it is
encoded.
 Check if the CR Encoder is installed correctly. contaminated.
3. Replace it if it is damaged. (See P.198)
The tension of the CR Timing Belt is Measure the tension of the CR Timing Belt to check if it is Carry out “CR Belt Tension Adjustment” if it is
not proper. in the specified range. (See P.440) out of the specified range. (See P.440)
Carry out “Active Damper Adjustment” if it is out
Adjustment failure of the motor Check if the calibration of Active Damper is done.
of the specified range. (See P.369)
Check if “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR Motor)” is Carry out “Motor Measurement Adjustment (CR
Adjustment failure of the CR Motor
carried out (See P.434). Motor)”. (See P.434)
Check the suction setting of the fan from the panel.(See If the paper is rippled, lower the suction level.
Adjustment failure of the Suction Fan P.423) If the printer does not recover from the error, carry
Check if the paper is not rippled. out Suction Check & Adjustment (See P.423).
Lack of lubrication on CR drive Check if the grease of CR Unit Oil Pad is not dried out (See
If it is dried out, lubricate (See P.464).
mechanism P.464).


 Check if the paper is not wrinkled, bent, rippled, or
warped.
 Replace the paper with paper in a fine state.
*Warps under 2.5 mm is within the specification and
 Adjust the PG setting depending on the paper
will not be a problem.
thickness.
 Check if the paper is not too thick and is reaching the
The media is not proper.  Carry out PG Height Adjustment (See P.361).
head.
 Make the front/back margin wider to prevent
 Check if the paper is not too thin that wrinkles are
paper distortion.
formed when feeding it.
 Print in lower print quality.
 Check if the end of paper is not distorted by High Duty
printing.
 Check if the paper is not fed before the ink is dry.  Set a longer “Drying Time” from the panel.
 Check if the ink of low absorbency or slow-drying  Set a lower ink density from “Paper Setup” in
The ink density is not proper.
media is used. the printer driver, or from the configuration
 Check if the ink density level is not set too high. screen if using RIP.
Check if the paper touches the Printhead.
 Printed side is smeared with ink Adjust the PG from Paper Setup depending on the
The PG height is not proper.  Check if the PG is not too narrow for the paper
 Printed side is smudged paper thickness.
thickness.
Carry out “PG Height Check” if it is out of the
The PG height is not proper. Check the PG height (See P.361).
specified range. (See P.361)
Check if the ink is attached on the star wheels.
Print some blank pages with plain paper to clean
Ink is attached on the star wheels. Also check the items and remedies in “The ink density is the printer.
not proper” above.
There is some foreign material on the Check if there is some foreign material on the Printhead. Print some blank pages with plain paper to clean
Printhead. (See P.456) the printer.
The ink is attached on the Driven Print some blank pages with plain paper to clean
Check if the Driven Roller is clean.
Roller. the printer.
If the paper is rippled, lower the suction level.
Check the suction setting of the fan from the panel.
Adjustment failure of the Suction Fan If the printer does not recover from the error, carry
Check if the paper is not rippled.
out Suction Check & Adjustment (See P.423).
Clean the Antistatic Cloth using a cleaning sheet
Dust and such accumulate on the (See P.458).
Antistatic Cloth (SC-P5000 Series Check if any dust accumulates on the Antistatic Cloth. Replace it if not improved after cleaned, or it is
only) dirty or damaged (ripped or becomes fluffy) (See
P.254).


 Clean the platen if it is contaminated. (See
 Check if the ink is attached on the platen. P.460)
The platen is contaminated.
 Check if the setting of the “Paper Size Check” is “On”.  Set the “Paper Size Check” to On from the
control panel.
The backside of paper is contaminated by The waste ink pads for borderless
ink smear. Check if the waste ink pads for borderless printing is Securely attach the ink pads. Replace the ink pads
printing are not securely attached and
attached correctly. if badly dirty.
contaminating paper.
Lower the “Paper Suction” from the control panel.
Suction Fan is making the ink mists
Check if the suction level of the fan is proper. If it does not help, carry out Suction Check &
drift to the back of the printing paper.
Adjustment (See P.423).
Check if the ink is within its expiration date.
Ink quality is declining. Is it within the date on the box? Replace the expired ink.
Is it within six months from the opening of the package?
Uneven color is shown within the parts/ The ink in the ink cartridge is not Check if the ink cartridge has shaken enough before it is Take out the ink cartridge. Shake it well
across the pages of the printed paper. agitated enough. installed. horizontally in its long-side-direction.
If the color is uneven within a paper’s left and right side,
Carry out PG Height Check to set it within the
The PG height is not proper. check the PG adjustment value (See P.361).
specified range (See P.361).
 Check if it is within the specified range.
Check the “Color Correction” status from the basic setting
The “Color Correction” setting is not screen of the printer driver.
Adjust to reflect the user expectation.
The printed color differs from the user proper.  Check if the Color Correction setting reflects the
expectation. expectation.
The color management setting is not Check if the color management setting matches the Refer to “Color Management Printing” in the
proper. application software and the OS used. User’s Guide, and make proper settings.
If the Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment has not
If the Printhead, Main Board, Power Supply Board of the
The color is uneven between several Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment been carried out, check that the Head ID is
printer with trouble has been replaced before, check if the
printers. has not been carried out. correctly input (See P.372), and carry out the
Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment has been carried out.
adjustment (See P.382).
 Check if the Head ID is input correctly.  Check the Head ID and input the correct one if
 Check if “Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment” is necessary. (See P.372)
Too much ink discharge.
carried out after replacing the Printhead, Main Board  Carry out “Colorimetric Calibration
and Power Supply Board. Adjustment”. (See P.382)
Blurred print
Does the same thing goes with the printing through
If using RIP, check if the same symptom occurs when the printer driver?
The ink dot sizes are not proper.
printing through the printer driver. Yes: Media is most likely the cause.
No: RIP setting is the cause.


The UltraSmooth Fine Art Paper is
automatically loaded (even it is not Check if the roll paper feeding is set to auto. Set the paper feed setting to manual.
supported of auto feeding).
The roll paper was set for a long time
Remove the paper if the printer is left for a long
that the Driven roller impressed the Check if the printer is left with the roll paper installed.
time.
paper.
 Check the following rollers.
 Pickup Roller
Paper dust is attached or the traces of the  Retard Roller Sensor
rollers appear.  Intermediate Roller
 Driven Roller
The paper dust attached on the roller of  Paper Ejection Roller
Check if the PF rollers do not have paper dust on.
the ink path is transferred to the paper.  Print some blank pages with plain paper to
clean the printer.
 If cleaning does not help, replace the following
parts.
 Pickup Roller (See P.232)
 Retard Roller Sensor (See P.236)

2.6 Trouble on Paper Feeding

This section describes the possible trouble on paper feeding and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-5. Trouble on Paper Feeding

 Remove Paper Cassette once and set the paper
once again. (Make sure not to set the paper with
Paper Cassette attached to the printer.)
 Set the sheets again after flipping through them
well.
Multiple-sheet feed occurred because  Do not refill paper.
Is paper set correctly in Paper Cassette?
the sheets stuck to each other. To “refill paper” is:
 To fill new paper on the remaining paper
which you took out from the package and
Paper is not fed correctly from the paper set in Paper Cassette.
cassette.
 To fill paper from different packages on top
of each other in Paper Cassette.
 If any paper dust accumulation on the roller,
feed a plain paper sheet several times to remove
the paper dust.
Check Pickup Roller and Retard Roller if any paper dust
Paper feed rollers are not working.  If not improved even though they are cleaned,
accumulation, damage and such.
replace the following.
 Pickup Roller (See P.232)
 Retard Roller Sensor (See P.236)
Misadjustment of PE Sensor Rear AD Adjustment was done correctly? Perform Rear AD Adjustment. (See P.412)
Paper cannot be fed as rear manual feed
Perform Sensor Check of the service program to check if
from the roll paper feed slot on the rear
PE Sensor is not working. PE Sensor operates normally. (See P.435) If not, replace PE Sensor. (See P.216)
normally.
 Is the sensor working properly?
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Paper Feeding 106


If their attachment status is incorrect, install the
Carry out PF Encoder and Scale Check. (See P.408)
parts once again.(See P.211)(See P.212)
PF Encoder cannot encode PF Scale  Any dirt or scratch on PF Scale?
 If PF Scale is dirty, wipe the dirt off with
correctly.  Is PF Scale attached obliquely?
ethanol. If any scratches on it, replace PF Scale.
 Is PF Encoder attached correctly?
(See P.212)
Measure PF Belt tension to check if it falls within the If not within the standard, perform the PF Belt
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is PF Belt tension is incorrect.
standard. (See P.406) tension adjustment. (See P.406)
abnormal.
Motor Measurement Adjustment of PF Motor was done? Perform Motor Measurement Adjustment of PF
Misadjustment of PF Motor
(See P.434) Motor. (See P.434)
 Change the setting of paper suction.
Check the setting of paper suction on the Printer Setup
Menu of Control Panel or the printer driver menu.  If not improved even though the setting is
Suction is too strong or too weak.
changed, perform Suction Check &
 Is the suction power appropriate?
Adjustment. (See P.423)
Check the following rollers in the paper path if any paper
dust accumulation, damage and such.
If any paper dust accumulation on the rollers, feed
Paper feeding or paper ejecting is There is abnormality of rollers in the  Intermediate rollers
a plain paper sheet several times to remove the
abnormal. paper path.  Paper feed rollers
paper dust.
 Driven rollers
 Eject rollers
First turn off the printer and remove Paper Cassette
and Rear Unit, then open the printer cover. Check
There is foreign material inside the
Any foreign material inside the printer or SpectroProofer? the inside and remove the foreign material if any.
printer.
If SpectroProofer is attached, check the inside for
Cannot cancel the paper jam. foreign material.
Perform Sensor Check of the service program to check if
If any abnormality is found, replace PE Sensor
PE Sensor is not working. PE Sensor operates normally. (See P.435)
with a new one. (See P.435)
 Is the sensor operating normally?
Check the Printer Setup Menu on Control Panel if the
Paper Skew Check is not set. Change the Paper Skew Check setting to On.
Paper Skew Check setting is set to Off.
Check the Printer Setup Menu on Control Panel if the
Paper is skewing. Paper Size Check is not set. Change the Paper Size Check setting to On.
Paper Size Check setting is set to Off.
Perform Sensor Check of the service program to check if If any abnormality is found, replace PW Sensor
PW Sensor is not working.
PW Sensor operates normally. (See P.435) with a new one. (See P.435)


“Auto Roll Feeding” function is
The paper is cut shorter than the current enabled.
Check in the Paper Setup menu if Auto Roll Feeding is
custom paper size, when printing lengthy (If a blank space exists at the end of the enabled. Disable Auto Roll Feeding.
size. print data, the paper is cut shorter than
the custom set length.)
Check if Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment is
Paper feed amount is not configured done properly. If not, perform the adjustment. (See P.413)
correctly.
 Is the adjustment result within the standard?
Actual margins differ from the specified Check if PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment is done
Paper width and/or length cannot be
margins. properly. If not, perform the adjustment. (See P.418)
detected.
Check if Paper Size Check in the Printer Setup menu is set
Top of paper cannot be detected. Set Paper Size Check On.
to Off.
Check if Cut Position Check & Adjustment is done
Misadjustment of the cut position properly. If not, perform the adjustment. (See P.420)
Current paper is not supported for Consult the User's Guide.
---
borderless printing.  Current paper supported?
Check the roll paper margin settings and specify
Roll paper margin is set to 15mm or 35
appropriate values. (*If “Roll Paper (Banner)” is
mm and is prioritized over the margin Is the roll paper margin is set to 15mm or 35 mm?
selected, the top and bottom margins are set to
setting of your application software.
0mm.
Actual margins differ from the specified SpectroProofer is installed.
margins. If SpectroProofer is installed, the
shortest cut length becomes longer than --- ---
that when not installed (80mm =>
210mm).
Default bottom margin for cut sheets is
14mm for borderless printing and
17mm for normal printing.
If the printable area is maximized, the --- ---
bottom margin can be set to 3mm
regardless of borderless or normal
printing.


 Check the connection of Roll Unit Sensor.  Connect the sensor correctly.
Roll Unit Sensor is not working.  Perform Sensor Check of the service program to check  If any abnormality is found, replace Roll Unit
if Roll Unit Sensor operates normally. Sensor. (See P.435)
In the following situations, the roll
paper cannot be rewound automatically,
Roll paper cannot be rewound. so rewind the roll paper manually.
 Previously printed paper is still
--- ---
uncut and remains inside the printer.
 Roll Sensor is not detecting paper.
 Remaining roll paper is little and
slipping.
Check the cutter operation counter in NVRAM Viewer if
Cutter blade is dull. If so, replace the cutter with a new one.
the counter has come near the specified life.
Measure the cutter belt tension to check if the value is If the value is out of standard, perform Cutter Belt
Cutter belt tension is not appropriate.
Paper cut is not done well. within the standard. (See P.421) Tension Check. (See P.421)
Check if Cut Position Check & Adjustment is done
Misadjustment of the cutter position properly. If not, perform the adjustment. (See P.420)

2.7 Printer does not Operate

This section describes the possible trouble on inoperative printer and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-6. Printer does not Operate

Power cable is not plugged in to the
 Power cable plugged in firmly?  Plug in the power cable firmly.
outlet. Or, something is wrong with the
 Power cable plugged in straight?  Replace the power cable.
power cable.
Do not configure any multiple connection (octopus
Problem on the power source (such as
Multi-tapped power source? wiring) from a single outlet. Try to use the wall
unsteady electrical voltage)
outlet directly.
Problem on Power Supply Board Power Supply Board and Main Board connected properly?
Reconnect the connector.
connection (CN1)
Printer does not turn on
Operation Panel Board (CN1) and Main Board (CN9)
connected properly?
Problem on Operation Panel Board  Reconnect the connector.
 Anything abnormal?
connection  Replace the FFC with trouble.
 FFC damaged?
 FFC terminal flipped?
If none of the remedies above helps, 1. Replace AC inlet.
there is a problem on Power Supply --- 2. If the printer still does not recover, replace
Board. Power Supply Board. (See P.186)
Connection cable is not plugged in. Or,  Connection cable plugged in properly?
 Plug in the connection cable firmly.
something is wrong with the connection  Connection cable damaged?
 Replace the connection cable.
cable.  Connection cable twisted or have something on?
 Check if the computer meets the cable specs below:
Computer specification does not meet USB2.0 (High Speed USB)  Try different way of connecting.
the requirements of connection cable. Ethernet 10Base-T/100Base-TX  Change the computer.
 Other computers recognized?
Printer not Recognized by Computer
 Using a printer selector?
Printer and computer not directly Connect computer and printer directly with one
 Using extension cord?
connected cable.
 Using USB hub?
 If the product name is not listed, re-install the
 Product name for this printer listed in computer's printer
printer driver.
Printer driver installed incorrectly list?
 Set the correct port (See the User's Manual for
 Printing port set correctly?
details).
TROUBLE SHOOTING Printer does not Operate 110

Table 2-6. Printer does not Operate

Start the Service Program “USB Port and Network
Communication Check” and check if network
Network communication unavailable If there are any problems, check the following.
communication is available.
 Any problems on network communication?
Wrong LAN cable. Using crossing cable? Use straight cable.
 LAN cable plugged in firmly?
 LAN cable not plugged in firmly  Plug in the LAN cable firmly.
 LAN cable damaged?
 LAN cable damaged  Replace LAN cable.
 LAN cable twisted or have something on?
LAN connector damaged LAN connector is damaged or distorted? If so, replace the broken Network Board.
Problems on network environment: Check the current MAC address setting with Service
Printing unavailable/Printer status not Incorrect MAC address. Program. (See P.429) Set the correct MAC address.
displayable  Correct MAC address set?
Product name for this printer displayed on computer's port
IP address changed Set the port to the new IP address.
setting screen?
EPW network module not installed EPW network module installed? Install EPW network module.
Network Board and Main Board connected properly?
Problem on the Network Board (CN700, CN701) Reconnect the connector.
connection
If none of the remedies above helps,
there is a problem on the Network --- Replace the Network Board. (See P.182)
Board.
 Printing is paused Check the print job status from computer.
Power LED on but does not operate Resume or delete any paused jobs.
 Pooled jobs  Any paused jobs?
The Network Board and Main Board connected properly?
Problem on the Network Board
Printer does not turn off (CN700, CN701) Reconnect the connector.
connection
If none of the remedies above helps... There is a problem on Main Board. --- Replace Main Board. (See P.179)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Printer does not Operate 111

2.8 Abnormal Operations

This section describes the possible trouble on abnormal printer operations and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-7. Abnormal Operations

Measure and check if CR belt tension is within the Adjust CR belt tension if it is out of the standard.
Improper CR belt tension
standards. (See P.359) (See P.359)
If it does not move smoothly, lubricate the
following parts.
Lack of lubrication on the CR Unit and
Pull CR belt to see if CR Unit moves smoothly.  Carriage shaft (posts, shaft, location where the
Abnormal noise when carriage is in the carriage shaft.
CR Unit is attached.) (See P.464)
operation
 Oil Pad (See P.464)
 Attach the parts properly if there is any
Check the encoding status of the CR Scale. (See P.367)
CR Scale/CR Encoder is not read attachment trouble. (See P.198)
 CR Scale damaged or dirty?
properly  Clean CR Scale with ethanol.
 CR Encoder attached properly?
 Replace it if damaged. (See P.198)
 Adjust PF belt tension if not within standards.
 PF belt tension within standards? (See P.406)
 Holder, Roller not attached properly
 Holder, Roller attached properly?  Set the Holder, Roller properly. If the printer
 Holder, Roller is damaged
 Any Holder, Roller damaged? still does not recover, replace the Holder,
Abnormal noise in regular intervals while Roller. (See P.248)
sending paper
Operate PF Encoder and Scale Check. (See P.408) Operate PF Encoder and Scale Check. (See P.408)
PF Scale/PF Encoder is not read  PF Scale damaged or dirty?  PF Scale damaged or dirty?
properly  PF Scale attached straight?  PF Scale attached straight?
 PF Encoder attached properly?  PF Encoder attached properly?
Measure and check if PF belt tension is within standards. Adjust PF belt tension if not within standards. (See
Improper PF belt tension
(See P.406) P.406)
 Attach the parts properly if there are any
Abnormal metallic sound while sending Operate PF Encoder and Scale Check. (See P.408)
attachment troubles. (See P.211)(See P.212)
paper out PF Scale/PF Encoder is not read  PF Scale damaged or dirty?
 Clean PF Scale with ethanol.
properly  PF Scale attached straight?
 Replace the part if damaged. (See P.211)(See
 PF Encoder attached properly?
P.212)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Abnormal Operations 112

Table 2-7. Abnormal Operations

Lack of lubrication on “SHAFT, If it does not move smoothly, lubricate “SHAFT,
RELEASE, PAPER GUIDE, UPPER Does the driven release move smoothly? RELEASE, PAPER GUIDE, UPPER UNIT”. (See
UNIT” P.464)
 Replace the Release Motor Assy if the release
Abnormal noise when the driven release is
in operation scale has trouble. (See P.225)
 Release scale damaged or dirty?  Attach the release encoder properly if there are
Release scale is not encoded properly.
 Release encoder attached properly? any attachment troubles. (See P.226)
If the trouble still remains, replace the release
encoder.
Abnormal noise other than the ones  Unfixed screws? Fix the parts to the same place in same manner as
Abnormal noise other than the ones listed listed above  Springs and hooks fixed at proper positions? before disassembly.
above Harnesses or FFCs are not secured Fix the parts to the same place in same manner as
Harnesses and FFCs secured properly by clamps or tape?
properly after reassembly. before disassembly.
Color inks consumed when printing in This is not a trouble. Both cleaning and
--- ---
black black printing consume color ink.
This is not a trouble. Maintenance Box
A Maintenance Box is consumed faster
2 is rarely consumed except for --- ---
than the other
borderless printing.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Abnormal Operations 113

2.9 Problems on SpectroProofer

This section describes the possible trouble on abnormal SpectroProofer operations, their causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-8. Problems on SpectroProofer

 Turn the printer off. Re-insert the
 Communication cable properly connected? communication cable and then turn on the
Not connected to printer properly  Mounter not completely fit to the printer because of a printer.
foreign object?  Take out any foreign objects and reattach the
mounter.
Communication cable was connected Was communication cable connected while the printer is Turn the printer off. Re-insert the communication
while the printer is ON OFF? cable and turn on the printer.
 Paper guide unit properly attached?
Paper guide unit is not attached  Paper guide unit’s rib for detection damaged? Paper  Re-attach the paper guide unit.
properly. guide sensor detects whether Paper guide unit is  Replace the paper guide unit if damaged.
attached or not.
Backing not recognized Backing attached properly? Check if Backing Sensor is active. (See P.442)
Full side front corner of Backing
Any troubles in Backing corner? Replace Backing if damaged.
SpectroProofer is not operating/recognized damaged
 Is USB cable between Mounter from SpectroProofer
Power/USB cable not connected to properly connected? Turn the printer off, and connect the cables
SpectroProofer  IS DC cable between the Mounter from SpectroProofer properly.
properly connected?
Foreign object in the path of paper Foreign object in the path of paper pressing plate
Remove any foreign objects.
pressing plate initialization. initialization.
CR drive mechanism or the paper If there is a message, refer to Remedies for Error
Error message on the panel?
pressing plate is damaged Messages related to SpectroProofer (P.97)
Firmware version is not “M111E8” or
later (ILS30EP is supported by Is firmware version “M111E8” or later? Install the latest Firmware. (See P.347)
“M111E8”or later)
Connection between the Mounter and Is the connection between the Mounter and the Refer to the User's Guide, and connect the mounter
the SpectroProofer is not properly. SpectroProofer properly? and the SpectroProofer properly.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Problems on SpectroProofer 114


 Backing is dirty:
Wipe off the dirt with a soft dry cloth. If there
are any hard-to-remove stain, wipe with a cloth
damped with water and then wipe off remaining
Ink on the paper pressing plate or Check if the paper pressing plate or Backing is not dirty. liquid with a dry cloth.
Paper smeared with ink
Backing is transferred to the paper  Paper pressing plate is dirty:
Wipe off the dirt with a soft cloth damped with
diluted mild detergent, and then wipe off
remaining liquid with a dry cloth.
Check if the paper is set upside-down. Re-set the paper.
 Raise the paper eject support.
 Is the paper eject support of the Stacker raised?
 Take away the foreign objects
Roll paper jam A foreign material in the roll paper path  Any foreign object/paper in the paper path?
 Take away the paper or obstacles from the
 Any obstacles on the Stacker?
Stacker.
Obstacle in the paper path for color
Bottom part of the plain paper are bent or
measurement (The paper is fed in a Check if any obstacles exist in the back of the printer. Remove the obstacle.
rippled
straight path when color is measured.).


Adjust the printer if there are any print quality
Check if the printings has no quality problems such as dot
Poor quality printings problem (Refer to Remedies for Print Quality
missing or color unevenness.
Troubles (P.99)
Paper set position is not proper (color
measurement fails when the paper is set
too far to the HOME/FULL side, since Check if the paper is set in proper position. Re-set the paper.
the pattern overlaps the paper pressing
plate frame)
Improper paper settings Check if the paper setting matches the paper set. Re-do the settings.
Check if a black Backing is not used when measuring a
Improper Backing Use a white Backing when measuring a clear film.
clear film.
 Is “Error Code 80” displayed? (See P.97)
 Attach white calibration tile properly.
Color measurement failure White calibration tile is not recognized.  Check if the white calibration tile is attached.
 Clean the white calibration tile (See P.461).
 Check if the white calibration tile is not dirty.
SpectroProofer lens is dirty. Blow away the dust and dirt with air.
 Check if the SpectroProofer lens has dust or dirt on.
SpectroProofer lamp burned out. Replace the lamp.
 Check if the SpectroProofer lamp burned out
 Check if the CR HP Sensor is attached properly.
 Carry out “Sensor Check” of the service program to  Attach CR HP Sensor properly.
Error in CR HP Sensor
check if the CR HP Sensor is working properly (See  Replace the sensor if it is not working properly.
P.442).
 Change the RIP settings.
Use the SpectroProofer Checker, and check that RIP have
RIP issue (Only SC-P5000 Series)  Replace the hardware (printer, calibrator,
any problems. (See P.449)
mounter, or USB cable).
Not enough storage capacity in HDD
Check if there is enough capacity in HDD for saving the
for saving the color measurement Increase the disk space.
color measurement results
results
Color measurement result cannot be saved
Check if the file attribute is set to “Writable” when Set the file attribute is set to “Writable” when
Improper file attribute
overwriting the file. overwriting the file.
Connection cable not supported Check if a USB2.0 supported cable is used. Replace the cable.


Check the following:  Attach the Backing and the white calibration
 Is “Error Code 80” displayed? (See P.97) tile properly.
 Is the Backing attached to the proper position?  Clean the white calibration tile (See P.461).
Color calibration not done properly  Is the white calibration tile not dirty?  If the remedies above do not help, replace the
 Is the SpectroProofer calibrated? SpectroProofer and the white calibration tile.
Carry out “Sensor Check” of the service program to check  Re-attach the sensor if it is not set properly.
if the CR HP Sensor is working properly (See P.442).  Replace the sensor if it is not working properly.
Paper length is out the range of the Use paper of the length within A2 Portrait
Check if the paper length is within A2 Portrait (594.0mm).
guaranteed color measurement (594.0mm)
 Make the paper/printing/ink density settings
Odd color measurement result according to the media used.
 Are the paper settings and the printing settings proper?
 Replace distorted paper.
Ripples/warp in the paper  Are the paper not rippled or warped?
 If the remedies above do not help, adjust the
 Is the ink density proper (not too dense)?
printer (Refer toTrouble on Paper Feeding
(P.106)).
 Make the paper settings according to the media
 Is the paper setting proper? used.
Double feed of plain paper
 Were the paper fanned before set to the paper cassette?  Fan the paper well, and re-set them to the paper
cassette.
 Is the ink density proper (not too dense)?  Adjust ink density if it is too dense.
Paper pressing plate impressing the
 Is the ink drying time proper (long enough to dry up)?  Adjust ink drying time if it is too short.
paper too much
 Do the paper settings match the paper set?  Match the paper settings to the paper set.
Paper skewed Check if the paper is not skewed. Set the paper properly.
Manual color measurement failure Change the paper, since color measurement is only
Paper too thick Check if the paper is not too thick.
available for feedable paper.
 Is the set paper skewed?
Paper Out error occurs after paper feeding  Is the paper position set too far to the FULL side?
 Set the paper properly.
operation, when carrying out manual color Paper not set properly  Is the paper position set too far to the HOME side?
 Reprint the paper for color measurement.
measurement  Are the paper smudged at the PE Sensor’s detection
point?
 Is USB cable between PC from the printer properly
The communication between the printer
It freezes while the printer has displayed as connected? Turn the printer off. Re-insert the USB cable and
and the attachment is disconnected
“printing” or “Measuring color”  IS USB cable between the Mounter from the printer then turn on the printer.
while measuring color is in progress.
properly connected?
Replace the SpectroProofer and the white
If none of the remedies above helps Problem on SpectroProofer ---
calibration tile.

2.10 Trouble on Service Program

This section describes possible trouble on Service Program and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-9. Trouble on Service Program

Are you running the program on the following operating
systems? Run the program on the supported operating
The operating system is not supported.
 Windows XP SP3 systems.
 Windows 7
Check if the program runs normally on another computer.
An error has occurred when
If not, the program files may have failure because of the Reload the service program.
downloading the program.
error.
Check if the program is officially licensed. (Check the Download the program file including security files
Registration error
Service Program does not start license status displayed on the start screen.) from the officially licensed site.
Printer driver is not installed. Check if the printer driver is installed correctly. Install the current printer driver of this product.
Disconnect the printer which is not necessary for
the adjustment from the USB port (also disconnect
More than one printers are connected to Is there any printer connected to the USB port on the
other devices if other than LFP product is
the computer. computer other than the one for adjustment?
connected) and select the target printer on the
program again.
Printer is not connected correctly to the Is the printer connected correctly to the computer with a
Connect the printer correctly.
computer. USB cable?
Printer name you want to adjust is not Is the “Select from below” displayed in the pull-down Select the target printer name from the pull-down
selected. menu to select a printer name? menu.
Cannot operate/select the menus and the
 None is selected on the menu items.
buttons Are you selecting the menu items appropriately? Select correct menu items.
 The selected item is not appropriate.
Entered value is invalid. Is the value you entered within the standard? Enter a value within the standard.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Service Program 118


 Is the printer turned on?  Turn on the printer without following errors:
 Is the printer “Printable” status in user mode, or “Main cover is open, out of ink, or no media is set.
Printer does not operate at all. menu” status in serviceman mode?  Feed the roll paper if you are printing roll paper.
 Is any error detected?  Set more than three cut sheets if you are
 Is media for the adjustment set correctly? printing cut sheet.
Printer name is not selected after Select the correct printer name from the pull-down
Is the printer in communication? (See above)
changing the USB ID. menu.
Printer does not operate at all. Trouble on registering the MAC
address: The printer is connected with a Is the printer connected correctly to a computer with a Connect the printer with a network cable, and then
USB cable. (MAC address must be network cable? register the MAC address.
registered via network.)
If the response is not appropriate when
reading the current value of serial No.,
MAC address, Head Rank ID, etc., the Is the parameter registered to NVRAM? Enter a parameter first, then read the parameter.
parameter may not be registered to
NVRAM.
Error:
“Media is feeding”
Is the media set? If the media is set, take it out and click OK.
Adjustment without printing does not
need to set the media.
Error: Carry out “Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check” to
“NOT ENOUGH EMPTY SPACE” Replace the Maintenance Box and continue the
check the remaining capacity.
operation (the replaced Maintenance Box can be
Not enough capacity in Maintenance (For the capacity needed for ink discharge or cleaning, reattached to be used again after the operation).
Error occurs Box for ink discharge or cleaning. refer to p396)
Error:
“Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment
file is not found.” Click the “Execute” button from the “Colorimetric
Calibration Adjustment” menu. Set the path for the
 Path setting to the boot file is not Is the Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment tool installed?
boot file from the pop-up screen. Direct booting
configured.
will be available from the next time.
 Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment
tool is not installed.


Error:
“Paper feed error”
Media not matching the adjustment Check if the current media match the ongoing adjustment. Properly set the media for each adjustment.
(There are both plain paper/roll paper
requiring patterns)
Error:
Error occurs “Too many changes are made for the
adjustment value.”
Number of times of adjustment value
Reset the adjustment history by executing the
change reached the limit. (Number of ---
“Adjustment Value Reset”.
times of the adjustment value can be set
has limitation. This error occurs when it
reaches the limit due to repeated
adjustments.)
Color of the menu is changed in the In this program, the color of executed The color of all menus is reset after rebooting the
---
adjustment sequence. adjustment items changes. program.

2.11 Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

This section describes possible trouble on NVRAM Viewer and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-10. Trouble on NVRAM Viewer

With a text editor, open the ini file (ServPrg.ini) in the
A button to open the NVRAM Viewer is NVRAM Viewer function is set to Adjust the setting according to the policy of each
“Common” folder of the Service Program, and check the
not displayed. Hide. local sales subsidiary.
setting status of the NVRAM Viewer. (0 = Hide, 1 = Show)
The contents and the items displayed in the
The Service Program you are running is
NVRAM Viewer do not match with each Are you running the Service Program for this product? Use the proper Service Program for this product.
different one.
other.
History of the error and the counter
Click the “Send as CSV” button on the lower right
History of the error and the counter reset reset are shown only as a CSV file. It
--- NVRAM Viewer screen to output the CSV file.
are not displayed on the NVRAM Viewer. will not be shown in the Viewer,
These histories are recorded in this file.
because they have too many items.
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on NVRAM Viewer 121

2.12 Trouble on Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment program

This section describes possible trouble on Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment program and its causes, and their remedies.
Table 2-11. Trouble on Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment program

 The program is not started correctly.
A message that says the program folder  Did you start the program from a CD or USB memory? Copy the program files on the computer first and
 Files or configuration folders of the
may have abnormality is displayed.  Did you overwrite the configuration files of the tool? then start the program.
program have abnormality.
Check if there are any hardware trouble, using the
A message which tells you to check the The SpectroProofer has hardware Refer to the diagnosis and the troubleshooting
diagnosis tool supplied by X-rite, Inc.
SpectroProofer for any trouble is displayed trouble. supplied by X-rite, Inc.
Tool: Diagnostics (Downloadable free)
TROUBLE SHOOTING Trouble on Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment program 122

CHAPTER
3
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY

3.1 Overview 3.1.1 Precautions

Before starting the disassembly or reassembly of the product, read the following
This chapter describes procedures for disassembling the main components of SC-
precautions given under the headings “WARNING” and “CAUTION”.
P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
Be sure to follow the steps when disassembling the unit.  When the Printer Cover is opened, a safety-interlock
W A R N IN G
Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by mechanism causes the CR Motor and the PF Motor to stop.
reversing the disassembly procedure. When the interlock function is disabled, be sure to take safety
 WARNING precautions and turn the function back to enabled after the
Procedures which, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury are operation.
described under the heading “WARNING”.  This printer is equipped with a lithium battery. When handling
the lithium battery, the following precautions should be
 CAUTION
followed.
“CAUTION” signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to
 When replacing the battery, replace it only with a specified
equipment.
type of battery. Using a different type of battery may cause
 CHECK POINT excess heat or explosion.
Important tips for procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. Recommended battery: CR2032 (Sony/Panasonic/Maxell)
 Dispose of used batteries according to manufacture’s
 REASSEMBLY
If the assembly procedure is different from the reversed disassembly procedure, instructions and local regulations. Contact your local
the correct procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. government agency for information about battery disposal
and recycling.
 ADJUSTMENT  When disposing of the battery, be sure to securely cover its
Any adjustments required after reassembly of components or parts are described (+) end with tape to prevent combustion or explosion.
under the heading “ADJUSTMENT”. Be sure to perform the specified  Do not recharge the battery.
adjustments with reference to Chapter 4 “ADJUSTMENT”.  Do not use the battery if it is discolored or damaged, or if any
 LUBRICATION leakage of electrolyte is observed.
“LUBRICATION” signals that the part needs to be lubricated when replacing or  Do not dismantle, solder or heat the battery. Doing so could
maintaining it after disassembling. result in leakage of electrolyte, heat generation, or explosion.
 Do not heat the battery or dispose of it in fire.
 If the electrolyte leaked from the battery contacts with your
skin or gets into your eyes, rinse it off with clean water and
see a doctor immediately.
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Overview 124

W A R N IN G  The power switch for this printer is installed on the secondary C A U T IO N  Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
side of the power circuit; therefore, the power is always  Use only recommended tools for disassembly, assembly or
supplied unless the AC Cable is unplugged. To prevent electric adjustment of the printer.
shock and circuit damage during servicing, make sure to follow  Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified.
the instructions below.  Be careful not to soil the printer or the floor with the leaked ink
 Before removing a circuit board, make sure to unplug the when removing the ink-path-related components or parts.
AC Cable from the AC outlet and confirm the LEDs are Spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the floor in advance.
turned off by pressing the Power button on the Operating  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the
Panel. This operation discharges the residual charge in the elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
printer. damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
 Make sure not to place the removed circuit boards on the with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
metal and such directly. as anti-static wrist straps.
 Always wear gloves for disassembly and reassembly to avoid  When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
injury from sharp metal edges. take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
 Never touch the ink or wasted ink with bare hands. If ink comes moving parts.
into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water  When you have to remove any parts or components that are
immediately. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. provided as after-service-parts but are not described in this
 If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a chapter, carefully observe how they are installed and make
doctor immediately. sure to remember it before removing them.
 When powering this product, high-voltage current may be  Disassembling the frame and some components (platen, PF
applied on the following parts/components. To prevent shaft) of the printer is prohibited because they are assembled
ELECTRIC SHOCK, do not touch the parts/components when with precise measurements in 1/100 mm unit at the factory.
the power is ON. If the shock should happen, the flowing
current is very tiny, about a few hundreds A, therefore it will
not do any harm on the human body.
 Power Supply Board Assy
 Main Board
 AID Board
 Roll Unit Connector
 When replacing the Main Board, Power Supply Board, or
Power harnesses and such, make sure to check visually if any
harness is caught in between or any wrong connection exists.

3.1.2 Cautions after assembling 3.1.3 Orientation Definition

 The ink-path-related components or parts should be firmly and The terms used for indicating the orientation/direction throughout this chapter are as
C A U T IO N
securely reinstalled on the printer to prevent the ink from follows.
leakage.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to connect the Up
Rear
connectors of the electric components or parts correctly and
securely. Use extreme care when connecting FFCs (flexible flat
cables). Improper connection of the FFCs, such as inserting
them diagonally into the connectors, could cause short-
circuiting and lead to breakdown of the electric elements on the
boards.
 When reassembling the printer, make sure to route the FFCs
and other cables as specified in this chapter. Failure to do so Left
may cause an unexpected contact of the cables with sharp metal
Full side
edges, or lead to lower the noise immunity.
 When you removed any parts (especially cables) that are
secured with acetate tape or two-sided tape, be sure to reinstall
and secure them with the tape as exactly the same as they were. Right
Home side
Front Down
Figure 3-1. Orientation Definition

3.1.4 Recommended Tools

To protect this product from damage, use the tools indicated in the following table.
For the tools required to perform the adjustment, refer to “Tools/Consumables for
Adjustments” in Chapter 4.
Table 3-1. Tools

Name Description Target Part
4 cm or longer shaft length (The  Printhead
Phillips screwdriver, No. 1 one with a magnet is  Fan of SpectroProofer
recommended)  Some encoders/sensors
25 cm or longer shaft length (The
one with a magnet is Parts in general
recommended)
Phillips screwdriver, No. 2
Stubby driver with 4 cm or shorter
 CR Motor
shaft length (The one with a
 Some sensors
magnet is recommended)
 Ink Tubes
Torque driver, No2 0.39  0.05N/m can be measured.  Ink Selector
 Cartridge Holder
 Roll Unit Connector
Flat-blade screwdriver Nothing in particular
 Main Board
Tweezers Nothing in particular Overall parts
 CR Belt
To mark the part installation
Pencil  PF Belt
position
 Ink tube clamp
To secure the cable/harness, or for Parts in general (Use this tape
Acetate tape the protection against the sharp when it is removed or when
edge replacing the part)
 Ink Tube
 Ink Selector Assy
To prevent staining the printer
Waste cloth  Cartridge Holder
with ink during operation
 Printhead
 IS Unit

3.2 Parts Diagram

Refer to the pages indicated in brackets for the required disassembly/assembly procedure.
Left Roll Cover (p177)

Left Cover (p163)
Printer Cover (p157) Rear Cover (p170)
Front Cover (p168) Right Roll Cover (p177)
Right Upper Cover

(p164)
Left IC Cover Frame
(p166)
CR Cover
(p175)
Media Eject Cover
(p174)
Right Cover
Control Panel Cover (p165)
Right IC Cover Frame (p161)
(p166)
Figure 3-2. Housing 1
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Parts Diagram 128

Mid-Left Cover (p176)
Rear Unit (p171)

Rear Unit Sensor
(p172)
Detects the installation
status of the Rear Unit.
Mid-Right Cover
(p176)
Left IC Sensor
(p166)
Detects the Open/Closed
status of the cartridge cover.
Front Cover Sensor

(p169)
Detects the Open/Closed
status of the Front Cover.
Printer Cover Sensor Right IC Sensor

(p158) (p166) Board Tray (p173)
Detects the Open/Closed Detects the Open/Closed
status of the Printer Cover. status of the cartridge cover.
Figure 3-3. Housing 2

SUB-C Board
(p190) Network Board Main Board
Relays the connection between the Main Board (p182) (p179)
Assy and electric parts/components. See " Communicates across a network  Communicates with the computer.
Connection Diagram" (p477) for specific  Processes received data.
connections to the concerning parts/components.
 Controls the printer mechanism.
 Stores the correction values and various counters.
Power Supply Board
(p186) SUB Board
Generates the DC voltage for this (p188)
printer from the AC power Relays the connection between the Main Board
supply. Assy and electric parts/components. See "
Connection Diagram" (p477) for specific
connections to the concerning parts/components.
SUB-D Board
(p191)
Relays the connection between the
Main Board Assy and electric parts/
components on the Roll Unit. See "
Connection Diagram" (p477) for
specific connections to the concerning
parts/components.
AID Board
(p192)
The board to perform the AID
function which detects dot
missing automatically.
SUB-B Board
(p189)
Relays the connection between the Main Board
LED Board Assy and electric parts/components. See "
(p193) Connection Diagram" (p477) for specific
Control Panel Board connections to the concerning parts/components.
(p194)
Figure 3-4. Electric Circuit Components

APG Sensor
(p207)
Detects the origin position of
the platen gap.
CR Scale (p198)
Ink Mark Sensor
(p200)
The sensor for the following functions.
 Auto Bi-D adjustment (pattern reading)
 Remaining roll paper detection (remaining bar-code reading)
CR Unit (p202)
APG Motor Assy

(p206)
The motor to position the CR CR Encoder
(p197)
Unit automatically so as to adjust CR Motor
Detects the pattern of the CR
the platen gap. (p195)
Scale to control the position of the
The motor to drive the CR
CR Unit.
Unit.
Figure 3-5. Carriage Mechanism

2nd PE Sensor (p220) Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2 PE Sensor (p216)

Detects paper fed from the (p223) Detects paper fed from the Paper Cassette
Paper Cassette. Detects the thickness of paper or the Roll Unit.
being inserted into the printer. PW Sensor (p221)
Detects the width of paper on the platen.
Release Motor Assy (p225) This is a reflective photo interrupter and
Contacts/Separates the Feed Roller. detects the difference of the amount of
reflection between paper (white) and the
platen (black).
Edge Release Assy (p227)

Release Sensor (p226) Functions as follows:
Detects the position
1. Operates the Edge Guide.
(contact/separate status) of
the Feed Roller. 2. Switches the eject position.
PF Motor (p210)
The motor to drive the
Feed Roller.
PF Encoder (p211)
Detects the PF Scale pattern to
control the paper feeding
(operation of the PF Motor).
Edge Sensor (p229)

Detects the open/closed status and
pressure of ASF Edge guide.
PF Scale (p212) Suction Fan (p214)
Sucks paper to the platen so as
to stabilize the position of paper
PF Belt (p213) when printing.
Figure 3-6. Paper Feed Mechanism

ASF Motor Assy (p230) Pickup Roller (p232)

Rotates the Feed Roller to Retard Roller (p239)
feed paper in the cassette. Separates paper fed from the cassette.
ASF Sub Motor Assy (p231)

Functions as follows:
1. Switches the pressing/separation status
of the Retard Roller/Assist Roller.
of the Pick Unit.
Retard Roller Sensor (p236)

Detects the pressing/separation
status of the Retard Roller.
Assist Roller Sensor (p236)

Detects the pressing/separation
status of the Assist Roller.
Paper Cassette Sensor (p245)

Detects the insertion status of the Pickup Unit Sensor (p236)
cassette. Detects the rising/lowering status of the
Pickup Unit.
Paper Empty Sensor (p242)
Detects the paper presence in the cassette.
Figure 3-7. ASF Unit

Roll Sensor
Antistatic Cloth Unit (p254) 1. Detects the top/bottom ends of roll paper.
Remove the static electricity and 2. Detects the presence of roll paper. Roll Feeding Sensor (p253)
dust on the roll paper. Detects the pressing/separation status
of the Roll Feeding Roller.
Roll Feeding Motor Assy (p251)

1. Feeds roll paper forward.
of the PF Rollers.
Roll Lock Sensor (p248)

Detects the lock/unlock status of the
ATC planetary gear.
ATC Motor Assy (p250)

Roll Unit Sensor (p247) Winds/rewinds roll paper and generates back tension.
Paper Guide Sensor (p252) Detects the installation status of the * ATC: Auto Tension Control
Detects the rising/lowering status of the Roll Unit.
Paper Eject Support.
Figure 3-8. ROLL Unit

Cutter Unit (p261)
Cutter Motor Assy (p258)

Drives the Cutter. A DC motor with
an encoder scale mounted on it is
employed.
Cutter HP Sensor
(p259)
Detects the origin position
of the Cutter.
Cutter Cover (p257)

Cutter (p151)
Figure 3-9. Cutter Unit

Ink Tubes (p280)
Left Holder FFC (p286)
Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder

(p275)
Head FFC (p282)
Right Holder FFC (p285)
Maintenance box 1 Holder (p278) Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder (p272)
Maintenance box 1 (p152)
Figure 3-10. Ink System Mechanism 1

Printhead (p265)
Wiper (p269)
Wiper Cleaner (p270)
Cleans the nozzle surface of
Removes ink attached on
the Printhead.
Ink Selector Assy the Wiper.
(p262)
Switches Photo Black and
Mat Black. Including a
motor for a drive source
and sensors that detects
the condition.
Head Cap (p271)
IS Unit (p266)
Decompression Pump (p287)

Drives the Decompression Pump to
supply ink. This is a unit of a pump and
a motor. By Compressing and
decompressing the air in the unit.
Figure 3-11. Ink System Mechanism 2

CR HP Sensor (p304) Color Measurement Device Upper Cover (p290)

Detects the origin position of (p288) Right Cover (p165)
the carriage mounting the The device to measure the color of
Color Measurement Device. printed result automatically.
EJ Planet Lever (p310)
Thermistor (p300)
Detects the temperature to
display it on the control panel.
Left Cover (p163)
Drying Fan (p301) Front Cover (p168)

Dries the printed paper.
Backing (p289)
Paper Pressing Motor
(p302)
Drives the Paper Pressing
Unit. Main-C Board (p297)
Controls the SpectroProofer.
Encoder for paper pressing

motor Backing Sensor (p305)
(p299) Detects the installation
Reads the scale pattern of the Paper Magnet Latch status of the Backing.
I/F Cover (p291)
Pressing Motor to control the (p295)
position of the Paper Pressing Unit.
White calibration tile holder
CR Motor (p308) (p289)
Drives the carriage mounting the Color
Measurement Device.
Figure 3-12. SpectroProofer

3.3 Disassembly Flowchart

CONSUMABLES/ACCESSORIES
Start
See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR See "3.4.1.4 Cutter Replacement See "3.4.1.5 Maintenance box 1 See "3.4.1.6 Maintenance Box2 See "3.4.1.7 Ink Cartridge
Unit (p148)" (p153)" See "3.4.1.9 Mounter (p156)"
(p151)" (p152)" Replacement (p154)"
HOUSING
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
See "3.4.2.12 Rear Unit (p171)"
(p164)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover

(p164)" See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover See "3.4.2.12 Rear Unit (p171)"
(p161)"
See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)" See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)" See "3.4.2.13 Rear Unit Sensor
(p172)"
See "3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover See "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover See "3.4.2.10 Front Cover Sensor See "3.4.2.1 Printer Cover (p157)" See "3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/
(p174)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
(p158)" (p169)" Mid-Left Cover (p176)"
See "3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/ See "3.4.2.3 Printer Cover Sensor
Right IC Cover Frame/ Left IC See "3.4.2.14 Board Tray (p173)"
(p160)"
Sensor/Right IC Sensor (p166)"
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly Flowchart 139

ELECTRIC CIRCUIT COMPONENTS
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.1.2 Roll Unit (p149)" See "3.4.2.12 Rear Unit (p171)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.2.18 Left Roll Cover/
(p164)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" Right Roll Cover (p177)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover See "3.4.3.8 SUB-D Board See "3.4.3.2 Network Board
See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)" (p191)" See "3.4.3.1 Main Board (p179)"
(p161)" (p182)"
See "3.4.3.10 LED Board (p193)" See "3.4.3.7 SUB-C Board See "3.4.3.3 Power Supply Box
See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)" (p184)"
See "3.4.3.11 Control Panel Board See "3.4.3.4 Power Supply Board
See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" See "3.4.3.9 AID Board (p192)" See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)" (p186)"
(p194)"
See "3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/

Mid-Left Cover (p176)" (R only) See "3.4.3.5 SUB Board (p188)"
See "3.4.3.6 SUB-B Board

CARRIAGE MECHANISM
Start
See "3.4.2.10 Front Cover Sensor

(p169)"

(p164)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover

(p161)"
See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)"
See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR See "3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy

Unit (p148)" See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)"
(p206)"

Mid-Left Cover (p176)" (R only) See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)" See "3.4.4.7 APG Sensor (p207)"
See "3.4.4.1 CR Motor (p195)" See "3.4.4.3 CR Scale (p198)"
See "3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy

(p206)"
See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)"
See "3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy

(p262)"
See "3.4.9.2 Printhead (p265)"
See "3.4.4.5 CR Unit/CR Belt

(p202)"
See "3.4.4.2 CR Encoder (p197)"

PAPER FEED MECHANISM
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" See "3.4.5.3 PF Scale (p212)" See "3.4.5.4 PF Belt (p213)"
(p164)" See "3.4.5.2 PF Encoder (p211)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover See "3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/

(p161)" Mid-Left Cover (p176)" (L only)
See "3.4.5.10 Release Motor Assy See "3.4.5.11 Release Sensor

See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)" See "3.4.5.1 PF Motor (p210)" (p225)" (p226)"
( 左のみ
See "3.4.2.5 ) (p163)"
Left Cover See "3.4.9.3 IS Unit (p266)"
See "3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy See "3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover See "3.4.5.12 Edge Release Assy
(p206)" See "3.4.2.1 Printer Cover (p157)" (p174)" (p227)" See "3.4.5.13 Edge Sensor
See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)" See "3.4.5.9 Paper Thickness

Sensor1, 2 (p223)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" See "3.4.5.5 Suction Fan (p214)"
See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR

Unit (p148)" See "3.4.2.12 Rear Unit (p171)"
See "3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy See "3.4.5.6 PE Sensor (p216)" See "3.4.5.7 2nd PE Sensor
(p262)" (p220)"
See "3.4.9.2 Printhead (p265)"

(p202)"
See "3.4.5.8 PW Sensor (p221)"

ASF UNIT
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.6.3 Pickup Roller See "3.4.2.12 Rear Unit (p171)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
(p164)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover See "3.4.6.1 ASF Motor Assy See "3.4.6.5 Retard Roller (p239)"
(p161)" (p230)"
See "3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/ See "3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/

See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)" Right IC Cover Frame/ Left IC
Mid-Left Cover (p176)" (R only)
Sensor/Right IC Sensor (p166)" (R
only)
( 左のみ
See "3.4.2.5 ) (p163)"
Left Cover See "3.4.6.2 ASF Sub Motor Assy
See "3.4.3.6 SUB-B Board (p231)" See "3.4.9.8 Full (Left) Side
Cartridge Holder (p275)"
See "3.4.6.4 Assist Roller Sensor/ See "3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover
Retard Roller Sensor/ Pickup Unit (p174)"
Sensor (p236)" See "3.4.3.3 Power Supply Box
(p184)"
See "3.4.1.5 Maintenance box 1

(p152)"
See "3.4.6.7 Paper Cassette Sensor
(p245)"
See "3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/

Right IC Cover Frame/ Left IC
Sensor/Right IC Sensor (p166)" (R
only)
See "3.4.9.7 Home (Right) Side

Cartridge Holder (p272)"

Holder (p278)"
See "3.4.6.6 Paper Empty Sensor

(p242)"

ROLL UNIT
Start
See "3.4.1.2 Roll Unit (p149)"
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.2.18 Left Roll Cover/
Right Roll Cover (p177)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.3.8 SUB-D Board See "3.4.7.6 Roll Feeding Sensor See "3.4.7.7 Antistatic Cloth Unit
(p164)" (p191)" (p253)" (p254)"
See "3.4.7.2 Roll Lock Sensor See "3.4.7.3 ATC Motor Assy See "3.4.7.4 Roll Feeding Motor
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover (p248)" (p250)" Assy (p251)"
(p161)"
See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)"

See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover (p163)" Mid-Left Cover (p176)" (R only)
See "3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover See "3.4.7.1 Roll Unit Sensor
(p174)" (p247)"
See "3.4.7.5 Paper Guide Sensor

(p252)"

CUTTER UNIT
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)" See "3.4.8.1 Cutter Cover (p257)"

(p164)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover

(p161)"
( 左のみ
See "3.4.2.5 ) (p163)"
Left Cover
See "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover

(p158)"
See "3.4.8.3 Cutter HP Sensor See "3.4.8.4 Cutter Unit (p261)"

(p259)"
See "3.4.8.2 Cutter Motor Assy

(p258)"

INK SYSTEM MECHANISM
Start
See "3.4.2.9 Front Cover (p168)"
See "3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover See "3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy
(p164)" See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)"
(p262)"
See "3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover ( 左のみ

See "3.4.2.5 ) (p163)"
Left Cover See "3.4.9.2 Printhead (p265)"
(p161)"
See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR

See "3.4.2.7 Right Cover (p165)" Unit (p148)"
( 左のみ ) (p163)" See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR

See "3.4.2.5 Left Cover Unit (p148)"
See "3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR See "3.4.9.5 Wiper Cleaner

See "3.4.9.3 IS Unit (p266)" See "3.4.9.4 Wiper (p269)" See "3.4.9.6 Head Cap (p271)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
Unit (p148)" (p270)"
See "3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover See "3.4.9.14 Decompression See "3.4.9.12 Right Holder FFC
See "3.4.2.16 CR Cover (p175)" (p174)" See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" Pump (p287)" (p285)"
See "3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy See "3.4.1.5 Maintenance box 1 See "3.4.3.3 Power Supply Box
See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)" See "3.4.9.10 Ink Tubes (p280)" (p184)"
(p262)" (p152)"
See "3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/ See "3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/
See "3.4.9.2 Printhead (p265)" See "3.4.9.11 Head FFC (p282)" See "3.4.9.13 Left Holder FFC
Right IC Cover Frame/ Left IC Right IC Cover Frame/ Left IC
Sensor/Right IC Sensor (p166)" (R Sensor/Right IC Sensor (p166)" (R (p286)"
only) only)
See "3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy

(p206)"
See "3.4.9.7 Home (Right) Side See "3.4.9.8 Full (Left) Side
Cartridge Holder (p272)" Cartridge Holder (p275)"
(p202)"
See "3.4.2.11 Rear Cover (p170)"
See "3.4.4.4 Ink Mark Sensor

(p200)"
Holder (p278)"

SPECTROPROOFER
Start
See "3.4.10.1 Color

Measurement Device (p288)"
See "3.4.1.9 Mounter

(p156)"
See "3.4.10.2 Backing/

See "3.4.11.5 Front See "3.4.11.1 Upper See "3.4.12.7 Backing Sensor See "3.4.11.2 I/F Cover White calibration tile holder See "3.4.11.3 Right Cover
Cover (p294)" Cover (p290)" (p305)" (p291)" (p289)" (p292)"
See "3.4.11.6 Magnet See "3.4.12.6 CR HP See "3.4.11.2 I/F Cover

Latch (p295)" Sensor (p304)" (p291)"
See "3.4.11.4 Left Cover

(p293)"
See "3.4.12.1 Main-C See "3.4.12.5 Paper See "3.4.12.3 Thermistor See "3.4.12.4 Drying Fan See "3.4.12.5 Paper Pressing See "3.4.11.3 Right Cover See
See"3.4.12.9
"3.4.12.5EJ
Paper
Planet
Pressing
Lever
Board (p297)" Pressing Motor (p302)" (p300)" (p301)" Motor (p302)" (p292)" Motor
(p310)"
(p302)"
See "3.4.12.8 CR Motor

(p308)"

3.4 Disassembly and Assembly Procedure 5. Rotate the gear shown in the figure in the direction of the arrow to unlock the CR
Unit (about 10 rounds).
This section describes procedures for disassembling the components allowed to be
disassembled. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be C H E C K The CR Unit can be unlocked by rotating the gear about ten turns.
P O IN T
reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure.
3.4.1 Preparation for servicing

3.4.1.1 Unlocking the CR Unit
C A U T IO N When unlocking the CR Unit, confirm the Head Cap is fully
 Unlocking the CR Unit should be done when any media is on lowered by looking at it from the right side in the position shown
C A U T IO N
the Platen. Otherwise, the nozzle surface of the Printhead may below.
be rubbed by the media.
 Basically, unlock the CR Unit by the panel operation in the
Serviceman mode. Unlock it manually only if the panel
operation is not available because the power cannot be turned - As seen from the right -
on or the like.
 When unlocking the CR Unit in the Serviceman mode, do not
open the Printer Cover. (or the process stops.) If the process
stops in the middle, the printer may have to be restarted.
 Automatic
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.

Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ], [PaperFeed ] and [OK] buttons
together.
2. Select SELF TESTING → Mecha Adjustment → CR Un Cap.
3. Press the [OK] button while [Enter] Un Cap is displayed.
Locked position Gear
The carriage unit is unlocked.
 Manual Figure 3-13. Unlocking the CR Unit
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168)
When unlocking the CR Unit manually according to this
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) procedure, turn on the printer to initialize it after reassembling. (In
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) this initialization process, the CR Unit will be locked, and the
Printhead will be capped.)
4. Remove the Right Cover.(p165)
DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY Disassembly and Assembly Procedure 148

3.4.1.2 Roll Unit

- Rear side -
1. Make sure the printer is off before unplugging the roll unit.
2. Disconnect the connector of the Roll Unit from the main body.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the Roll Unit. Bearing Bearing
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: two pieces

4. Pull the Roll Unit backward, and remove the shaft of the Roll Unit from the
bearing of the main body.
Shaft Shaft
5. Remove the Roll Unit.
Roll Unit
Connector
Figure 3-14. Removing the Roll Unit

3.4.1.3 Paper Cassette

1. Remove the Paper Eject Tray.
Paper Eject Tray
Figure 3-15. Removing the Paper Eject Tray

2. Pull out the Paper Cassette by holding both sides.
Paper Cassette
Figure 3-16. Removing the Paper Cassette

3.4.1.4 Cutter Replacement 4. Set the positioning holes of the new cutter to the bosses of the main body.
C A U T IO N When removing the cutter, be careful not to drop it. Positioning holes Bosses
Cutter

2. Open the Cutter Cover.
3. Loosen the screw that secures the cutter, and remove the cutter.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M4x10: one piece
Cutter
Figure 3-18. Installing a new cutter
A When securing the cutter in the next step, be sure to secure it

C A U T IO N
firmly. Otherwise, the cutting position may be misaligned or
Cutter Cover skewed.
5. Secure the cutter with the screw. See Figure 3-17.

6. Close the Cutter Cover. See Figure 3-17.
7. Set the Front Cover, and secure it with the four screws. See Figure 3-17.
Figure 3-17. Removing the Cutter

3.4.1.5 Maintenance box 1

1. Open the Right Cartridge Cover.
2. Pull out the Maintenance box 1.
Maintenance box 1
Figure 3-19. Removing the Maintenance box 1

3.4.1.6 Maintenance Box2 3. Pull out the Maintenance Box2.
1. Remove the Paper Eject Tray.

Maintenance Box2
Paper Eject Tray
Figure 3-20. Removing the Paper Eject Tray Figure 3-22. Removing the Maintenance Box2
2. Release the lock of the Maintenance Box2.
Figure 3-21. Releasing the lock

3.4.1.7 Ink Cartridge Replacement 4. Take the ink cartridge out of the bag, and shake it horizontally for 15 times.
1. Turn the printer ON.

2. Open the IC Cover (Cartridge Cover).
3. Push the ink cartridge to remove it.
Ink cartridge
Figure 3-24. Unpacking the ink cartridge

5. Set the ink cartridge to the ink cartridge holder. See Figure 3-23.
6. Close the IC Cover.
IC Cover
Figure 3-23. Removing the ink cartridge
C A U T IO N  Do not touch the circuit board (IC chip) of the ink cartridge
when removing the ink cartridge. Otherwise, the ink cartridge
may not be recognized properly or the printing cannot be done
properly.
 Do not touch the ink supply section of the ink cartridge since
ink may leak from the section.

3.4.1.8 Spindle 5. Remove the roll paper from the spindle by removing the flange.

Flange
2. Open the Roll Paper Cover.
3. Push the paper set button, and release the Paper Presser.
4. Remove the spindle.
Spindle
Roll paper
Roll Paper Cover
Figure 3-26. Removing the roll paper
Figure 3-25. Removing the spindle

3.4.1.9 Mounter
1. Open the I/F Cover, and disconnect the USB connector.
USB connector
I/F Cover
Figure 3-27. Disconnecting the USB connector

2. Remove the Mounter.
Mounter
Figure 3-28. Removing the Mounter

3.4.2 Housing
SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,LEFT SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,RIGHT
3.4.2.1 Printer Cover
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) B
B
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) A
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165)

5. Remove the Left Cover. (p163)
6. Remove the screw that secures the SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,LEFT.
Printer Cover
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: one piece
7. Remove the SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,LEFT.
8. Remove the two screws that secure the SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,RIGHT.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: two pieces
9. Remove the SHAFT,COVER,PRINTER,RIGHT.
10. Pull both sides of the Printer Cover outward to release it from the bosses of the
upper rear cover, and remove the Printer Cover.
Upper rear cover
Boss Boss
Upper rear Upper rear
cover cover
Figure 3-29. Removing the Printer Cover

3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Step8
Dowel
Step7
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164)

3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161)
6. Remove the three screws that secure the upper front cover. Tab
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: three pieces
7. Lift the lower right of the upper front cover to release the tab.
8. Lift the upper left of the upper front cover to release the dowel. A
A
C H E C K When removing the upper front cover in the following steps, pull it
P O IN T toward you taking care not to hit the protrusion on the bottom A
against the main frame.
Upper front cover

Main frame
protrusions
Cutter Cover
Step9 Step10
Dowel
Interference part
9. Pull the part of the upper front cover circled in the figure outward and lift it in the
direction of the arrow to release the dowel.
10. While pushing the Cutter Cover and releasing the contact with the upper front
Ribs
cover, lift the upper front cover to release the ribs, and remove the upper front
cover.
Figure 3-30. Removing the upper front cover

When installing the upper front cover, be careful of the following.

 First attach the cover into the cut on the right of the main
frame, then reassemble the cover in the reverse order of the
disassembling procedure.
Upper front cover
Cut
 Make sure to insert the ribs on the upper front cover into the
holes on the Media Eject Cover.
Media Eject Cover Upper front cover
Ribs

3.4.2.3 Printer Cover Sensor 8. Disengage the hooks that secure the Printer Cover Sensor, and remove the Printer
Cover Sensor.
9. Disconnect the connector from the Printer Cover Sensor.
Printer Cover Sensor
Connector
6. Remove the Upper Front Cover. (p158)
7. Disengage the three hooks that secure the Sensor Cover, and remove the Sensor
Cover.
When installing the Sensor Cover, be sure to set the positioning

Hooks
holes of the sensor cover to the bosses of the sensor holder.
Figure 3-32. Removing the Printer Cover Sensor

Sensor Cover
Boss
Boss
Hooks
Figure 3-31. Removing the Sensor Cover

3.4.2.4 Control Panel Cover Dowels
C H E C K The printer cannot light LCD based on old firmware which dose
P O IN T not support 2.7 inches LCD when the switch is turned on after
inches LCD assembled. In this case, please update the firmware. Control Panel Cover
The new firmware which supports 2.7 inches LCD also supports 2.5
inches LCD.

2. Remove the two screws that secure the Control Panel Cover.
A
3. Pull the Control Panel Cover frontward to release the two dowels, and remove the
Control Panel Cover.
Dowels
Figure 3-33. Removing the Control Panel Cover

4. Release the FFC from the clamp, and disconnect the FFC from the connector of
the Control Panel Board.
5. Peel off the tape.
6. Pull out the FFC from the ferrite core.

FFC
Ferrite core
Clamp
Tape
Connector
Control Panel Cover
Figure 3-34. Removing the FFC
When installing the Control Panel Cover, restore the original

routing (ferrite core and tape) for noise protection purposes.
Tape

3.4.2.5 Left Cover

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) - Left side -
2. Open the Printer Cover.

3. Remove the five screws that secure the Left Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: five pieces A A
4. Remove the Left Cover.
Left Cover Printer Cover
A
A
Figure 3-35. Removing the Left Cover

3.4.2.6 Right Upper Cover

Tabs
1. Open the Printer Cover. 1 Dowel 4
2. Remove the screw that secures the Right Upper Cover.

A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: one piece
3. Lift the left side of the Right Upper Cover, and release the two dowels (1 and 2)
and the hook (3).
4. Slide the Right Upper Cover to the right, and release the two tabs (4).
5. Remove the Right Upper Cover.
Right Upper Cover
Dowel
2 Hook
Figure 3-36. Removing the Right Upper Cover

3.4.2.7 Right Cover

Hook
4. Remove the four screws that secure the Right Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: four pieces
5. Pull up and disengage the hook of the Right Cover, and remove the Right Cover.
A Right Cover
A A
Figure 3-37. Removing the Right Cover

3.4.2.8 Left IC Cover Frame/Right IC Cover Frame/ 1. Open the Right IC Cover.
Left IC Sensor/Right IC Sensor 2. Disconnect the connector of the Right IC Sensor, and release the harness from the
Basically you can remove these parts on the left and the ones on the cable guides.
C H E C K
P O IN T right in the same way. Therefore this section describes the way to
remove the parts on the right only. However, the parts that have to
be removed before removing these parts differ.
 Left IC Cover
 Front Cover (p168)
Connector
 Right Upper Cover (p164)
 Control Panel Cover (p161) Right IC Cover Frame
 Right Cover (p165)
 Left Cover (p163)
 Media Eject Cover (p174)
 Right IC Cover
 Front Cover (p168)
 Right Upper Cover (p164)
 Control Panel Cover (p161)
 Right Cover (p165)
Cable guide
Figure 3-38. Disconnecting the connector

3. Remove the four screws that secure the Right IC Cover Frame, and remove the
Right IC Cover Frame.
Right IC Cover Frame
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: four pieces Hooks
C A U T IO N Remove the IC Sensor in the following steps, release the lower hook Right IC Sensor
(the narrow one) so as not to damage the hooks.
4. Widen the gap between the hooks that secure the Right IC Sensor, and remove the
Right IC Sensor from the Right IC Cover Frame.
A
5. Pull down the Right IC Cover to disengage the joints, and remove the Right IC
Cover.
 When installing the IC Cover Frame, tighten the screws in the

A
order given in the figure below.
 When installing the Right IC Cover Frame, attach it to the
main frame while pressing it in the direction of the arrow.
Right IC Cover Frame

Joints
3 A
A
Right IC Cover
Figure 3-39. Removing the Right IC Cover Frame
2 1

3.4.2.9 Front Cover 2. Remove the four screws that secure the Front Cover.
1. Open the IC cover R, IC cover L, and Printer Cover. A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: two pieces
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: two pieces
Printer Cover
3. Remove the Front Cover upward.
IC cover L
A A
Front Cover
IC cover R
Figure 3-40. Opening the covers
B
B
Figure 3-41. Removing the Front Cover

3.4.2.10 Front Cover Sensor

6. Remove the upper front cover and the Sensor Cover.
(Step 6 to Step 3.4.2.3 in "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover" (P. 158))
7. Disengage the hooks that secure the Front Cover Sensor, and remove the Front
Cover Sensor.
8. Disconnect the connector from the Front Cover Sensor.
Front Cover Sensor

Connector
Hooks
Figure 3-42. Removing the Front Cover Sensor

3.4.2.11 Rear Cover

1. Remove the seven screws that secure the Rear Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x10: seven pieces
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
When installing the Rear Cover, be careful not to let the harnesses
get caught.
Rear Cover
A A
A
A A
A
A
Figure 3-43. Removing the Rear Cover

3.4.2.12 Rear Unit

1. Push the handles inward, and remove the Rear Unit.
Handles
Rear Unit
Figure 3-44. Removing the Rear Unit

3.4.2.13 Rear Unit Sensor 7. Remove the screw that secures the sensor holder.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece
2. Remove the Left Cover. (p163) 8. Slide the sensor holder in the direction of the arrow to release the two hooks, and
remove the sensor holder.
3. Remove the Rear Unit. (p171)
4. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170)
5. Remove the retaining ring that secures the gear. Sensor holder
6. Remove the gear.
Gear
Retaining ring
Hooks
Figure 3-46. Removing the sensor holder

9. Disengage the hooks that secure the Rear Unit Sensor, and remove the Rear Unit
Sensor.
10. Disconnect the connector from the Rear Unit Sensor.
Rear Unit Sensor Connector

Figure 3-45. Removing the gear
Hook
Figure 3-47. Removing the Rear Unit Sensor

3.4.2.14 Board Tray 6. Disconnect all connectors and FFCs on the Main Board, and remove the Board
Tray.
2. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) C A U T IO N Be extremely careful not to insert FFCs at an angle in connectors.
Doing so may cause serious damage to the terminals inside the
3. Remove the five screws that secure the Board Tray.
connectors, and it can lead to big trouble of the circuit components.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: five pieces
C A U T IO N The Main Board and Network Board are stored in the Board Tray
When installing the Main Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6
and they are connected to the harnesses from the main body.
“Appendix” (see p475) and connect the connectors correctly.
Therefore, be careful not to pull out the Board Tray too far from
the main body in the next step.
Secure the cable tie and the plate with the same screw shown in the
Main Board
figure.
4. Pull out the Board Tray slightly to the rear.

5. Release the harnesses from the two saddles.
Screw together
Cable tie
Board Tray
A
A Figure 3-49. Removing the Board Tray
A
A A
Saddles Board Tray

Figure 3-48. Removing the screws

3.4.2.15 Media Eject Cover

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Media Eject Cover

A
6. Remove the upper front cover. A A
(Step 6 to Step 10 in "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover" (P. 158))
7. Remove the three screws that secure the Media Eject Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: three pieces
8. Remove the Media Eject Cover.
When installing the Media Eject Cover, be sure to confirm that the
paper guide sensor is attached. The paper guide sensor may come
off when removing the Media Eject Sensor. Figure 3-50. Removing the Media Eject Cover
Paper guide sensor

3.4.2.16 CR Cover
CR Cover
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) A A
C A U T IO N If you do repair work on the Platen, the Printhead may get

damaged. Therefore, make sure to move the CR Unit to the home A A
A
position or to the Full side when working.
A
5. Remove the six screws that secure the CR Cover.

A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: six pieces
6. Remove the CR Cover.
When installing the CR Cover, be sure to secure the screws in the

order shown in the figure below.
Figure 3-51. Removing the CR Cover
CR Cover
1 4
2 3 6

3.4.2.17 Mid-Right Cover/Mid-Left Cover

Basically you can remove this part on the left and the one on the Mid-Right Cover
C H E C K
P O IN T right in the same way. Therefore this section describes the way to
remove the one on the right only.

Dowels
6. Release the two hooks and two dowels that secure the Mid-Right Cover from the
main body frame.
Hooks
7. Remove the Mid-Right Cover.
When installing the Mid-Right Cover, be sure to align the end of

the cover (guide) shown in the figure with the “PAPER Figure 3-52. Removing the Mid-Right Cover
GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”. After the installation, check that the
hooks and the dowels are set securely.
Mid-Right Cover
“PAPER GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”
Guide

3.4.2.18 Left Roll Cover/Right Roll Cover 3. Remove the Left Roll Cover.
 Left Roll Cover
1. Remove the two screws that secure the Rear Roll Cover.
Left Roll Cover
A) Silver, SCREW,M3,STEP TYPE: two pieces
B
A
C
Figure 3-53. Removing the Left Roll Cover (1)
2. Remove the three screws that secure the Left Roll Cover.
Figure 3-54. Removing the Left Roll Cover (2)
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: one piece

 Right Roll Cover 3. Remove the Right Roll Cover.
1. Remove the three screws that secure the Rear Roll Cover.
.
Be careful not to trap any of the cables underneath the cover.

A) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite M3x8: three pieces
Right Roll Cover
A B
C
Figure 3-55. Removing the Right Roll Cover (1)
2. Remove the four screws that secure the Right Roll Cover.
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: two pieces B
Figure 3-56. Removing the Right Roll Cover (2)

3.4.3 Electric Circuit Components

Saddle Screw together
3.4.3.1 Main Board Cable tie

3. Remove the eight screws, and pull out the Board Tray slightly. C
B B

B) Silver, M3 hex screws: two pieces
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: one piece Board Tray A
C A U T IO N The Main Board and Network Board are stored in the Board Tray Figure 3-57. Pulling out the Board Tray
and they are connected to the harnesses from the main body.
Therefore, be careful not to pull out the Board Tray too far from
the main body in the next step.
Secure the cable tie and the plate with the same screw shown in the
figure.
4. Pull out the Board Tray slightly.

5. Release the harness from the two saddles.

C A U T IO N Be extremely careful not to insert FFCs at an angle in connectors. The connector number that corresponds to the FFC is written on its
Doing so may cause serious damage to the terminals inside the surface as shown below. Make sure to connect the FFCs to their
connectors, and it can lead to big trouble of the circuit components. correct connectors according to the numbers.
6. Disconnect all connectors and FFCs on the Main Board.
 The connector shown in Figure 3-59 is not used.

 When installing the Main Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6
Main Board
7. Remove the seven screws that secure the Main Board.

A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: seven pieces
8. Remove the Main Board.
Main Board
A A A
Figure 3-58. Disconnecting the connectors and FFCs
Unused
A A A A
Figure 3-59. Removing the Main Board

A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform A D J U S T M E N T  NVRAM Backup NG (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910)
R E Q U IR E D R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the Main Board. 1. Initial Ink Charge Flag
<Adjustment items> 2. Rear AD Adjustment
 NVRAM Backup OK 3. RTC & USB ID Check & Adjustment
1. NVRAM Backup 4. Serial Number Check & Input
2. Firmware Install 5. Head ID Check & Input
3. NVRAM Registry 6. Firmware Install
4. RTC & USB ID Check & Adjustment 7. Motor Measurement Adjustment
5. MAC Address Check & Input 8. Suction Check & Adjustment
 NVRAM Backup NG (SC-P5000 Series) 9. Nozzle Check
1. Firmware Install 10. AID Function Check
2. Initial Ink Charge Flag 11. Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment
3. Rear AD Adjustment 12. Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment
4. RTC & USB ID Check & Adjustment 13. Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment
5. Serial Number Check & Input 14. PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
6. Color Mode Settings 15. Auto Bi-D Adjustment
7. Head ID Check & Input 16. Cut Position Check & Adjustment
8. Firmware Install 17. MAC Address Check & Input
9. Motor Measurement Adjustment 18. Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment
10. Suction Check & Adjustment
11. Nozzle Check
12. AID Function Check
13. Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment
14. Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment
15. Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment
16. PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
17. Auto Bi-D Adjustment
18. Cut Position Check & Adjustment
19. MAC Address Check & Input
20. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)

3.4.3.2 Network Board

There are two specification for Network Board (Old / New), so Network Board
C A U T IO N
please refer to the appropriate figures.
 The following S/N shows the printer which installed new
Network Board applied for ENERGY STAR Ver.2.0.
 Universal STD (EIB/EFS/EDG/EIS/EUL/EMO/EKL/EAI/
EAI_Latin): From MP2E021402
 EPIL: From RUYE000058
 ESP/ETT/EPIL_ESP: From MP6E000424
 ECC/EHK: From MP5E001517

3. Pull out the Board Tray. (Step 3 to Step 5 in "3.4.2.14 Board Tray" (P. 173))
4. Disconnect all connectors on the Network Board.
Figure 3-60. Removing the Network Board (Old)
When installing the Network Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6
Network Board
Figure 3-61. Removing the Network Board (New)

5. Remove the two screws that secure the Cooling Fan, and remove the Cooling Fan.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x14: two pieces B B Network Board
When installing the Cooling Fan, be careful of the installation

direction referring to Figure 3-62.
B
Cooling Fan
B B
Figure 3-63. Removing the Network Board (Old)

A
B
Network Board
Figure 3-62. Removing the Cooling Fan
6. Remove the five screws that secure the Network Board, and remove the Network
Board.
B
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: five pieces
B
B
Figure 3-64. Removing the Network Board (New)

3.4.3.3 Power Supply Box

- Rear left - Clamps
SUB-C Board
4. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs on the SUB-C Board.
Power Supply Box
When installing the SUB-C Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6

Clamp
5. Release the harnesses from the three clamps.

6. Remove the four screws that secure the Power Supply Box. A
A
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: four pieces
7. Pull out the Power Supply Box.
- Left side -
Figure 3-65. Pulling out the Power Supply Box

8. Disconnect the cable connected to the Power Supply Box.

9. Remove the clamp from the Power Supply Box.
Power Supply Box
Cable
Clamp
Figure 3-66. Removing the Power Supply Box

3.4.3.4 Power Supply Board

W A R N IN G  When removing the Power Supply Board, do not start the work
A
immediately after disconnecting the AC cable. Wait for at least
five minutes for the electrolytic capacitor to finish discharging
A
residual charges.
 When powering this product, high-voltage current may be
applied on the Power Supply Board. To prevent ELECTRIC
SHOCK, do not touch the Power Supply Board when the power
is ON. If the shock should happen, the flowing current is very
tiny, about a few hundreds A, therefore it will not do any
harm on the human body.
A
4. Remove the Power Supply Box. (p184)
A
5. Remove the four screws that secure the cover of the Power Supply Box, and Cover
Power Supply Box
remove the cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: four pieces Figure 3-67. Removing the cover
When installing the cover of the Power Supply Box, make sure to
install it so that the part with an asterisk is set inside the Power
Supply Box.
Cover

6. Disconnect the connector connected to the Power Supply Board.

7. Remove the six screws that secure the Power Supply Board, and remove the Power
Supply Board.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: six pieces
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the Power Supply Board.
<Adjustment items>
1. Motor Measurement Adjustment
2. Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment
Power Supply Board
B B B
Connector
B B B
Figure 3-68. Removing the Power Supply Board

3.4.3.5 SUB Board 7. Remove the two screws that secure the SUB Board, and remove the SUB Board.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: two pieces

A
SUB Board
5. Remove the CR Cover. (p175)
6. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs on the SUB Board.
When installing the SUB Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6

SUB Board Figure 3-70. Removing the SUB Board
Figure 3-69. Disconnecting the connectors

3.4.3.6 SUB-B Board 8. Remove the four screws that secure the SUB-B Board, and remove the SUB-B
Board.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: four pieces
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) - Rear left -
A A
6. Remove the Mid-Right Cover. (p176) Unused
7. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs on the SUB-B Board.
 The connector shown in Figure 3-72 is not used. SUB-B Board

 When installing the SUB-B Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6
- Rear left -
SUB-B Board A A
Figure 3-72. Removing the SUB-B Board

3.4.3.7 SUB-C Board 5. Remove the four screws that secure the SUB-C Board, and remove the SUB-C
Board.
3. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) - Right side -
4. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs on the SUB-C Board. A

A
When installing the SUB-C Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6

- Rear right -
A A
SUB-C Board
SUB-C Board
Figure 3-74. Removing the SUB-C Board

3.4.3.8 SUB-D Board 3. Remove the four screws that secure the SUB-D Board, and remove the SUB-D
Board.
1. Remove the Right Roll Cover. (p177)
2. Disconnect all the connectors and FFCs on the SUB-D Board.
Secure the SUB-D Board together with the grounding plate using
When installing the SUB-D Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6 the same screw shown in the figure.
- Right side - A
- Right side -
SUB-D Board
A
A Screw together
SUB-D Board
Figure 3-75. Disconnecting the connectors Figure 3-76. Removing the SUB-D Board

3.4.3.9 AID Board 7. Remove the five screws that secure the AID Board, and remove the AID Board.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) B) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M3x6: two pieces
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: three pieces
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161)  Secure the terminal of the AID Board and the AID Board with
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) the same screw B. At this point, make sure to match the color
(WHITE/BLACK) of the cable with the color written on the
5. Remove the three screws that secure the AID Board Cover, and remove the AID board.
Board Cover.  Line the two cables in parallel and secure them with the screw B.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: three pieces  Make sure to secure the screw B tightly.
- Left side - A
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the AID Board.
A
<Adjustment items>
1. Nozzle Check
- Left side - C AID Board
A
AID Board Cover
Screw together
Figure 3-77. Removing the AID Board Cover B
6. Disconnect the FFC on the AID Board.
When installing the AID Board, be sure to refer to Chapter 6

FFC C
Figure 3-78. Removing the AID Board

3.4.3.10 LED Board 6. Disconnect the FFC on the LED Board, and remove the LED Board.

LED Board
3. Remove the four screws that secure the plate, and remove the plate.
4. Remove the three screws that secure the LED Board.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces
Connector
C A U T IO N When removing the LED Board in the next step, since the FFC is
connected to the LED Board, be sure not to pull it away too far
from the Control Panel Cover.
5. Release the harness from the cable guides, and remove the LED Board.
B
Figure 3-80. Removing the LED Board
Cable guides
Control Panel Cover

A A
LED Board
Plate
A A
Figure 3-79. Removing the plate

3.4.3.11 Control Panel Board

4. Remove the LED Board. (p193)
5. Disconnect the FFC from the Control Panel Board.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the Control Panel Board, and remove the
Control Panel Board.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8 (bit: No.1): two pieces

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Control Panel Board.
<Adjustment item>
Operation Panel Check (Buttons & LCD)
FFC
A
A
Control Panel Board
Figure 3-81. Removing the Control Panel Board

3.4.4 Carriage Mechanism Saddle CR Motor
3.4.4.1 CR Motor
5. Remove the Mid-Right Cover. (p176)
6. Unlock the CR Unit, and move the CR Unit to the left side. (p148)
7. Disconnect the connector (CN204) of the CR Motor from the SUB-B Board.
CN204
8. Release the harness from the saddle.
Figure 3-82. Releasing the harness

C A U T IO N When removing the CR Motor in the next step, be careful not to

damage the scale of the APG motor. Saddle
9. Remove the two screws that secure the CR Motor.

CR Motor
10. Move the CR Motor to the rear, and detach the CR Belt from the pinion gear.
11. Remove the CR Motor. CN204
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the CR Motor.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (CR Motor Counter)
2. CR Belt Adjustment
4. CR Speed Initialize
5. Active Damper Adjustment
6. Nozzle Check
8. PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment CR Belt
Pinion gear
Figure 3-83. Removing the CR Motor

3.4.4.2 CR Encoder - Rear of Carriage Unit -

2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) CR Encoder
FFC
A A
7. Remove the CR Scale. (p198)
8. Remove the APG Motor Assy. (p206)
10. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit.
(Step 6 to Step 11 in "3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy" (P. 262))
11. Remove the Printhead. (p265)
Figure 3-84. Removing the CR Encoder
12. Remove the CR Unit/CR Belt. (p202)
13. Remove the two screws that secure the CR Encoder, and remove the CR Encoder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M2.5x6 (bit: No.1): two pieces
14. Disconnect the FFC from the CR Encoder.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the CR Encoder.
<Adjustment items>
1. FFC Position Check
3. PG Height Check & Adjustment
4. Nozzle Check
5. CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment
6. CR Encoder and Scale Check

3.4.4.3 CR Scale
Take extreme care to avoid soiling the CR Scale surfaces with ink Step 8 Step 9
C A U T IO N CR scale spring
or by touching them with bare hands. In addition, be careful not to
scratch the surface on which patterns for detection are printed by
CR Scale CR Scale
bumping the scale against frames of the main unit. The above
precautions should always be followed, or a malfunction of the CR
Unit may occur.
x
Hook
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Hook

CR Scale
7. Disengage the CR scale spring from the hook on the left side of the main frame.
8. Remove the CR scale spring from the CR Scale.
9. Disengage the CR Scale from the hook on the right side of the main frame.
10. Pull out the CR Scale from the CR Unit.
Figure 3-85. Removing the CR Scale

 Attach the CR Scale with the marking on the top left corner. A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the CR Scale.
- Front left - <Adjustment items>
2. CR Speed Initialize
Marking
 Make sure to route the CR Scale through the detection part of

the CR Encoder Sensor on the rear of the CR Unit.
CR Encoder
CR Scale
Detection part

3.4.4.4 Ink Mark Sensor

Sensor cover
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) A
6. Unlock the carriage, and move the CR Unit to the left end. (p148)
A
C A U T IO N Be sure to move the CR Unit to the left end before performing the
following steps. Performing the following step with the CR on the
platen may damage the Printhead.
Figure 3-86. Removing the sensor cover

8. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit.
9. Remove the CR Unit. (Step 1 to Step 20 in "3.4.4.5 CR Unit/CR Belt" (P. 202))
10. Remove the two screws that secure the sensor cover, and remove the sensor cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite with S.W & P.W. M2.3x10 (bit: No.1): two pieces

11. Take out the Ink Mark Sensor from the CR Unit, and disconnect the FFC from the
Ink Mark Sensor.
FFC
Ink Mark Sensor

CR Unit
Figure 3-87. Removing the Ink Mark Sensor

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Ink Mark
Sensor.
<Adjustment items>
4. Nozzle Check

3.4.4.5 CR Unit/CR Belt 14. Remove the screw that secures the CR scale mounting plate, and remove the CR
scale mounting plate.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite with S.W & P.W. M4x12: one piece
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x5: two pieces
16. Move the CR Motor to the rear, and release the CR Belt from the pinion gear.
CR Belt B CR scale mounting plate
10. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit. C
Pinion gear
12. Disconnect the FFC (CN100) from the SUB Board.
C
13. Remove the screw that secures the FFC holder, and remove the FFC holder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: one piece
FFC holder
CN100
Figure 3-89. Releasing the CR Belt (1)
SUB Board
Figure 3-88. Removing the FFC

17. Slide the driven pulley to the left to remove it from the driven pulley holder.
C A U T IO N When removing the CR Unit in the next step, be careful not to
18. Remove the driven pulley from the CR Belt. disengage the slider.
19. Move the CR Unit to the Home side.
Slider
Driven pulley holder CR Belt
20. Slide the CR Unit to the right to remove it.
Driven pulley
CR Unit
Figure 3-90. Releasing the CR Belt (2)
Figure 3-91. Removing the CR Unit

21. Pull up the center of the plate, and disengage the hook.
22. Turn the plate to the position shown in the figure, and remove it. Step 21 Step 22
Plate Plate
23. Remove the CR belt holder from the CR Unit.
Hook
24. Remove the CR Belt from the CR belt holder.
Install the CR Belt as follows.

 Face the tooth side as shown in the figure below.
 Set the area with the gear on both sides to the CR belt holder.
Area with
Top: Teeth Top: Teeth
the teeth on
Bottom: Flat Bottom: Flat
both sides
CR belt holder
CR Belt Hooks
25. Disengage the two hooks that secure the oil pad holder, and remove the two oil pad
holders.
Hooks
Oil pad holder
Oil pad holder
Figure 3-92. Removing the CR Belt


R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the CR Unit/CR
Belt.
<Adjustment items>
4. Nozzle Check
7. CR Speed Initialize*
*: Not necessary for CR Belt replacement
Lubrication When replacing or maintaining the CR Unit/CR Belt, carry out the
specified lubrication if necessary. (See Chapter 6
“MAINTENANCE” (p474)).

3.4.4.6 APG Motor Assy APG Motor Assy Connector

A
A
5. Disconnect the connector from the APG Motor Assy.
6. Remove the four screws that secure the APG Motor Assy, and remove the APG
A
Motor Assy.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the APG Motor A
Assy.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (APG Motor Assy Counter) Figure 3-93. Removing the APG Motor Assy
(After replacement only)
2. APG Check

3.4.4.7 APG Sensor

Transmission position of sensor
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) Shading plate

Cutout
6. Rotate the gear until the cutout of the shading plate comes between the
transmission position of sensor as shown in Figure 3-94.
Gear
Figure 3-94. Rotating the shading plate

7. Disengage the four hooks that secure the APG Sensor, and remove the APG 8. Disconnect the connector from the APG Sensor.
Sensor.
Connector
APG Sensor
APG Sensor
Hooks
Figure 3-95. Removing the APG Sensor


3.4.4.8 Oil pad holder 5. Disengage the hooks, and remove the oil pad holder on the right.
1. Unlock the CR Unit. (p148)

2. Open the Printer Cover. CR Unit
3. Move the CR Unit to the center.
4. Disengage the hooks, and remove the oil pad holder on the left.
Hooks
Oil pad holder
Oil pad holder

Hooks
Figure 3-98. Removing the oil pad holder (R)
CR Unit
Figure 3-97. Removing the oil pad holder (L)

3.4.5 Paper Feed Mechanism

3.4.5.1 PF Motor
4. Disconnect the connector (CN302) from the SUB-C Board. Marking
5. Release the harnesses from the two clamps.

6. Mark the screw positions.
- Rear left -
Securing the PF Motor at the marked position makes the PF Motor A
subsequent tension adjustment easier.
Clamps Pinion gear
7. Remove the two screws that secure the PF Motor.

PF Belt
8. Detach the PF belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor.
9. Remove the PF Motor from the main body. SUB-C Board

R E Q U IR E D CN302
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the PF Motor.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (PF Motor Counter)
2. PF Belt Adjustment
Figure 3-99. Removing the PF Motor

3.4.5.2 PF Encoder
- Left side -
FFC
3. Disconnect the FFC from the PF Encoder.
PF Encoder
C A U T IO N When removing the PF Encoder in the next step, be careful not to
damage the PF Scale.
4. Remove the screw that secures the PF Encoder, and remove the PF Encoder. A
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M2.5x6: one piece

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing or removing the PF Encoder.
<Adjustment item>
Figure 3-100. Removing the PF Encoder
PF Encoder and Scale Check

3.4.5.3 PF Scale
- Left side -
3. Remove the PF Scale.
 The PF Scale cannot be reused once it is removed. Make sure to

replace it with a new one. Tape for attachment is included in
the PF Scale as an ASP.
 When attaching the PF Scale, take care in the following.
 Attach the scale with the numbers in the direction you can
read correctly.
 Align the center of the scale.
 Do not touch the black slit and be careful not to damage the
PF Scale
scale.
Figure 3-101. Removing the PF Scale

3.4.5.4 PF Belt
3. Mark the screw positions.
Securing the PF Motor at the marked position makes the Marking

subsequent tension adjustment easier.
- Left side -
4. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF Motor.
PF Belt
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x5: two pieces Gear
5. Detach the belt from the pinion gear of the PF Motor.

Harness guides
Retaining ring
6. Remove the FFC from the PF Encoder, and release the FFC from the harness FFC
guides of the PF encoder holder.
A
C A U T IO N In the next steps, be careful not to damage the PF Scale.
7. Remove the retaining ring, and remove the gear in the direction of the arrow. Pinion gear PF Scale
8. Remove the PF Belt. PF encoder holder

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing or removing the PF Belt.
Figure 3-102. Removing the PF Belt
<Adjustment item>
PF Belt Adjustment

3.4.5.5 Suction Fan

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) - On platen -
Carriage unit
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) A
A
6. Remove the Media Eject Cover. (p174)
7. Remove the two screws that secure the Suction Fan.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: one piece
8. Disconnect the relay connector, and remove the Suction Fan.
Relay connector
Suction Fan
Figure 3-103. Removing the Suction Fan

9. Remove the two screws that secure the plate, and remove the plate from the
Suction Fan.
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: two pieces

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Suction Fan.
<Adjustment item>
Suction Check & Adjustment
B
Plate
Suction Fan

3.4.5.6 PE Sensor
“PAPER GUIDE,MANUAL FEED”
A A
5. Remove the Mid-Right Cover/Mid-Left Cover. (p176)
6. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) A
7. Remove the Rear Unit. (p171) A

B
8. Remove the Printer Cover. (p157)
B
9. Remove the upper rear cover. (Step 7 in "3.4.5.9 Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2" (P.
223)) “PAPER GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”
10. Remove the Release Assy. (Step 4 to Step 7 in "3.4.5.10 Release Motor Assy" (P.
225))
11. Remove the four screws that secure the “PAPER GUIDE,MANUAL FEED”.
Figure 3-105. Removing the “PAPER GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”
12. Remove the “PAPER GUIDE,MANUAL FEED”.
13. Remove the two screws that secure the “PAPER GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: two pieces
14. Remove the “PAPER GUIDE,ROLL,UNDER”.

15. Disengage the two hooks, and remove the actuator of the Paper Thickness Sensor. 18. Remove the four screws that secure the release shaft holder.
16. Disconnect the two connectors from the Paper Thickness Sensor. C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: four pieces
17. Release the harness from the clamp. 19. Disengage the four hooks of the release shaft holder from the holes of the main
body frame.
20. Slide the release shaft to the left to remove it.
Connectors
Release shaft holder
Release shaft
Clamp
C C C C
Paper Thickness
Sensor
Actuator
Hooks
Release shaft holder Hooks
Figure 3-106. Removing the actuator
Figure 3-107. Removing the release shaft holder

21. Remove the eight torsion springs from the main body frame. 23. Remove the torsion springs.
22. Remove the five screws that secure the “MOUNTING PLATE,PAPER 24. Remove the screw that secures the “PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”.
GUIDE,UPPER”, and remove the “MOUNTING PLATE,PAPER
E) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x4: one piece
GUIDE,UPPER”.
D) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: five pieces
“MOUNTING PLATE,PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”

E
Torsion springs
D
D
D
Torsion spring
D
Figure 3-109. Removing the “PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”
Hook
Torsion spring
Figure 3-108. Removing the “MOUNTING PLATE,PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”

25. Lift the “PAPER GUIDE,UPPER” to disengage the dowels on the wight and left 28. Disengage the hooks that secure the PE Sensor Cover, and remove the PE Sensor
from the main body frame. Cover.
26. Move the “PAPER GUIDE,UPPER” to the rear, and pull out the dowels on the 29. Take out the PE Sensor from the PE Sensor Holder, and disconnect the FFC.
right and left downward from the hole of the main body frame.
R E Q U IR E D
Dowels specified adjustments after replacing the PE Sensor.
<Adjustment items>
1. Sensor Check (PE Sensor)
2. Rear AD Adjustment
FFC PE Sensor
“PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”
Figure 3-110. Removing the “PAPER GUIDE,UPPER”

27. Disengage the hooks, and remove the PE Sensor Holder. PE Sensor Cover
PE Sensor Holder
PE Sensor Holder
Hooks
Hooks
Figure 3-112. Removing the PE Sensor
Figure 3-111. Removing the PE Sensor Holder

3.4.5.7 2nd PE Sensor 11. Disconnect the connector from the 2nd PE Sensor.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) 12. Disengage the hook, and remove the 2nd PE Sensor.

- Back side of “PAPER GUIDE,REAR” -
2nd PE Sensor
5. Remove the Mid-Right Cover/Mid-Left Cover. (p176)
7. Remove the Rear Unit. (p171) Connector
8. Remove the Printer Cover. (p157)

9. Remove the upper rear cover. (Step 7 in "3.4.5.9 Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2" (P.
223))
Hook
10. Disengage the two hooks that secure the “PAPER GUIDE,REAR”, and pull the
“PAPER GUIDE,REAR” to remove.
Hooks
Figure 3-114. Removing the 2nd PE Sensor
“PAPER GUIDE,REAR”
Figure 3-113. Removing the “PAPER GUIDE,REAR”

3.4.5.8 PW Sensor
Sensor cover
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) A
7. Remove the CR Cover. (p175) A
8. Unlock the CR Unit. (p148)

10. Remove the Ink Selector Assy. (p262) Figure 3-115. Removing the sensor cover
12. Remove the CR Unit. (Step 1 to Step 20 in "3.4.4.5 CR Unit/CR Belt" (P. 202))
13. Remove the two screws that secure the sensor cover, and remove the sensor cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite with S.W & P.W. M2.3x10 (bit: No.1): two pieces

14. Remove the PW Sensor from the CR Unit, and disconnect the FFC from the PW
Sensor.
PW Sensor
FFC
Figure 3-116. Removing the PW Sensor

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the PW Sensor.
<Adjustment items>
4. Nozzle Check

3.4.5.9 Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2 8. Mark the screw positions.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Securing the Paper Thickness Sensor at the marked position makes
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) the subsequent position adjustment easier.

5. Remove the Left Cover. (p163) 9. Loosen the two screws.
6. Remove the Printer Cover. (p157) A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: two pieces
7. Remove the two screws that secure the upper rear cover, and remove the upper 10. Remove the sensor holders from the sensor mounting plate.
rear cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: two pieces - Upper right -
Sensor holders
-Upper
A A A A
Markings
Sensor mounting plate
Upper rear cover Figure 3-118. Removing the sensor holders
Figure 3-117. Removing the upper rear cover

C A U T IO N In the next step, make sure to confirm the destination of each cable.
When connecting them again, be sure to restore the original
routing.
11. Disconnect the connector from each Paper Thickness Sensor.

12. Disengage the four hooks that secure the Paper Thickness Sensor (s), and remove
the Paper Thickness Sensors from each sensor holder.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing or removing the Paper
Thickness Sensor (s).
<Adjustment item>
Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment
- Upper right -
Connector
Paper Thickness Sensor1, 2
Connector
Hooks
Hooks
Sensor holders
Figure 3-119. Removing the Paper Thickness Sensors

3.4.5.10 Release Motor Assy When removing the Release Motor Assy in the next step, be careful
C A U T IO N
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) not to damage the scale.

4. Disconnect the two connectors (CN305, CN307) from the SUB-C Board. 8. Remove the two screws that secure the Release Motor Assy, and remove the
5. Release the harnesses from the two clamps. Release Motor Assy.
6. Disconnect the FFC from the encoder. B) Silver, Phillips, Pan machine screw M2.6x3: two pieces
7. Remove the two screws that secure the motor mounting plate, and remove the When installing the Release Motor Assy, be careful of the
motor mounting plate. installation direction referring to Figure 3-121.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: two pieces
- Rear left - A Encoder
Motor mounting plate

Motor mounting plate
FFC
Clamps
CN307 B
CN305
Scale
SUB-C Board B
Release Motor Assy
Figure 3-121. Removing the Release Motor Assy


3.4.5.11 Release Sensor 5. Disengage the hooks that secure the Release Sensor, and remove the Release
Sensor.
6. Disconnect the connector from the Release Sensor.
3. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) - Left rear -
4. Rotate the gear of the Release Motor Assy until the cutout of the shading plate
comes between the Release Sensor’s detector section. Release Sensor
Connector
- Left rear - Gear
Release Motor Assy

Hooks
Shading plate
Figure 3-123. Removing the Release Sensor
Release Sensor
Removable Unremovable
Shading plate Release Sensor
Figure 3-122. Rotating the Shading Plate

3.4.5.12 Edge Release Assy

Edge Release Assy + Mounting plate
A A
3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) Connector
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) Connector

B
5. Remove the IS Unit. (p266)
6. Remove the three screws that secure the mounting plate of the Edge Release Assy.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: one piece
7. Disconnect the connectors from the Edge Release Assy and the Edge Sensor, and
remove the Edge Release Assy together with the mounting plate.
Figure 3-124. Removing the mounting plate

8. Remove the two screws that secure the Edge Release Assy, and remove the Edge
Release Assy.
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M2.6x4 (bit: No.1): two pieces
Mounting plate
Edge Release Assy
Figure 3-125. Removing the Edge Release Assy

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Edge Release Assy.
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (Edge Release Assy Counter)

3.4.5.13 Edge Sensor

5. Remove the IS Unit. (p266)
6. Remove the mounting plate of the Edge Release Assy.
(Step 6 to Step 7 in "3.4.5.12 Edge Release Assy" (P. 227))
7. Disengage the hooks that secure the Edge Sensor, and remove the Edge Sensor.
Hooks
Edge Sensor
Figure 3-126. Removing the Edge Sensor

3.4.6 ASF Unit

- Rear left -
3.4.6.1 ASF Motor Assy

Connector
3. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) A
4. Disconnect the connector from the ASF Motor Assy.

5. Remove the two screws that secure the ASF Motor Assy, and remove the ASF
Motor Assy.
ASF Motor Assy

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the ASF Motor Assy.
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (ASF Motor Assy Counter)
Figure 3-127. Removing the ASF Motor Assy

3.4.6.2 ASF Sub Motor Assy

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) - Rear right -
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) A

5. Disconnect the connector from the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
6. Remove the two screws that secure the ASF Sub Motor Assy, and remove the ASF
Sub Motor Assy.
A) Silver, Phillips, Pan machine screw M2.6x6: two pieces

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the ASF Sub Motor Assy.
<Adjustment item>
ASF Sub Motor Assy
Counter Reset (ASF Sub Motor Assy Counter)
Connector
Figure 3-128. Removing the ASF Sub Motor Assy

3.4.6.3 Pickup Roller

Insert your hands into the printer from the paper cassette compartment, and remove the
Pickup Roller(/Unit).
Figure 3-129. Removing the Pickup Roller from the cassette compartment
Before removing the Pickup Unit, refer below to confirm the structure of the unit.
Step 3
Pickup Roller
Step 3
Step 5
Step 4
Figure 3-130. Structure of the Pickup Unit

1. Remove the paper cassette and the output tray.

2. Release the hook of the bushing from the frame and rotate the bushing in the
direction of the arrow. Step 2
Bushing
3. Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow and remove the Pickup Unit from the
frame of the printer.
Bushing Step 2 Step 3
Hook Pull
Rotate
Lever
Pull
Step 3
Rotate Lever
Pickup Unit
Figure 3-132. Bushing and Lever
When installing the bushing to the main frame, align the spring pin
with the shape of the hole of the main frame.
Bushing
Spring pin
Figure 3-131. Removing the Pickup Unit

4. Push the hook in the direction of the arrow (1), and slide the shaft to the right (2). 5. While pressing the torsion spring, remove the Pickup Unit.
Pickup Unit
Shaft
2 Hook
Slide
Torsion spring
Shaft


6. Disengage the hook, and remove the gear.

7. Remove the Pickup Roller.
Pickup Roller
Gear Hook
Figure 3-135. Removing the Pickup Roller

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Pickup Roller.
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (Pickup Roller Counter)

3.4.6.4 Assist Roller Sensor/Retard Roller Sensor/

Pickup Unit Sensor
Clamp
5. Remove the Mid-Right Cover. (p176)
6. Remove the SUB-B Board. (p189)
7. Release the harnesses from the five clamps.
Saddles
8. Release the harnesses from the two saddles.
Clamps
Figure 3-136. Releasing the harnesses

9. Remove the five screws that secure the plate. 11. Remove the screw that secures the sensor holder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: five pieces B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: one piece
10. Remove the plate. 12. Remove the sensor holder.
A Sensor holder
Plate
B
A
A When the sensor holder is removed, the lever may be removed as

well. Be sure to check the installation direction of the lever before
removing the sensor holder, and reinstall the lever in the proper
Figure 3-137. Removing the plate direction if it is removed.
Lever

13. Disconnect the connectors from the sensors.

14. Disengage the hooks, and remove each sensor.
Connectors
Assist Roller
Sensor
Pickup Unit
Sensor
Retard Roller
Sensor
Hooks
Figure 3-139. Removing the sensors

3.4.6.5 Retard Roller 6. Remove the “COVER,SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”.
1. Remove the Rear Unit. (p171) 7. Remove the two springs.
2. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) 8. Pull the “SHAFT,RETARD,RESET” frontward to remove it.
3. Push and disengage the hook that secures the “CAM,ROLLER,ASSIST”.

4. Slide the “CAM,ROLLER,ASSIST” to the right to remove it. “SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”
“COVER,SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”
A
Hook
Springs
“CAM,ROLLER,ASSIST”
Figure 3-141. Removing the “SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”
C A U T IO N When removing the “SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”, do not touch the

gears shown below. Because the gears are installed with their
phases aligned, the retard roller may not function normally if their
Hook
positions are misaligned.
- Rear right -
Figure 3-140. Removing the “COVER,SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”

5. Remove the screw that secures the “COVER,SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”.
Do not touch!!

9. Pull up the “HOLDER,RETARD” as shown in the figure and remove it.

 When installing the “SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”, be sure to
insert the projection on the left end into the hole of the main
frame.
“HOLDER,RETARD”
Projection
“SHAFT,RETARD,RESET”
Main frame
 After installing the “SHAFT, RETARD, RESET”, rotate the

gear shown below in the direction of the arrow to confirm the
periodic up and down movement of the “HOLDER, RETARD”
and “SHAFT, RETARD, RESET” is correctly.
Figure 3-142. Removing the “HOLDER,RETARD”
Rotate the gear.
Check the movement.

10. Release the “HOLDER,RETARD,ASSIST” from the dowels of the

“HOLDER,RETARD”.
11. Remove the Retard Roller from the “HOLDER,RETARD”.
“HOLDER,RETARD”
Retard Roller
D-cut
“HOLDER,RETARD,ASSIST”
Dowels
Figure 3-143. Removing the Retard Roller
The shape of the shaft of the Retard Roller is D-cut. When

installing the shaft, be sure to conform it to the shape of the hole of
the “HOLDER,RETARD”.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Retard Roller.
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (Retard Roller Counter)

3.4.6.6 Paper Empty Sensor

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Dowels

A
Lower cover
7. Remove the Right IC Cover Frame. (p166)
8. Remove the Maintenance box 1. (p152) A
9. Remove the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder. (p272)

10. Remove the Maintenance box 1 Holder. (p278) Hooks
11. Remove the two screws that secure the lower cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M4x8: two pieces Figure 3-144. Removing the lower cover
12. Tilt the lower cover frontward to release the two dowels.
13. Pull out the lower cover frontward to disengage the hooks, and remove the lower
cover.

14. Remove the screw that secures the holder, and remove the holder and the lever. 15. Disconnect the connector (CN221) from the SUB-B Board.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: one piece 16. Release the harness from the saddle and the two clamps.
Clamp
Lever
B
Clamp
Holder
CN221
Figure 3-145. Removing the holder and the lever
Make sure to reassemble the holder and the lever as shown below
before installation.
Saddle
Lever
Holder

17. Remove the three screws that secure the cassette rail. 19. Disengage the hooks that secure the sensor cover, and remove the sensor cover.
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces
18. Slide the cassette rail to the front to remove it.
Sensor cover
Hooks
Cassette rail
Figure 3-148. Removing the sensor cover

20. Disconnect the connector from the Paper Empty Sensor.
21. Disengage the hooks that secure the Paper Empty Sensor, and remove the Paper
Empty Sensor.
C
C Paper Empty Sensor
C
Connector
Hooks
Figure 3-147. Removing the cassette rail
Figure 3-149. Removing the Paper Empty Sensor

3.4.6.7 Paper Cassette Sensor

2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) Clamps

6. Remove the Media Eject Cover. (p174) Cassette rail
7. Remove the Left IC Cover Frame. (p166)

8. Remove the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder. (p275)
10. Remove the lower cover. (Step 11 in "3.4.6.6 Paper Empty Sensor" (P. 242)) Hole
11. Release the harnesses from the five clamps and the saddle. Clamps Saddle
12. Pull out the harnesses from the hole of the frame.
13. Remove the three screws that secure the cassette rail.
A A A
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces
14. Slide the cassette rail to the rear to remove it.
Figure 3-150. Removing the cassette rail

15. Disconnect the connector from the Paper Cassette Sensor.

16. Disengage the hooks that secure the Paper Cassette Sensor, and remove the Paper
Cassette Sensor.
Hooks
Connector
Hooks
Paper Cassette Sensor
Figure 3-151. Removing the Paper Cassette Sensor

3.4.7 ROLL Unit 6. Disengage the hooks that secure the Roll Unit Sensor, and remove the Roll Unit
Sensor.
3.4.7.1 Roll Unit Sensor 7. Disconnect the connector from the Roll Unit Sensor.
2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) - Rear right -
Routing
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) Roll Unit Sensor
5. Remove the screw that secures the sensor holder, and remove the sensor holder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece
- Rear right -
Connector
Hooks
A Figure 3-153. Removing the Roll Unit Sensor
Sensor holder When installing the Roll Unit Sensor, make sure to route the
harness correctly as shown in Figure 3-153.

3.4.7.2 Roll Lock Sensor 6. Release and lift the roll paper cover.

Roll paper cover
2. Remove the SUB-D Board. (p191)
3. Release the harnesses from the cable guides.
4. Release the roll unit connection cable from the cable guide and the holder.
When installing the roll unit connection cable, be sure to attach the
cable tie to the position of the holder.
5. Remove the inside cover.
Figure 3-155. Releasing the roll paper cover

Roll paper cover
Inside cover 7. Remove the four screws that secure the “BASE,COVER,ROLL,RIGHT”, and
remove the “BASE,COVER,ROLL,RIGHT”.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: four pieces
“BASE,COVER,ROLL,RIGHT”
A
Cable guides A
Holder
Roll unit connection cable
A
Figure 3-154. Removing the roll paper cover
Figure 3-156. Removing the “BASE,COVER,ROLL,RIGHT”

8. Remove the three screws that secure the “HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT”. 9. Release the spring from the hook of the actuator.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: three pieces 10. Remove the “HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT”.
11. Disconnect the connector from the Roll Lock Sensor.
12. Disengage the hook that secures the Roll Lock Sensor, and remove the Roll Lock
Sensor.
B “HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT”
Actuator
“HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT” Spring
Hook
Roll Lock Sensor

Connector
Figure 3-157. Removing the Roll Lock Sensor

3.4.7.3 ATC Motor Assy 8. Remove the retaining ring, and remove the gear.
1. Remove the Right Roll Cover. (p177) 9. Remove the two screws that secure the ATC Motor Assy, and remove the ATC
Motor Assy.
2. Remove the SUB-D Board. (p191)
3. Remove the “HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT”. (Step 3 to Step 8 in "3.4.7.2 Roll
Lock Sensor" (P. 248))
4. Release the harnesses from the hooks. Gear
5. Remove the three screws that secure the Motor Assy.

6. Remove the Motor Assy. B
7. Disconnect the connector from the ATC Motor Assy. B
Motor Assy
A
A Retaining ring ATC Motor Assy
Hooks
Figure 3-159. Removing the ATC Motor Assy
ATC Motor Assy
When installing the ATC Motor Assy, be careful of the installation
Connector

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the ATC Motor Assy.
Figure 3-158. Removing the Motor Assy
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (ATC Motor Counter)

3.4.7.4 Roll Feeding Motor Assy Roll Feeding Motor Assy

2. Remove the SUB-D Board. (p191) Planetary gear
3. Remove the “HOLDER,ROLLER,RIGHT”. (Step 3 to Step 8 in "3.4.7.2 Roll Connector

Lock Sensor" (P. 248))
4. Remove the Motor Assy. (Step 4 to Step 6 in "3.4.7.3 ATC Motor Assy" (P. 250))
A
5. Disconnect the connector from the Roll Feeding Motor Assy.
6. Remove the planetary gear.
When installing the planetary gear, be careful of the installation A

7. Remove the two screws that secure the Roll Feeding Motor Assy, and remove the Figure 3-160. Removing the Roll Feeding Motor Assy
Roll Feeding Motor Assy.
A) Silver, Phillips, Pan machine screw M2.6x4: two pieces
When installing the Roll Feeding Motor Assy, be careful of the

installation direction referring to Figure 3-160.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Roll Feeding Motor Assy.
<Adjustment item>
Counter Reset (Roll Feeding Motor Counter)

3.4.7.5 Paper Guide Sensor

7. Disconnect the connector from the Paper Guide Sensor.
8. Disengage the hook that secures the Paper Guide Sensor, and remove the Paper
Guide Sensor.
Paper Guide Sensor

Connector
Hook
Figure 3-161. Removing the Paper Guide Sensor

3.4.7.6 Roll Feeding Sensor

2. Disconnect the connector from the Roll Feeding Sensor.
3. Disengage the hook, and remove the Roll Feeding Sensor.
Roll Feeding Sensor
Hook
Connector
Figure 3-162. Removing the Roll Feeding Sensor

3.4.7.7 Antistatic Cloth Unit 5. Remove the Inner Cover.
1. Remove the Roll Unit. (p149)

2. Remove the Left Roll Cover/Right Roll Cover. (p177)
3. Close the Roll Paper Cover.
4. Remove the Rear Roll Cover Unit backward while holding it by hand.
Roll Paper Cover
Rear Roll
Cover Unit
Inner Cover
Figure 3-164. Removing the Inner Cover
Figure 3-163. Removing the Rear Roll Cover Unit

6. At the left side, disengage the Torsion Spring from the hook of the frame using 7. At the right side, disengage the Torsion Spring from the hook of the frame using
needle-nose pliers or a similar tool. needle-nose pliers or a similar tool while holding the Antistatic Cloth Unit by
hand.
Before engaging the Torsion Spring to the hook, make sure the
upper side leg of the Torsion Spring set the hook on the frame. Before engaging the Torsion Spring to the hook, make sure the
upper side leg of the Torsion Spring set the hook on the frame.
Hook Leg of the
spring
Leg of the Hook
spring
OK NG
OK NG
Torsion Spring
Hook
Antistatic Cloth Unit Torsion Spring

Hook
左ロールカバー
Figure 3-165. Removing the Torsion Spring (left side)

Figure 3-166. Removing the Torsion Spring (right side)

8. Remove the Antistatic Cloth Unit.
Antistatic Cloth Unit
Figure 3-167. Removing the Antistatic Cloth Unit
C H E C K When replacing the Antistatic Cloth, remove the screw and

P O IN T Grounding Plate.
Grounding Plate
Antistatic Cloth
Screw

3.4.8 Cutter Unit

3.4.8.1 Cutter Cover
2. Open the Cutter Cover.
3. Pull the Cutter Cover in the direction of the arrow to disengage the joint, and
remove the Cutter Cover.
Cutter Cover
Joint
Figure 3-168. Removing the Cutter Cover

3.4.8.2 Cutter Motor Assy

Cutter Motor Assy
7. Remove the Cutter Cover. (p257)
8. Remove the Cutter. (p151) A
9. Remove the Cutter Unit. (p261)

10. Remove the two screws that secure the Cutter Motor Assy.
A
11. Remove the Cutter Motor Assy.
Figure 3-169. Removing the Cutter Motor Assy
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Cutter Motor
Assy.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (Cutter Motor Assy Counter)
2. Sensor Check (Cutter HP Sensor)

3.4.8.3 Cutter HP Sensor 10. Move the cutter to the center.
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) 11. Open the Cutter Cover.
2. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) 12. Remove the screw that secures the cover holder, and remove the cover holder.
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece

5. Remove the Left Cover. (p163) Cover holder
Step 10
7. Disconnect the connector (CN315) from the SUB-C board.
8. Release the harnesses from the four clamps and the saddle.
Step 11
9. Pull out the harnesses from the hole of the main body frame.
A
Clamp
Cutter
Hole
Cutter Cover
CN315 Figure 3-171. Removing the cover holder
When installing the cover holder, be sure to set the two hooks to the
holes of the main frame.
Holes
Cover holder
Saddle
SUB-C Board
Clamps

Hooks

13. Remove the screw that secures the Cutter HP Sensor.

B) Silver, Phillips, Pan machine screw M1.7x6 (bit: No.1): one piece
14. While pulling out the harness, remove the Cutter HP Sensor.
Cutter HP Sensor
Cutter cover holder
Figure 3-172. Removing the Cutter HP Sensor

3.4.8.4 Cutter Unit

2. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) Connector
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164) A A

A A
Cutter motor
8. Remove the Cutter. (p151) Cutter Unit
9. Disconnect the connector of the Cutter HP Sensor, and release the harness. (Step 7
to Step 9 in "3.4.8.3 Cutter HP Sensor" (P. 259))
10. Disconnect the connector from the cutter motor.
11. Remove the four screws that secure the Cutter Unit.
12. While pulling out the harness of the Cutter HP Sensor, remove the Cutter Unit.
C A U T IO N When replacing the Cutter Unit, check the cutter belt tension Figure 3-173. Removing the Cutter Unit
before attaching the Cutter Unit. (see p421)
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform Figure 3-174. Cutter Unit
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Cutter Unit.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (Cutter Motor Assy Counter)
2. Cutter Belt Tension Check
3. Sensor Check (Cutter HP Sensor)

3.4.9 Ink System Mechanism

3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy
1. Discharge ink. (p397)
A A
Ink Selector Assy
Hook
6. Disconnect the connectors (CN105, CN106) from the SUB Board.
7. Disengage the hook, and remove the tube mounting plate.
8. Remove the three screws that secure the Ink Selector Assy.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces A Tube mounting plate
CN105 CN106
Figure 3-175. Removing the Ink Selector Assy

9. Release the FFC from the three cable holders. 10. Remove the screw that secures the tube holder.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: one piece
When fixing the FFC to the cable holder, be sure to set the upper
side of the FFC to the hook on the cable holder first, and then push 11. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit taking care not to hit it against the
the lower side of the FFC to fix it. tube holder.
Cable holder Ink Selector Assy

Upper part
FFC Tube holder
Lower part
CR Unit
B
Cable holders FFC
Figure 3-176. Releasing the FFC

12. Remove the four screws that secure the Ink Tube, and remove the Ink Tube.
Ink Selector Assy
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x10: four pieces
Ink Tube
13. Remove the O-ring from the Ink Selector Assy.
C
 Make sure to tighten the screw that secures the Ink Tubes using
a torque driver with the following torque.
0.39 0.05N/m
 Make sure to install the O-ring. The O-ring is included in the C C
Ink Selector Assy. Make sure to confirm there is no damage or
no foreign material attached on the sealing rubber or the joint
C
section visually then. Installing a damaged part such as
mentioned above may cause ink leakage.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Ink Selector
Assy.
<Adjustment items> Ink Selector Assy
1. Ink Eject and Initial Charge

2. Counter Reset (Ink Selector Assy Counter)
3. Ink Selector Movement Check
5. Nozzle Check
O-ring

3.4.9.2 Printhead A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform
R E Q U IR E D
1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Printhead.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (Printhead Counter)
3. Unlock the carriage, and move the CR Unit to the left end. (p148) 2. Head ID Check & Input
4. Cleaning
5. Nozzle Check
4. Remove the CR Cover. (p175) 9. Auto Bi-D Adjustment
5. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit. (Step 6 to Step 11 in "3.4.9.1 Ink 10. Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment
Selector Assy" (P. 262))
6. Remove the three screws that secure the Printhead. Head FFC
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M2.5x6: three pieces

7. Remove the Printhead, and disconnect the FFC. A A
After installing the Printhead, be sure to check that the Printhead

does not move by shaking it slightly. If it moves, re-tighten the three
screws securely.
Printhead
Figure 3-179. Removing the Printhead

3.4.9.3 IS Unit 7. Remove the two screws and disconnect the two cables secured on the board.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind S-tite with S.W & P.W. M3x6: two pieces
W A R N IN G When powering this product, high-voltage current may be applied
on the IS Unit (Flushing Box). To prevent ELECTRIC SHOCK, do 8. Remove the screw.
not touch the IS Unit (Flushing Box) when the power is ON.
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: one piece
If the shock should happen, the flowing current is very tiny, about a
few hundreds A, therefore it will not do any harm on the human  Secure the terminal of the AID Board and the AID Board with
body. the same screw B. At this point, make sure to match the color
(WHITE/BLACK) of the cable with the color written on the
board.
2. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161)  Line the two cables in parallel and secure them with the screw B.
3. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (p164)  Make sure to secure the screw B tightly.
4. Remove the Right Cover. (p165) - Left side - AID Board
6. Remove the three screws that secure the AID Board Cover, and remove the AID
Board Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: three pieces
A
- Left side - Screw together
B
A
C
A
AID Board Cover
Figure 3-180. Removing the AID Board Cover
Figure 3-181. Removing the wire

9. Release the harnesses from the four clamps. 11. Remove the screw that secures the plate, and remove the plate.
D) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x6: one piece
C A U T IO N Disconnecting the Waste Ink Tube in the next step may leak ink
from the tube. Therefore, prepare a waste cloth or the like in 12. Remove the two screws that secure the IS Unit.
advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
E) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: two pieces
IS Unit
10. Disconnect the two Waste Ink Tubes.
- Right side -
D
Plate
D
Waste Ink Tubes

C

Clamps

13. Lift the IS Unit.

14. Disconnect the two connectors from the IS Unit.
15. Remove the IS Unit.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the IS Unit.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (IS Unit Counter)
2. Motor Measurement Adjustment Connector IS Unit
3. Nozzle Check
Connector
Figure 3-184. Removing the IS Unit

3.4.9.4 Wiper
1. Perform " Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange" (Page 395), and move the Wiper
to the position to replace it.
C A U T IO N When removing the Wiper in the following steps, remove it with the Tab
white mounter.
Wiper
Wiper
White mounter
Figure 3-185. Removing the Wiper

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or cleaning the Wiper.
3. Release the hook by lifting the tab with tweezers, and remove the Wiper.
<Adjustment items>
When attaching the Wiper, set it while making it stand up and 1. Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange
press it until it clicks to secure it correctly. 2. Counter Reset
(Wiper Counter (for Exchange) or Wiper Counter (for
Cleaning))
Wiper

3.4.9.5 Wiper Cleaner

1. Perform " Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange" (Page 395), and move the Wiper
to the position to replace.
3. Remove the two screws that secure the Wiper Cleaner.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: two pieces
4. Remove the Wiper Cleaner.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the Wiper Cleaner.
<Adjustment items>
1. Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange
2. Counter Reset (Wiper Cleaner Counter)
Wiper Cleaner
Figure 3-186. Removing the Wiper Cleaner

3.4.9.6 Head Cap
C A U T IO N When removing the Head Cap, be careful not to touch the seal
material.
Seal material
Head Cap
1. Perform "Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange (p395)", and move the Wiper to
the position to replace.
3. Remove the Wiper Cleaner. (p270)
4. Remove the Head Cap.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the Head Cap.
<Adjustment items>
1. Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange
Figure 3-187. Removing the Head Cap
2. Counter Reset (Head Cap Counter)

3.4.9.7 Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder

Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder
1. Discharge ink. (p397)
FFC
2. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) Tubes

Clamps
Clamp
10. Disconnect the FFC and the two tubes from the Home (Right) Side Cartridge
Holder.
Tape
When connecting the tube, make sure to connect it correctly as
shown in the figure below.
11. Release the FFC from the three clamps and the tape.

12. Remove the eight screws that secure the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: eight pieces - In the Cartridge Holder -
A
13. Slide the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder to the right to remove it from the A
main body.
A
A
Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder
Figure 3-189. Removing the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder

14. Remove the two screws that secure the Right Ink Tube, and disconnect the Right
Ink Tube. Right Ink Tube
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x10: two pieces

15. Remove the O-ring. B
0.39 0.05N/m Hooks B
 Make sure to install the O-ring. The O-ring is included in the
Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder. Make sure to confirm
there is no damage or no foreign material attached on the
sealing rubber or the joint section visually then. Installing a
damaged part such as mentioned above may cause ink leakage. O-ring

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Home
(Right) Side Cartridge Holder.
<Adjustment items>
2. Counter Reset (Ink Holder Home Side (R) Counter)
3. ILS & CSIC Check
Figure 3-190. Disconnecting the Ink Tube
5. Nozzle Check

3.4.9.8 Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder Tube

1. Discharge ink. (p397) FFC

3. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) Drawer connector

A USB connector
8. Remove the Left IC Cover Frame. (p166)
B
10. Disconnect the FFC and the tube from the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder.
11. Remove the two screws that secure the drawer connector, and disconnect the
drawer connector. Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder
A) SCREW,M3,STEP TYPE: two pieces Figure 3-191. Disconnecting the connector
12. Remove the two screws that secure the USB connector, and disconnect the USB
connector.

13. Remove the eight screws that secure the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder.
C) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: eight pieces - In the Cartridge Holder -
C C
14. Slide the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder to the left to remove it from the main
body.
C C
Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder
Figure 3-192. Removing the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder

15. Remove the two screws that secure the Left Ink Tube, and disconnect the Left Ink
Tube.
D) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x10: two pieces Hooks
16. Remove the O-ring.
D
0.39 0.05N/m
 Make sure to install the O-ring. The O-ring is not included in
Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder. Make sure to confirm there Left Ink Tube D
is no damage or no foreign material attached on the sealing
rubber or the joint section visually then. Installing a damaged
part such as mentioned above may cause ink leakage.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Full (Left)
Side Cartridge Holder.
<Adjustment items>
2. Counter Reset (Ink Holder Full Side (L) Counter) O-ring
3. ILS & CSIC Check
5. Nozzle Check
Figure 3-193. Removing the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder

3.4.9.9 Maintenance box 1 Holder

Clamps
CN202
9. Remove the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder. (p272)
10. Disconnect the FFC (CN202) from the SUB-B Board.
11. Release the FFC from the four clamps.
Waste Ink Tube
12. Disconnect the FFC from the hole of the main body frame. Hole
13. Disconnect the FFC from the ferrite core.
C A U T IO N Disconnecting the Waste Ink Tube in the next step may leak ink
from the tube. Therefore, prepare a waste cloth or the like in
advance and be careful not to contaminate the surroundings.
Ferrite core
14. Pull out the Waste Ink Tube from the main body. Figure 3-194. Disconnecting the FFC and the Tube

15. Remove the four screws that secure the Maintenance box 1 Holder.
16. Remove the Maintenance box 1 Holder while pulling out the FFC and the Waste
Ink Tube.
A
Maintenance box 1 Holder
Figure 3-195. Removing the Maintenance box 1 Holder

3.4.9.10 Ink Tubes

1. Discharge ink. (p397) Cable holders

7. Remove the upper front cover.
Hooks
(Step 6 to Step 10 in "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover" (P. 158)) Hooks
8. Unlock the carriage, and move the CR Unit to the left end. (p148) A
A
C A U T IO N Be sure to move the CR Unit to the left end before performing the A
Tube cover Cable holder
Figure 3-196. Removing the tube cover

10. Disconnect the Ink Tubes from the Ink Selector Assy. (Step 6 to Step 12 in
"3.4.9.1 Ink Selector Assy" (P. 262))
11. Remove the three screws that secure the tube cover.
12. Remove the tube cover.
13. Disengage the hooks, open the five cable holders, and release the Ink Tubes.

14. Remove the four screws that secure the Ink Tubes, and remove the Ink Tubes. A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform
R E Q U IR E D
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x10: four pieces specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Ink Tubes.
<Adjustment items>
2. Counter Reset (FFC, Ink Tubes and CR Pads Counter)
Ink Tubes
4. Nozzle Check
A 5. FFC Position Check
A A
Figure 3-197. Removing the Ink Tubes
0.39 0.05N/m
 Make sure to install the O-ring. The O-ring is not included in
Ink Tubes. Make sure to confirm there is no damage or no
foreign material attached on the sealing rubber or the joint
section visually then. Installing a damaged part such as
mentioned above may cause ink leakage.

3.4.9.11 Head FFC 16. Release the Head FFC from the cable guide provided inside the CR Unit.

2. Remove the Control Panel Cover. (p161) CN100
Cable guide
6. Remove the upper front cover.
(Step 6 to Step 10 in "3.4.2.2 Upper Front Cover" (P. 158))
SUB Board FFC holder
Head FFC

Hook
11. Remove the Ink Selector Assy from the CR Unit. (Step 6 to Step 11 in "3.4.9.1 Ink
Selector Assy" (P. 262))
12. Disconnect the Head FFC from the Printhead.
13. Disconnect the Head FFC (CN100) from the SUB Board. FFC holder
14. Remove the screw that secures the FFC holder.
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head P-tite M3x8: one piece
Figure 3-198. Disconnecting the Head FFC
15. Disengage the hook of the FFC holder to release the FFC holder, and remove the
FFC holder from the Head FFC.

17. Remove the three screws that secure the tube cover. 20. Disengage the hook that secures the FFC cover 1, and slide the FFC cover 1 to the
right to remove it.
B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x6: three pieces
18. Remove the tube cover. 21. Disengage the hook that secures the FFC cover 2, and slide the FFC cover 2 to the
right to remove it.
19. Release the Head FFC from the three cable holders.
22. Remove the FFC covers 1 and 2 from the Head FFC.
Cable holders Hooks
FFC cover 2
Head FFC
B
B
B FFC cover 1
Tube cover Cable holder
Figure 3-199. Removing the tube cover FFC cover
Head FFC
Figure 3-200. Removing the FFC covers

23. Release the Head FFC from the five clams, and pull it out from the hole of the
main frame.
24. Disconnect the Head FFC (CN100) from the Main Board.
Head FFC Clamps
CN100
Hole
Figure 3-201. Removing the Head FFC

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Head FFC.
<Adjustment items>
2. Nozzle Check

3.4.9.12 Right Holder FFC 9. Release the Right Holder FFC from the four clamps, and pull it out from the hole
of the main body frame.
10. Disconnect the Right Holder FFC (CN400) from the Main Board, and remove the
Right Holder FFC.
Clamps
7. Disconnect the Right Holder FFC from the Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder.
8. Release the Right Holder FFC from the clamp and the tape.
CN400
Right Holder FFC
Clamp
Hole Right Holder FFC
Figure 3-203. Removing the Right Holder FFC
Tape
Figure 3-202. Disconnecting the FFC

3.4.9.13 Left Holder FFC

3. Remove the Rear Cover. (p170) Clamp
4. Remove the Mid-Left Cover. (p176)

Left Holder FFC
6. Pull out the Board Tray. (Step 3 to Step 5 in "3.4.2.14 Board Tray" (P. 173)) Hole
7. Disconnect the FFC from the Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder.
Left Holder FFC
Clamp
Clamp Clamp
Hole
Hole
Main Board
CN500
Figure 3-204. Disconnecting the FFC

8. Release the Left Holder FFC from the four clamps, and pull it out from the three
holes of the main frame.
9. Disconnect the Left Holder FFC (CN500) from the Main Board, and remove the Figure 3-205. Disconnecting the Left Holder FFC
Left Holder FFC.

3.4.9.14 Decompression Pump

1. Remove the Front Cover. (p168) SUB-C Board
CN232
6. Disconnect the connector (CN232) from the SUB-C Board.
7. Release the harnesses from the three clamps and the saddle.
8. Pull out the tube from the Decompression Pump.
9. Remove the three screws that secure the Decompression Pump, and remove the
Decompression Pump.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing the Decompression Pump.
Decompression Pump Saddle
<Adjustment item>
Tube
Counter Reset (Decompression Pump Counter)
A A Connector
Clamp
Figure 3-206. Removing the Decompression Pump

3.4.10 Color Measurement Device and Backing

Replacement DC connector cable
3.4.10.1 Color Measurement Device

ILS DC cable
C A U T IO N  Do not touch the lens of the Color Measurement Device.
 When removing the Color Measurement Device, be careful not
to drop it.
1. Turn the printer OFF, and open the Front Cover (front side cover) of the Mounter.
2. Disconnect the ILS DC cable and ILS communication cable connected to the
Color Measurement Device.
Figure 3-208. Disconnecting the cable (ILS30EP)

3. Lift the Color Measurement Device slightly, and remove it.
ILS DC cable
Color Measurement Device

Front Cover
Figure 3-207. Disconnecting the cables (ILS20EP)
Figure 3-209. Removing the Color Measurement Device

3.4.10.2 Backing/White calibration tile holder

1. Remove the Mounter. (p156)
C A U T IO N When removing the Backing, be careful not to drop it.
2. Remove the Backing and the white calibration tile holder.
White calibration tile holder
Backing
Figure 3-210. Removing the Backing/white calibration tile holder

3.4.11 Housing 4. Open the Upper Cover in the direction of the arrow to release the five dowels, and
remove the Upper Cover.
3.4.11.1 Upper Cover
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) Dowel

3. Remove the three screws that secure the Upper Cover.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces
Upper Cover
Upper Cover

Dowels
Figure 3-212. Removing the Upper Cover

3.4.11.2 I/F Cover

1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288)
3. Open and remove the I/F Cover.
I/F Cover
Figure 3-213. Removing the I/F Cover

3.4.11.3 Right Cover

Right Cover
B
3. Remove the Upper Cover. (p290)
C H E C K In the next step, make sure to confirm which screw is attached to

P O IN T which location because various screws are used here.
4. Remove the three screws that secure the Right Cover.

B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece
A
C A U T IO N In the next step, make sure to slide the Right Cover straight to the
side since the guide of the Right Cover is easy to break.
A
5. Slide the Right Cover straight to the side to remove it.
Right Cover
Figure 3-214. Removing the Right Cover

3.4.11.4 Left Cover

3. Remove the Upper Cover. (p290) A
4. Remove the I/F Cover. (p291)

Left Cover
5. Remove the three screws that secure the Left Cover.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece B
6. While pulling out the USB cable, slide the Left Cover straight aside to remove it. USB cable
Figure 3-215. Removing the Left Cover

3.4.11.5 Front Cover 4. Bend the Front Cover in the middle, and release the hinges on both sides.
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) 5. Remove the Front Cover.

3. Open the Front Cover slightly, and disengage the joint on the center.
Hinge
Joint
Hinge
Front Cover
Front Cover
Hinge
Figure 3-216. Disengaging the joint

Figure 3-217. Removing the Front Cover

3.4.11.6 Magnet Latch C H E C K In the next step, make sure to confirm which screw is attached to
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) P O IN T which location because various screws are used here.

4. Remove the Right Cover. (p292) 8. Remove the six screws that secure the Housing, Front, Inner, SPM.
5. Remove the Front Cover. (p294) B) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: five pieces
6. Remove the screw that secures the Housing, Lower, SPM. C) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece
A) Silver, Phillips, Round Washer Head S-tite M3x8: one piece 9. Remove the Housing, Front, Inner, SPM.
7. While lowering the Housing, Lower, SPM, slide the Housing, Front, Outer, SPM
in the direction of the arrow to remove it. (Housing, Front, Outer, SPM is secured
with the four dowels.) Housing, Front, Inner, SPM
Magnet Latch
Housing, Lower, SPM
Housing, Front, Outer, SPM
B
C
Figure 3-219. Removing the Housing, Front, Inner, SPM

Housing, Lower, SPM
Dowels
Figure 3-218. Removing the Housing, Front, Outer, SPM

10. Release the two hooks, and remove the Magnet Latch.
Magnet Latch
Hooks
Figure 3-220. Removing the Magnet Latch

3.4.12 Color Measurement Device Parts C H E C K If the FFC prevents removing the plate, disconnect the FFC from
P O IN T the Main-C Board.
3.4.12.1 Main-C Board
9. Remove the plate.
6. Release the harness from the clamps on the plate.
Clamp
When removing the clamps from the plate in the next step, make Step 7
C A U T IO N
sure not to break them. A A
Clamp
7. Remove the clamps shown in the figure from the plate. B
Make sure to route the harness correctly as shown in Figure 3-221. C
Plate FFC
C H E C K In the next step, make sure to confirm which screw is attached to Figure 3-221. Removing the plate
8. Remove the five screws that secure the plate.

B) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x8 (bit: No.1): one piece
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M2.5x4 (bit: No.1): one piece

10. Disconnect all connectors and FFCs on the Main-C Board.
 One of the connectors is unused. See Figure 3-222. Main-C Board

 Make sure to connect all connectors and FFCs to the Main-C
Board before installing the plate. D D
D
 When installing the Main-C Board, be sure to refer to Chapter
5 “Appendix (see p451) and connect the connector correctly.
11. Remove the six screws that secure the Main-C Board, and remove the Main-C
Board.
D) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: six pieces
A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform D D D

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing the Main-C Board.
Unused
<Adjustment items>
1. NVRAM Backup
2. Spectroproofer Serial Number Check & Input
Figure 3-222. Removing the Main-C Board

3.4.12.2 Encoder for paper pressing motor

2. Remove the Mounter. (p156) Scale
3. Remove the Upper Cover. (p290) Encoder for paper pressing motor

6. Disconnect the connector from the encoder for paper pressing motor.
A
7. Remove the screw that secures the encoder for paper pressing motor.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M2.6x8 (bit: No.1): one piece
C A U T IO N When removing the encoder for paper pressing motor in the next Connector
step, slide it to the right. Be careful not to damage the scale.
Figure 3-223. Removing the encoder for paper pressing motor

8. Slide the Encoder for paper pressing motor in the direction of the arrow to remove
it.
When installing the encoder for paper pressing motor, set it

securely until it clicks.

3.4.12.3 Thermistor
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) Routing

6. Disconnect the connector (CN11) from the Main-C Board. CN11
Use tweezers or a similar tool to connect the connector (CN11).
Thermistor
Cable guide
7. Release the harness from the clamp, tape, and cable guide.
Make sure to route the harness correctly as shown in Figure 3-224.
Tape
C A U T IO N When removing the Thermistor in the next step, make sure to hold
it by both sides together.
Clamp
Figure 3-224. Removing the Thermistor
Thermistor A D J U S T M E N T Be sure to refer to Chapter 4 “Adjustment” (see p312) and perform

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing or removing the Thermistor.
<Adjustment item>
Spectroproofer Sensor Check
8. Remove the Thermistor.

3.4.12.4 Drying Fan When removing the Drying Fan in the next step, be careful not to
C A U T IO N
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) damage the Thermistor.

4. Remove the I/F Cover. (p291) 9. Remove the Drying Fan.
Thermistor
6. Disconnect the relay connector. Cable guide
7. Release the harness from the clamp and the cable guide.
C H E C K When removing the screws in the next step, use a screwdriver

P O IN T whose shaft is 3.5 cm or longer.
Clamps
Relay connector
8. Remove the four screws that secure the Drying Fan.

A) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M2.6x12 (bit: No.1): four pieces
Drying Fan
 When securing the Drying Fan with the screws, first insert the
screwdriver into the hole in front of the Drying Fan, and then
set the screw to the driver. A
Figure 3-225. Removing the Drying Fan
Make sure to route the harness correctly as shown in Figure 3-224.

R E Q U IR E D
 If it is difficult to secure the Drying Fan with the screws, remove specified adjustment after replacing or removing the Drying Fan.
the Rear Cover, and then secure with the screws. (Step 8 to Step 9 <Adjustment item>
in "3.4.12.8 CR Motor" (P. 308)) Spectroproofer Movement Check

3.4.12.5 Paper Pressing Motor 7. Disconnect the connector (CN18) from the Main-C Board.
1. Remove the Color Measurement Device. (p288) 8. Release the harness from the three clamps.
2. Remove the Mounter. (p156) Be sure to route the harness of the Paper Pressing Motor over the
3. Remove the Upper Cover. (p290) tape. See Figure 3-227.

6. Open the Front Cover, and move the carriage to the right.
Carriage
Main-C Board
Tape
CN18
Front Cover
Figure 3-226. Moving the carriage
Clamp

C A U T IO N When removing the screws in the next step, make sure not to touch When installing the Paper Pressing Motor, be careful of the
the carriage shaft since the grease is applied on the carriage shaft. installation direction referring to the figure below.
9. Remove the two screws that secure the Paper Pressing Motor.
A) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x4: two pieces
10. Remove the Paper Pressing Motor.
Red
Black

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the Paper
Pressing Motor.
<Adjustment items>
1. Counter Reset (Spectroproofer Paper Pressing Motor Counter)
2. Spectroproofer Movement Check
3. Spectroproofer Measurement Precision Check
A
Carriage shaft
Figure 3-228. Removing the Paper Pressing Motor

3.4.12.6 CR HP Sensor
Connector
Hooks
(Step 6 in "3.4.12.5 Paper Pressing Motor" (P. 302))
5. Disengage the hooks that secure the CR HP Sensor, and remove the CR HP
Sensor.
6. Disconnect the connector from the CR HP Sensor.
CR HP Sensor
Figure 3-229. Removing the CR HP Sensor

3.4.12.7 Backing Sensor

3. Remove the backing and the white calibration tile. (p289)
Main-C Board
5. Open the Front Cover, and move the carriage to the right. Clamp
6. Disconnect the connector (CN15) from the Main-C Board.
CN15
7. Release the harness from the clamp, and pull it out in the direction of the arrow.
Use tweezers or a similar tool to connect the connector (CN15).
Figure 3-230. Pulling out the harness

8. Remove the two screws that secure the tile guide. 9. Raise the Mounter so that the Rear Cover comes on the top.
C A U T IO N When removing the tile guide, take care in the following.
 Remove the tile guide after raising the Mounter so that the
parts attached to the tile guide do not come off.
 Since the harness is connected to the tile guide, make sure not
to pull it away too far from the main unit.
Tile guide
10. While lifting the paper pressing plate slightly, remove the tile guide.
Tile guide
Rear Cover
Paper pressing plate

Figure 3-232. Removing the tile guide

When installing the tile guide, align the dowels of the tile guide with
the positioning holes of the main unit. Tile guide
Backing Sensor
11. Release the harness, and disconnect the connector from the Backing Sensor.
C A U T IO N When removing the Backing Sensor from the tile guide in the next
step, be careful not to let any of the parts attached to the tile guide
come off. If any of them comes off, reattach it referring to Figure Routing
3-233.
Connector
12. Disengage the hook that secures the Backing Sensor, and remove the Backing
Sensor from the tile guide. Dowel
Hook
When installing the Backing Sensor, not to catch the harness of the
Backing Sensor, route the harness correctly as shown in Figure Figure 3-233. Removing the Backing Sensor
3-233.

R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustment after replacing or removing the Backing
Sensor.
<Adjustment item>
Spectroproofer Sensor Check

3.4.12.8 CR Motor
Rear Cover

A
B
Figure 3-234. Removing the Rear Cover

8. Remove the eight screws that secure the Rear Cover.
B) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: three pieces
9. Remove the Rear Cover.

10. Disconnect the connector (CN19) from the Main-C Board.

 When installing the CR Motor, be careful of the installation
11. Release the harness from the two clamps. direction referring to Figure 3-236. Make sure that the harness
is routed as shown in the figure.
12. Remove the screw that secures the fan duct.
 When the CR Motor is replaced with a new one, attach the tape
C) Silver, Phillips, Bind P-tite M3x8: one piece for protecting the harness from the frame to the same position
referring to Figure 3-236.
13. Remove the fan duct.
Fan duct
R E Q U IR E D
specified adjustments after replacing or removing the CR Motor.
<Adjustment items>
C 1. Counter Reset (Spectroproofer CR Motor Counter)
2. Spectroproofer Movement Check
CN19 3. Spectroproofer Measurement Precision Check (Epson Stylus
Pro 4900/4910 only)
Tape
Main-C Board
CR Motor
Clamp
D
Figure 3-235. Removing the fan duct
D) Silver, Phillips, Bind machine screw M3x6: two pieces
D
C A U T IO N In the next step, be careful not to damage the scale of the encoder
for paper pressing motor.
Scale
15. Remove the CR Motor.

Figure 3-236. Removing the CR Motor

3.4.12.9 EJ Planet Lever

5. Remove the Left Cover. (p293) Paper Drive Gear
6. Remove the Paper Drive Gear, retaining ring, spacer, compression spring, and the Gear
gear.
Paper Drive Gear

Retaining ring
Compression spring
Gear
Spacer
Figure 3-238. Removed parts
Retaining ring
Spacer
Compression spring
Figure 3-237. Removing the parts

7. While pressing the EJ Planet Lever, remove the torsion spring.

After installing the EJ Planet Lever, confirm the following before
8. Remove the EJ Planet Lever. attaching the gears, spring, etc.
 Align the guide pin on the EJ Planet Lever with the guide hole
on the frame.
 Attach the torsion spring back to the original position
correctly.
Torsion spring Torsion spring Guide hole
EJ Planet Lever
Figure 3-239. Removing the EJ Planet Lever
EJ Planet Lever

CHAPTER
4
ADJUSTMENT

4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the Service Program software utility and the adjustment
procedures required after repairing or replacing certain parts.
4.1.1 Precautions
Always observe the following cautions whenever making an adjustment on the printer.
C A U T IO N  Always refer to "4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by

Repaired Part" (p.314) and make sure to perform all the
adjustments listed in the table in the given order.
 Always read and follow the precautions given in each section
that explains each adjustment. Ignoring the precautions can
result in malfunction of the printer.
ADJUSTMENT Overview 313

4.1.2 Adjustment Items and the Order by Repaired Part

The following table shows the required adjustments by repaired or replaced part and the order in which the adjustments must be performed.
NOTE 1: The adjustments required for the Main Board differs depending on whether the NVRAM on the old board can be backed up or not.
C A U T IO N When writing the backed up NVRAM data to the Main Board, initializing of the printer is done at the same time. If you do not keep
the Adjustment items and the order of Table 4-1, wrong setting data are written on the Main Board and it might not be usable.
2: When the firmware update is required, first check the version of firmware currently installed on the printer, then update the firmware if necessary.
3: The meanings of abbreviations on the list are as follows.
SP=Service Program
RP=Replace
RM=Remove only
4: The adjustment item whose execution mode is indicated “Normal” can be adjusted in the Serviceman Mode. However, the panel operation in the Serviceman mode is
limited. The adjustment item whose execution mode is indicated “Serviceman Mode” cannot be adjusted in the Normal Mode or the Normal Mode is not
recommended.
Table 4-1. Adjustment items and the order by repaired part

Execution Use of
Class Part/Unit Adjustment Jig Media RP RM Page
Mode SP
1 Nozzle Check Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.374
AID Board
2 AID Function Check Normal  --- ---   p.427
1 Motor Measurement Adjustment Normal  --- ---  p.434
Power Supply Board Color Measurement
2 Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment Normal  Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper A4  p.382
Electric Circuit Device
Component FW update

1 Firmware Install  --- ---  p.347
Automatic
Control Panel reboot
Serviceman
2 Operation Panel Check (Buttons & LCD) --- --- ---   p.432
Mode


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Serviceman
1 NVRAM Backup (Read)  --- ---  p.339
Mode
FW update

Automatic
Electric Circuit Main Board reboot
Component (NVRAM Backup OK) Serviceman
3 NVRAM Backup (Write)  --- ---  p.339
Mode
Serviceman
4 RTC & USB ID Check & Adjustment  --- ---  p.425
Mode
Serviceman
5 MAC Address Check & Input  --- ---  p.429
Mode


Execution Use of
Mode SP
FW update

Automatic
reboot
Serviceman
2 Initial Ink Charge Flag  --- ---  p.355
Mode
Serviceman
3 Rear AD Adjustment --- Standard Sheet ---  p.412
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
5 Serial Number Check & Input  --- ---  p.426
Mode
Serviceman
6 Color Mode Settings  --- ---  p.433
Mode
Serviceman
7 Head ID Check & Input  --- ---  p.372
Mode
SC-P5000 Series 8 Motor Measurement Adjustment Normal  --- ---  p.434
Electric Circuit Main Board
9 Suction Check & Adjustment Normal  Adjustment device ---  p.423
Component (NVRAM Backup
NG) 10 Nozzle Check Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.374
Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper A4
12 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.370
(ASF Feed)
13 Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.413
(ASF Feed)
14 Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.416
(ASF Feed)
15 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.418
(ASF Feed)
16 Auto Bi-D Adjustment Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)  p.381
17 Cut Position Check & Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)  p.420
Serviceman
Mode
Color Measurement
Device


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Serviceman
1 Initial Ink Charge Flag  --- ---  p.355
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
4 Serial Number Check & Input  --- ---  p.426
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
FW update

Automatic
reboot
Epson Stylus Pro 4900/   p.423
8 Suction Check & Adjustment Normal Adjustment device ---
Electric Circuit 4910
Component Main Board 9 Nozzle Check Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.374
(NVRAM Backup NG) 10 AID Function Check Normal  --- ---   p.427
11 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.370
(ASF Feed)
12 Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.413
(ASF Feed)
13 Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.416
(Rear Manual Feed)
14 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment Normal  ---  p.418
(ASF Feed & Rear Manual Feed)
15 Auto Bi-D Adjustment Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)  p.381
16 Cut Position Check & Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)  p.420
Serviceman
Mode
Color Measurement
Device


Execution Use of
Mode SP
1 Counter reset after replacing the CR Motor Normal  --- ---  p.352
Sonic Tension Meter
2 CR Belt Adjustment Normal  ---   p.359
U-508
4 CR Speed Initialize Normal  --- ---  p.368
CR Motor
5 Active Damper Adjustment Normal  --- ---   p.369
7 Auto Bi-D Adjustment Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.381
8 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment Normal  ---   p.418
1 FFC Position Check Normal  --- ---   p.356
Sonic Tension Meter
U-508
Carriage PG adjustment jig
Mechanism 3 PG Height Check & Adjustment Normal  1.55 mm/1.65 mm/ ---   p.361
1.75 mm
CR Encoder 5 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.376
6 CR Encoder and Scale Check Normal  --- ---   p.367
8 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment Normal  ---   p.370
(ASF Feed)
Head FFC 2 Nozzle Check Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.374
3 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.376


Execution Use of
Mode SP
CR Scale
Sonic Tension Meter
U-508
PG adjustment jig
3 PG Height Check & Adjustment Normal  1.55 mm/1.65 mm/ ---   p.361
1.75 mm
Carriage
Mechanism 5 CR Encoder and Scale Check Normal  --- ---   p.367
CR Unit
(ASF Feed)


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Sonic Tension Meter
U-508
PG adjustment jig
1.75 mm
CR Belt/ 5 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.376
Carriage Ink Mark Sensor
Mechanism
(ASF Feed)
1 Counter reset after replacing the APG Motor Normal  --- ---  p.352
APG Motor Assy
2 APG Check Normal  --- ---   p.366
1 Counter reset after replacing the PF Motor Normal  --- ---  p.352
Sonic Tension Meter
PF Motor 2 PF Belt Adjustment Normal  ---   p.406
U-508
PF Encoder/PF Scale 1 PF Encoder and Scale Check Normal  --- ---   p.408
Sonic Tension Meter
PF Belt 1 PF Belt Adjustment Normal  ---   p.406
U-508
Paper Feed
Counter reset after replacing the Edge Release
Mechanism Edge Release Assy 1 Normal  --- ---  p.352
Assy
ATC Motor Assy 1 ATC Motor Assy Normal  --- ---  p.352
Paper thickness
sensor adjustment jig
Serviceman (0.4/0.8 for Epson
Paper Thickness Sensor 1 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment --- ---   p.409
Mode Stylus Pro 4400, 0.5
for Epson Stylus Pro
7400)


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Suction Fan 1 Suction Check & Adjustment Normal  Adjustment device ---  p.423
Serviceman
1 Sensor Check (PE Sensor) --- --- ---  p.435
Mode
PE Sensor
Serviceman
Mode
Sonic Tension Meter
U-508
PG adjustment jig
Paper Feed
1.75 mm
Mechanism
PW Sensor 5 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.376
(ASF Feed)
Roll Feeding Motor Counter reset after replacing the Roll Feeding
ROLL Unit 1 Normal  --- ---  p.352
Assy Motor Assy
Retard Roller 1 Counter reset after replacing the Retard Roller Normal  --- ---  p.352
Pickup Roller 1 Counter reset after replacing the Pickup Roller Normal  --- ---  p.352
ASF Unit
ASF Motor Assy 1 Counter reset after replacing the ASF Motor Normal  --- ---  p.352
ASF Sub Motor Assy 1 Counter reset after replacing the ASF Sub Motor Normal  --- ---  p.352


Execution Use of
Mode SP
1 Counter reset after replacing the Print Head Normal  --- ---  p.352
Normal
Mode 
Turn the
power OFF
3 PG Height Check & Adjustment Normal --- --- ---   p.361
4 Cleaning Normal  --- ---   p.375
Printhead 5 Nozzle Check Normal  --- Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.374
8 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment Normal  --- ---   p.418
Color Measurement
Device
Ink System
Counter reset after replacing the Decompression
Mechanism Decompression Pump 1 Normal  --- ---  p.352
Pump
1 Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange Normal  --- ---  p.395
Wiper (Cleaning)
2 Counter reset after cleaning the Wiper Normal  --- --- - p.352
Wiper
2 Counter reset after replacing the Wiper Normal  --- ---  p.352
Wiper Cleaner
2 Counter reset after replacing the Wiper Cleaner Normal  --- ---  p.352
Head Cap
2 Counter reset after replacing the Head Cap Normal  --- ---  p.352
1 Counter reset after replacing the Ink System Normal  --- ---  p.352
Ink System Unit


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Serviceman
1 Ink Eject and Initial Charge  --- ---   p.397
Mode
Serviceman
2 Counter reset after replacing the Ink Selector  --- ---  p.352
Mode
Serviceman
3 Ink Selector Movement Check  --- ---  p.399
Ink Selector Assy Mode
Serviceman
4 Leak Check (visually) --- --- ---   p.404
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Counter reset after replacing Full (Left) Side Serviceman
2  --- ---  p.352
Cartridge Holder Mode
Serviceman
Ink System 3 ILS & CSIC Check  --- ---   p.400
Left Cartridge Holder Mode
Mechanism
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Counter reset after replacing Home (Right) Side Serviceman
2  --- ---  p.352
Cartridge Holder Mode
Serviceman
3 ILS & CSIC Check  --- ---   p.400
Right Cartridge Holder Mode
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
Mode


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Serviceman
Mode
Serviceman
2 Counter reset after replacing the Ink Tube  --- ---  p.352
Mode
Ink System
Ink Tube Serviceman
Mechanism 3 Leak Check (visually) --- --- ---   p.404
Mode
Serviceman
Mode
1 Counter reset after replacing the Cutter Unit Normal  --- ---  p.352
Serviceman
Cutter Motor 2 Sensor Check (Cutter HP Sensor)  --- ---   p.435
Mode
3 Cut Position Check & Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.420
Serviceman
1 Counter reset after replacing the Cutter Unit  --- ---  p.352
Cutter Unit Mode
Sonic Tension Meter
2 Cutter Belt Tension Check Normal --- ---  p.421
Cutter Unit U-508
Serviceman
3 Sensor Check (Cutter HP Sensor)  --- ---   p.435
Mode
4 Cut Position Check & Adjustment Normal  Calibrated loupe Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)   p.420
Network
1 USB Port and Network Communication Check  --- --- p.430
connection
Other parts Serviceman
related Other parts Mode 
2 Sensor Check  --- --- p.435
adjustment Normal
Mode
3 Encoder Check Normal --- --- --- p.440


Execution Use of
Mode SP
Serviceman
SpectroProofer Sensor 1 Spectroproofer Sensor Check  --- ---   p.442
Mode
SpectroProofer Drying Serviceman
1 Spectroproofer Movement Check  --- ---   p.444
Fan Mode
Counter reset after replacing the SpectroProofer
1 Normal  --- ---  p.352
CR Motor
SpectroProofer Serviceman
CR Motor Mode
Spectroproofer Measurement Precision Check
3 Normal  --- ---   p.446
SpectroProofer (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 only)
Counter reset after replacing the SpectroProofer
1 Normal  --- ---  p.444
SpectroProofer Serviceman
Paper Pressing Motor Mode
Spectroproofer Measurement Precision Check Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
3 Normal  ---   p.446
(Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 only)
Serviceman
Main-C Board 1 NVRAM Backup  --- ---  p.339
Mode
(NVRAM Backup OK)
2 Spectroproofer Serial Number Check & Input Normal  --- ---  p.448

4.1.3 Description of Adjustments

The following table describes the general outline of the adjustments.
Note : The meanings of abbreviations in the “Tool” column are as follows.
SP = Service Program
SM = Serviceman Mode
MECH = Mechanical Adjustment can be performed. (In some cases, a dedicated tool for the adjustment or a commercially available tool such as a tension gauge is necessary.)
Tool
Class Adjustment Items General Overview Symptom Page
SP SM MECH
By the carriage operation, the Head FFC, Ink
Tube, and clamps may contact each other and
the parts are damaged.
 Head FFC is routed too slackly:
Check visually that the Ink Tube and the Head FFC are
The Head FFC may contact to the Ink Tube
routed properly so that they do not contact each other and
1 FFC Position Check and the Ink Tube is damaged. --- ---  p.356
the clamps are secured at the correct positions between the
 Head FFC is routed too tightly:
CR Unit and the joint section of the tube.
The Head FFC may be caught in the clamp
and the top or the bottom edge of the FFC is
damaged. (In this case, a Service Call of head
system such as Thermistor Error occurs.)
When the tension is out of the standard value,
the following symptoms may occur.
 Belt tension is high:
1 CR Related
 The life of the belt will be shortened.
 The load gets higher, and the CR
operation gets Wait control by the
heating control.
Give a specified tension to the CR timing belt. Measure the
tension using the Sonic Tension Meter to check if it is  If the tension is too high, the shaft of the
2 CR Belt Adjustment motor leans and the brush in the motor is  ---  p.359
within the standard value. If it is not within the standard
value, adjust the tension. worn. This will cause the CR overload
error (SC113A).
 Belt tension is low:
 Slipping of the teeth of the belt occurs
and the Carriage swings. The correction
by the active damper does not work and
the bands (vertical bands) occur near the
side edges of paper.

Tool
SP SM MECH
 When the PG heights on the right and left of
the Head are out of the standard value, the
following symptoms may occur.
 Gap is too wide:
Unstable ink droplet paths or misaligned
dots occur, and it causes low printing
quality such as banding, printing
misalignment, or grainy image.
Check if the platen gaps (distance between the Carriage
 Gap is too narrow:
Unit and the platen) are within the standard value on the
The head rubs paper.
PG Height Check & right and left side of the Carriage Unit using the thickness
3  Height gap between the right and left is --- ---  p.361
Adjustment gauge. Check the two points on the platen; Home side and
Full side. If they are not within the standard value, adjust wide:
the height. The nozzle side tilts and the printing
misalignment occurs on Bi-D Printing.
 When the PG height gap between Home side
and Full side is out of the standard, the same
symptom mentioned above may occur.
1 CR Related However, it may also be because of the
adjustment failure of the platen height or the
abnormality of the CR shaft. If so, it cannot
be handled by the service on-site.
Rotate the APG motor using the Service Program, switch When the PG is not switched properly
4 APG Check the PG, and check that the set position of the PG returns to responding to the print setting, low image  --- --- p.366
the home position (“--” (PG0.8 mm)) correctly. quality or CL operation abnormality may occur.
Confirm that the CR Scale does not have any abnormality
CR Encoder and Scale When the CR Scale is not read properly and the
5 such as damage or dirt and the encoder can read properly  --- --- p.367
Check CR does not operate, an error occurs.
using the Service Program.
Reset the carriage speed control value to the default using
the Service Program. If the speed control is not reset to the default, the
The speed of the CR is controlled automatically to keep the speed setting (setting to reduce the speed) which
6 CR Speed Initialize printing stability when the variation of the CR speed gets has been controlled based on the dirty part  --- --- p.368
larger because of the dirt on the scale or time degradation. before the replacement is applied to the new part
When the carriage related part is replaced, be sure to reset and the printing speed is kept being slow.
the speed control to the default value.

Tool
SP SM MECH
Execute the calibration of the active damper from the
Service Program.
Active Damper * Active damper is a function to reduce the carriage The motor vibration/carriage vibration may not
7  --- --- p.369
Adjustment vibration which causes the vertical bands by outputting the be reduced, and the vertical bands occur.
waveform which has opposite phase from the motor
vibration.
Select and execute the following menu from the Service
Program.
1 CR Related
1. Check if the Ink Mark Sensor has any trouble/
connection failure.
Ink Mark Sensor Check 2. Execute IMS Position Auto Correction (pattern If the IMS does not work properly, Auto Bi-D
8  --- --- p.370
& Adjustment detecting position correction). Correct the detecting Adjustment cannot be executed normally.
position of the print pattern in the sub scan direction
and the main scan direction.
3. Execute the automatic nozzle check to check if the Ink
Mark Sensor detects the nozzle clogging properly.
If the new ID is not registered after replacing the
head, the head ID of the older head is used and
the proper drive voltage cannot be set. The
Register the head rank ID to the printer using the Service following symptoms may occur.
Program and check the currently registered value. Head
 Since the amount of ink droplets is not
1 Head ID Check & Input rank ID is the ID to drive the Printhead with the proper  --- --- p.372
proper, the color and density abnormalities
voltage and correct the amount of ink droplets. The ID is
are found on the result.
assigned to each head and listed on the label on the head.
 Since the amount of ink droplets turns to be
unstable, dot missing or misaligned dots
2 Head Related occur while printing or flushing.
When the Nozzle Check is not executed and the
nozzle is clogging, the following symptoms may
occur.
Print the pattern on which the nozzle discharging condition  The adjustment pattern is not printed properly
2 Nozzle Check ---  --- p.374
can be checked from the Service Program. and it causes a trouble for the automatic and
visual check/adjustment.
 In the automatic adjustment, it causes failure/
error.

Tool
SP SM MECH
When the cleaning is not executed, the following
symptoms may occur.
 Nozzle clogging is not solved and the
printing cannot be executed properly.
Specify the power and the color from the Service Program
3 Cleaning  Ink does not come out and the printing cannot  --- --- p.375
and execute the head cleaning.
be executed after replacing to a new
Printhead. (Executing Initial Charge may
solve this problem but it takes time and
consumes lots of ink.)
 If CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment is not
executed, the printing position is misaligned
on the whole rows of the Printhead, and it
Print the pattern on which the tilt of the Printhead in CR may cause low printing quality such as
and PF directions can be checked from the Service grainy image, banding, and unevenness.
CR & PF Direction Program, and check the misalignment level visually.  If the PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment is
4 --- ---  p.376
Head Slant Adjustment When the misalignment symptom is observed, turn the not executed, flow curve or difference of
adjustment dial (in CR direction) and the adjustment lever spotted ink locations occurs since the
(in PF direction) of the carriage to correct the tilt. distances from paper differ between the front
2 Head Related
side and the rear side of the Printhead. It may
cause low printing quality such as grainy
image, banding, and unevenness.
If Auto Bi-D Adjustment is not executed, the
difference of spotted ink locations may occur,
Reduces the difference of spotted ink locations on Bi-D
5 Auto Bi-D Adjustment and it causes low printing quality such as  --- --- p.381
printing (bi-directional printing).
printing misalignment, grainy image, and
banding.
Adjust the amount of ink droplets responding to the
characteristics of the Printhead and the electrical
characteristics (dependent to the Main Board and the
Power Supply Board) which differ depending on the If Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment is not
printer. Use the dedicated software and the Color executed, the ink droplets amount changes when
Colorimetric
6 replacing the Printhead, Main Board, or Power  --- --- p.382
Calibration Adjustment Measurement Device for this adjustment.
Supply Board, and it causes a variability of color
Measure the print pattern with the Color Measurement
on the printed result depending on the printer.
Device, create the correction value from the result, and
then write the value to the NVRAM. The printer reads the
correction value to correct the amount of ink droplets.

Tool
SP SM MECH
Move the parts to the maintenance position to maintain the If the part is not moved to the correct position
Wiper and Cap
1 Ink System (Wiper and Cap). Execute from the Service for replacing the part, the part may not be  ---  p.395
Cleaning & Exchange
Program. removed or the part may get damaged.
Check the free space of the maintenance tank from the
Service Program.
Maintenance Box
2 Check if the maintenance tank has enough free space when ---  --- --- p.396
Remaining Space
ejecting ink and cleaning. (When the maintenance tank
Check
does not have enough free space, it stops with the message
displayed before starting the ejection/cleaning.)
 Ink Eject:
Eject ink in the Ink Flow Path not to spill the ink when
 If the Ink Tube, Ink Selector, and Ink Holder
removing the Ink Tube, Ink Selector, and Ink Holder.
are replaced without ejecting ink, ink in the
Execute from the Service Program.
Ink Eject and Initial tube spills and spoils around the printer.
3  Initial Charge:  --- --- p.397
Charge  If the Initial Charge is not executed after
Charge ink in the Ink Flow Path. Execute from the
ejecting ink, dot missing is caused by the air
Service Program.
bubbles left in the tube.
* You can select whether to execute Eject/Charge to both
Ink Supply Home and Full side holders or one of them.
3
Related Be sure to execute the check before charging
Check if the Ink Selector (mechanism to switch Photo
Ink Selector Movement ink. If the operation abnormality is found after
4 Black and Matte Black) operates correctly. Execute from  --- --- p.399
Check charging ink, the ink has to be discharged. It
the Service Program before charging ink.
wastes time and ink.
Check the following functions from the Service Program. Be sure to execute the check right after replacing
1. The ILS (Ink Level Sensor) can detect the ink out the part (Ink Holder/Maintenance Box CSIC
Sensor). If the part faulty is found later on, it
5 ILS & CSIC Check properly.  --- --- p.400
takes time to find the cause. Especially since the
2. Reading/writing the CSIC can be executed properly.
Ink Holder needs to eject ink, it wastes time and
These menus are selectable. ink.
Clean the Ink Flow Path to resolve the solidified ink in the If the printer is stored for a long time without
Ink Flow Path and the nozzle clogging of the Printhead. It cleaning the tube after ejecting ink, the ink left
6 Tubes Cleaning prevents ink in the Ink Flow Path from being solidified in the Ink Flow Path may be solidified. Once the  --- --- p.402
when storing the printer for a long time. Use the Cleaning ink is solidified, the ink may not be charged or
Cartridge for service and the Service Program. dot missing may occur.
If the check is not executed, the ink leak from
Execute the check to prevent the ink leak when installing
7 Leak Check (visually) the joint of the ink tube cannot be prevented --- ---  p.404
the ink tube.
before it happens.

Tool
SP SM MECH
Ink Supply Carries out ink change in Row G (between Light Light
3 8 LLK/V Ink Change ---  --- --- p.405
Related Black and Violet). (SC-P5000 Series only)
 The life of the belt will be shortened.
 The load gets higher, and the PF
Give a specified tension to the PF timing belt. Measure the
heating control.
tension using the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 to check if it
1 PF Belt Adjustment  If the tension is too high, the shaft of the  ---  p.406
is within the standard value. If it is not within the standard
value, adjust the tension. motor leans and the brush in the motor is
worn. This will cause the CR overload
error (SC112A).
and paper feeding cannot be executed
correctly.
Confirm that the PF Scale does not have any abnormality
PF Encoder and Scale The PF Scale cannot be read correctly, the paper
2 such as damage or dirt and the encoder can read properly  --- --- p.408
Media Feed Check feeding does not operate, and an error occurs.
4 using the Service Program.
Related
If the adjustment is not executed, the paper
thickness is not detected properly. As the result,
the PG is not set correctly responding to the
thickness of paper which is actually inserted in
Adjust the sensor installation position so that the Paper the printer.
Paper Thickness Sensor Thickness Sensor can detect the paper thickness
3  PG gets wider: ---   p.409
Position Adjustment accurately. Execute this adjustment with the paper
Low print quality caused by such as the
thickness adjustment jig.
difference of spotted ink locations and flow
curve
 PG gets narrower:
Head rubbing
Adjust the detection sensitivity of the Rear Sensor so that it
can recognize the paper inserted in the printer correctly.
If the adjustment is not executed, paper
Let the sensor detect the translucent media which is hard to
recognition failures may occur (e.g. paper empty
4 Rear AD Adjustment recognize to check the result on the Control Panel. (By ---  --- p.412
error occurs even with paper inserted, some
using the media which is hard to recognize, paper can be
media are not recognized).
recognized regardless of the environmental condition or
the media)

Tool
SP SM MECH
Adjust the paper feeding amount by the outer diameter size
of the drive roller and the paper sliding amount which
differ depending on the printer.
If the adjustment is not executed, the paper
Media Feed Correction Feed A4 Matte Paper from the ASF and print out the feeding accuracy lowers and printing troubles
5 adjustment pattern using the Service Program. Check the  --- --- p.413
Check & Adjustment such as banding or misalignment of the printing
adjustment pattern and decide the standard value from the
position may occur.
result. In the case of the media other than A4 Matte Paper,
the feeding amount is corrected based on this standard
value.
Adjust the paper feeding amount at printing on the bottom
of paper by the outer diameter size of the eject roller and
the paper sliding amount which differ depending on the
printer. If the adjustment is not executed, the paper
Media Eject Correction Feed A4 Matt Paper from the ASF and print out the feeding accuracy of the bottom of paper lowers
6  --- --- p.416
Check & Adjustment adjustment pattern using the Service Program. Check the and printing troubles such as banding or
adjustment pattern and decide the standard value from the misalignment of the printing position may occur.
result. In the case of the media other than A4 Matt Paper,
the feeding amount is corrected based on this standard
Media Feed
4 value.
Related
 PW:
Check if the PW Sensor can detect the paper edge
correctly. Feed A4 Matte Paper from the ASF and
execute the detecting operation using the Service
If the adjustment is not executed, the width or
Program.
the length of paper is not detected properly. As a
PW + T&B&S Check  T&B&S:
7 result, the margins may not be left properly or  --- --- p.418
& Adjustment Adjust the print start position of the top edge, right/left
the image may not be printed fully because of
edges and bottom edge on paper. Feed A4 Matte Paper
the misalignment of the printing position.
from the ASF and print out the adjustment pattern using
the Service Program. Measure the adjustment pattern
and input the result to adjust the print start position
automatically.
Adjust the cut position so that the auto cutter can cut paper
at the correct position.
Cut Position Check & Feed Roll Paper, print the adjustment pattern, and cut the If the adjustment is not executed, the cut
8  --- --- p.420
Adjustment paper using the Service Program. Measure the distance position may be misaligned.
from the bottom of paper to the printed pattern and input
the result to adjust the cut position.

Tool
SP SM MECH
 The load gets higher, and the cutting
speed gets slower.
 The load gets higher, and the cutter
Give a specified tension to the cutter timing belt. Measure
Cutter Belt Tension the tension using the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 to check
9 heating control. --- ---  p.421
Check if it is within the standard value. If it is not within the
standard value, adjust the tension.  If the tension is too high, the shaft of the
motor leans and the brush in the motor is
Media Feed worn. This will cause the CR overload
4
Related error (SC154A).
and it disables cutting paper.
Operate the Suction Fan using the Service Program to
measure the air pressure simply. If it is not within the
standard value, adjust the air pressure. If the adjustment is not executed, the troubles
Suction Check &
10 (Close all suction holes on the platen except one, and such as wrinkles/waves/paper jam/head rubbing  ---  p.423
Adjustment
measure the pressure using the simple water level may be caused by the improper paper feeding.
measurement device. Execute this adjustment to correct
the variation of the performance of the Suction Fan.)

Tool
SP SM MECH
Check the current setting of the RTC and the USB ID If the adjustment is not executed, a maintenance
RTC & USB ID Check
1 using the Service Program. Write the correct information error (RTC setting error) or USB recognition  --- --- p.425
& Adjustment
as needed. error occurs.
If the serial number is not input or the wrong
Serial Number Check Check the current setting of the serial number using the
2 number is set, it makes service management  --- --- p.426
& Input Service Program. Write the correct information as needed.
(such as the print/NVRAM) harder.
If the check is not executed, the dot missing
detection by AID may not be executed properly
Check if the AID function operates properly using the and the increase of cleaning consumes the ink.
3 AID Function Check  --- --- p.427
Service Program. Or, the cleaning may not be executed even with
5 Boards Related the occurrence of dot missing and it causes
lower printing quality.
MAC Address Check Check the current setting of the MAC address using the If the address is not input or the wrong address is
4  --- --- p.429
& Input Service Program. Write the correct information as needed. set, a network connection trouble occurs.
USB Port and Network Check the USB connection and network connection of the
5 ---  --- --- p.430
Communication Check printer using the Service Program.
Reset the panel setting from the Control Panel, and reset
6 Default Reset ---  --- --- p.431
the user job history from the Service Program.
Operation Panel Check Check if buttons on the Control Panel and the LCD If the check is not executed, the normal
7 ---  --- p.432
(Buttons & LCD) function correctly. operation is not guaranteed.

Tool
SP SM MECH
If the adjustment is not executed, the following
For the CR Motor, PF Motor, and ink system unit motor, symptoms may occur since the heating value
operation adjustments considering the heating value such considering the characteristic of each motor
as stopping the operation when the heating value reaches cannot be estimated.
the specified level are executed. The heating value is  Wrong estimation that the temperature of the
estimated from the power source characteristic that the motor (which actually does not have a
Motor Measurement
1 motor has. The power source characteristics vary among problem) is high takes a break unnecessarily  --- --- p.434
Adjustment
motors and the power supply units of the printers due to during printing.
6 Others their individual difference. Therefore, the operation  Wrong estimation that the temperature of the
adjustment can be executed correctly by measuring the motor (which is actually in the high
characteristic of each motor using the Service Program and temperature condition) is low brings the
storing the characteristic in the Main Board. printer into an operation in an unsafe state.
(which may cause trouble.)
Check if each sensor functions correctly. Use the Service
2 Sensor Check ---  --- --- p.435
Program to check.
Check if each Encoder functions correctly. Use the Service
3 Encoder Check ---  --- --- p.440
Program to check.
Spectroproofer Sensor Check if the sensor of the SpectroProofer functions
1 ---  --- --- p.442
Check correctly. Use the Service Program to check.
Spectroproofer Check if the motor of the SpectroProofer functions If the check is not executed, the normal
2  --- --- p.444
Movement Check correctly. Use the Service Program to check. operation is not guaranteed.
Spectroproofer
If the check is not executed, the cause of the
7 SpectroProofer Measurement Precision Check if the Color Measurement Device measures color
trouble for measuring color is hard to find.
3 Check correctly. Print out the check patterns using the Service  --- --- p.446
(Unable to judge whether the trouble is caused
(Epson Stylus Pro Program and measure the color of the pattern.
by the software or the hardware.)
4900/4910 only)
Check the current setting of the serial number of the Color If the serial number is not input or the wrong
Spectroproofer Serial
4 Measurement Device using the Service Program. Write the number is set, it makes the service management  --- --- p.448
Number Check & Input
correct information as needed. (such as NVRAM) harder.

4.1.4 Tools/Consumables for Adjustments

The tables below show the tools required for adjusting this printer.
 Hardware Tools
Table 4-2. Hardware tools
Tool Name Part Number Target Adjustment Remarks
 CR Belt Adjustment
Sonic Tension Meter U-508 1640645  PF Belt Adjustment ---
 Cutter Belt Tension Check
P-Thick Sensor Position Jig 1424364 Use 0.5 mm tool of Epson Stylus Pro 7400.
Paper Thickness Position Tool 1282355 Use 0.4 mm and 0.8 mm tools of Epson Stylus Pro 4400.
PG Height Adjustment Jig 1.55 1543007
PG Height Adjustment Jig 1.65 1507506  PG Height Check & Adjustment ---
PG Height Adjustment Jig 1.75 1507277
Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S) 1476228  Rear AD Adjustment ---
 Tubes Cleaning
Cleaning Cartridge 1537913 ---
 LLK/V Ink Change (SC-P5000 Series)
Create with
Tube + Mounting Plate commercially  Suction Check & Adjustment Create the measurement device with the commercially available items. (see p423)
available items
Commercially  CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment
Calibrated Loupe ---
available  Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Commercially  PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment
Ruler (about 10 cm) To measures each type of patterns. 10 cm is enough to measure the patterns.
available  Cut Position Check & Adjustment
Color Measurement Device ---  Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment See p.382.
C A U T IO N Bring back the following brought and used items, then dispose of
them based on the local regulation in your country, please.
 Ink cartridges
 Cleaning cartridges
 Draining cartridges
Especially in case of ink cartridges in Europe, please refer to the

following web site to confirm the regulation in detail.
ECO Info: http://www.epson.eu/weee (available from July 2015)

 Software Tools
Table 4-3. Software tools

Software Name Part Number Target Adjustment Remarks
Service Program for SC-P5000 Series/Epson
Supplies Overall adjustment items Be sure to use the latest version of the Service Program.
Stylus Pro 4900/4910
Latest version of driver for SC-P5000 Mass-produced
--- Essential for using the Service Program
Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 version
High-precision ID adjustment tool Supplies Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment Supplied separately from the Service Program
Latest version of firmware for SC-P5000 Mass-produced
--- ---
Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 version
 Consumables
Table 4-4. Consumables

Consumable Name Part Number Target Adjustment/Inspection Remarks
Overall adjustment items (For more
Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) Mass-produced
details, see 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and ---
16-inch Roll Paper product
the Order by Repaired Part)
Overall adjustment items (For more
Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper A4 Mass-produced
details, see 4.1.2 Adjustment Items and ---
(Cut-sheet) product
the Order by Repaired Part)
Mass-produced
Ink Cartridge --- ---
product
Mass-produced
Maintenance Box --- ---
product
Mass-produced
SpectroProofer Checker SpectroProofer ---
product

4.1.5 Service Program Basic Operations

This section describes the basic operations of the Service Program.
C A U T IO N Save the Service Program on the desktop or directly under the C

drive. If the storage location is deep in the hierarchy, some
program tools may not work correctly.
 System Requirements
 OS: Windows XP, Vista, 7, 8, 8.1, 10 (SC-P5000 Series)
Windows XP, Vista, 7 (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910)
 Interface: USB, Network
 Startup
1. When double-clicking the “ServProg.exe”, the screen asking if you want to
carry out the NV-RAM BACKUP appears.
2. If Yes is selected, the NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY will start up; If No is
selected, the Service Program Menu screen will appear.
3. For Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910, select the printer you want to adjust from
Model, and start the adjustment.
Figure 4-1. Service Program

4.2 NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY/NVRAM Viewer 4.2.2 NVRAM Write Procedure

Parameters stored in the NVRAM on the Main Board are read/stored and written onto
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK].
the other NVRAM on the Main Board using this menu.
Also, the exported parameter information is displayed on the computer screen. 2. Remove all the ink cartridges and maintenance tank(s).
3. Start the Service Program and select NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY from the
4.2.1 NVRAM Read Procedure main menu.
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. 4. For Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910, select the printer you want to adjust from Model.
5. Select Printer NVRAM or SpectroProofer EEPROM.
2. For Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910, select the printer you want to adjust from Model.
6. Click [Open File] on [NVRAM Write].
3. Select which NVRAM (printer or Color Measurement Device) to be read.
7. Select the NVRAM file to write on the printer.
4. Click [Get Information] on “NVRAM Read” to start reading the parameters.
8. Click [Write File] to start writing the parameters.
5. Check the NVRAM information on site:
9. When the writing is completed, exit out of the NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY.
Click [Display Info] to display another screen of the NVRAM Viewer.
Store the NVRAM information: 10. Turn the printer OFF.
Click [Save]. The file is named as “serial number + acquisition date”
automatically.
Figure 4-2. [NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY] Screen
ADJUSTMENT NV-RAM BACKUP UTILITY/NVRAM Viewer 339

4.2.3 NVRAM Viewer Basic Operation DESCRIPTION

The following functions are provided.  Life Parts Operation History
1. Displays the Life Parts Operation History
2. Displays the history how the printer has been used (Utilization History)
3. Displays the Error History saved in the NVRAM 9
PROCEDURE
1. Click [Display Info] from “NVRAM Read” list of the NV-RAM BACKUP
UTILITY. Another screen of the NVRAM Viewer will be displayed.
2. Select the tab of screen information to switch the screen.
3. Click [Save as CSV] to save the information shown in the selected tab as CSV
file. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
4. Click [Print] to print the information shown in the selected tab.

5. Click [Close] to close the screen.
Figure 4-3. [Life Parts Operation History] Screen

1 Items ---  Utilization History

2 Current Value Displays the current life counter value of each part.
3 Limit Displays the life limit of the part if it has.
Displays the percentage of Current Value (2) considering the Limit
4 Situation
(3) as 100%.
End of life (actual or
estimated) Displays the date when the service life has expired or will expire.
5 (YY/MM/DD)*1
End of Life Estimation
Displays the date when the service life will expire.
(YY/MM/DD)*2
6 Reset History 1 Displays the counter at replacement of the part last time
7 Reset History 2 Displays the counter at replacement of the part two times before.
8 Reset History 3 Displays the counter at replacement of the part three times before.
Display the serial number of the current printer from which the
9 Serial Number
NVRAM was acquired.
Note "*1": Displayed in SC-P5000 Series.

1 2 3 4 5
"*2": Displayed in Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
Figure 4-4. [Utilization History] Screen
1 Utilization History Item ---

Utilization History
2 Displays the current value per item.
Current Value
Displays EPSON Genuine Ink and Non-Genuine Ink per slot
3 Total Ink Used Items
(color).
Total Ink Used Current
4 Displays ink amount consumed in mg units.
Value*
Total Ink Used Displays the ink consumption as the number of cartridges for
5
Cartridges 200ml.
Note "*": Displayed in Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.

 Error History INFORMATION SAVED TO CSV FILES
 Life Parts Operation History

Note "*1": Displayed in Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
"*2": Displayed in SC-P5000 Series.
Table 4-5. Life Parts Operation History

1 2 4 5
Items Contents
Serial Number Same as the left
Data Acquisition Date Same as the left
Firm Update History
CR Movements (Total Carriage Single Passes)
CR Motor (Carriage Single Passes)
FFC, Ink Tubes and CR Pads (CR Single Passes)
3 6
APG Motor (PG Change Times)
Media Feed (Total Distance Fed)
PF Motor (Distance Fed)
Life Parts Operation History Release Motor (Release Movement Times)
7
(The following items are displayed
Figure 4-5. [Error History] Screen ASF Motor (Turns)
according to the items on the right.)
 Current Value ASF Sub Motor (Turns)
Service Calls Errors Displays the types of the last six normal errors saved in the
1  Limit Retard Roller (Movements Times)
History Type NVRAM.
 Situation Pickup Roller (ASF Sheets Fed)
Service Calls Errors  End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/
2 Displays the time stamps of the last six normal errors.
History Time Stamp Edge Release (Turns)
DD)
3 Normal Errors List Displays the list of the cause of all the normal errors.  Reset History 1 Cutter Motor (Cut Times)
Displays the types of the last six service calls saved in the  Reset History 2 ATC Motor (Turns)
Service Calls Errors  Reset History 3
4 NVRAM. Last ten calls for SC-P5000 Series, and last six for Roll Feeding Motor (Turns)
History Type
Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
Roll Release Motor (Release Movement Times)
Displays the time stamps of the last six service calls. Last ten
Service Calls Errors Ink Selector (Selection Change Times)
5 stamps for SC-P5000 Series, and last six for Epson Stylus Pro
History Time Stamp
4900/4910. IS (Pump Motor 0.1 Turns)
6 Service Calls Error List Displays the list of the cause of all the service calls. Cartridge Holder Full (L) (L Diaphragms Movement
Outputs the number of the occurrence of all the normal errors/ Times)
7 Save as CSV
service calls per item to the CSV file. Cartridge Holder Home (R) (R Diaphragms Movement
Times)

Table 4-5. Life Parts Operation History Table 4-6. Utilization History
Items Contents Items Contents
Wiper (Cleaning Counter) (Wiping Times) Total Pages Printed Same as the left
Wiper (Exchange Counter) (Wiping Times) Shows according to the cut sheet type (Photo/Proof/
Life Parts Operation History
Wiper Cleaner (Wiping Times) Fine Art/Matte/Plain)
(The following items are displayed Types of Prints
according to the items on the right.) Head Cap (Capping Times) Shows according to the dpi Resolution (36*36/
36*72/72*36/72*72/14*72/14*14/28*14)
 Current Value Print Head (Max. Dots Fired)
 Limit Nozzle Check Times Same as the left
Decompression Pump (Decompression Times)
 Situation Ink Consumption Ratio (%) Ratio by A to J columns
 End of Life Estimation (YY/MM/ SpectroProofer CR Motor (Carriage Passes)
Total Time Off Same as the left
DD) SpectroProofer Paper Pressing Motor (Press Movement
 Reset History 1 Times) Total Time On Same as the left
 Reset History 2 Spectrophotometer (W/O UV Filter) (Light ON Times)*1 Utilization Average Time Same as the left
 Reset History 3 Average Un-used Time Same as the left
Spectrophotometer (With UV Filter) (Light ON Times)*1
Number of Agreed Times*2 Min. Head Temperature Recorded
Same as the left
(Deg.C)
 Utilization History Max. Head Temperature Recorded
Same as the left
(Deg.C)
Note "*1": Displayed in Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
Average Temperature During
"*2": Displayed in SC-P5000 Series. Same as the left
Utilization
Table 4-6. Utilization History Updated Date for Basic Values*2 Same as the left
Items Contents Updated Date for Adjusted Values*2 Same as the left
Initial Ink Charge Date: (YY/MM/DD) Same as the left Updated Date for Verified Values*2 Same as the left
Time Since Initial Ink Charge Same as the left V Mode Initial Ink Charge Date*2 Same as the left
AID Missing Dots Judgment Ratio (%) Ratio by A to J columns V > LLK Ink Cartridge Exchanging
Same as the left
Numbers*2
Number of CL1 execution times by each of AB/CD/
CL1 (Times) LLK Mode Initial Ink Charge Date*2 Same as the left
EF/GH/IJ columns
Number of CL1 execution times by each of AB/CD/
CL2 (Times)
EF/GH/IJ columns
TCL User Notification Time*2 Same as the left
TCL CL3 Cancel Repeated Numbers*2 Same as the left
TCL CL3 Execution Numbers All
Same as the left
Lines*2
Number of SSCL execution times by each of AB/CD/
SSCL*2
EF/GH/IJ columns

Table 4-6. Utilization History

Items Contents
LLK > V Ink Cartridge Exchanging
Same as the left
Numbers*2
Total amount of used ink by slot
Total Ink Used  Current Value (mg)*1
(EPSON Genuine Ink consumption)  Total amount converted into the number of 200ml
cartridges
Total amount of used ink by slot
Total Ink Used  Current Value (mg)*1
(Non-Genuine Ink Consumption)  Total amount converted into the number of 200ml
cartridges
 Error History
Table 4-7. Error History

Items Contents
Normal Errors History Latest 6 errors (contents and time stamps)
Latest ten service calls and time stamps for SC-P5000 Series
Service Calls Errors History
and latest six for Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
Total error history Displays total number of errors by call for all the service calls.

4.3 ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)

This mode executes the adjustment required for the repair individually.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)] from the main menu.

2. Select the adjustment item that you want to execute and click [OK].
3. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
4. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
Figure 4-6. ADJUSTMENTS (Individual)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Individual) 345

4.4 ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)

This mode displays the required adjustments per removed part and executes the
adjustments in order.
PROCEDURE
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.

2. Select the name of the removed part and click [OK].
4. Follow the instructions on the screen to execute the adjustment.
5. Click [Back] to return to the adjustment item list per part after the adjustment.
6. Click [Back] to return to the main menu.
C H E C K The text of the executed adjustment is colored to be distinguished.

P O IN T The colored text gets back to normal by returning to the main
menu once.
Figure 4-7. ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)
ADJUSTMENT ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence) 346

4.5 Installing Firmware C H E C K The execution method differs depending on the type of firmware to
P O IN T be installed.
This section explains how to update the firmware. The firmware of this printer is  Main firmware:
written in the Flash ROM on the Main Board. If the main board is replaced or the • SC-P5050:
firmware needs to be updated, follow the procedure below to write the firmware to the Firmware Update Mode
Flash ROM. • PX-H6000:
Any of Normal Mode/Serviceman Mode/Firmware Update
Following three kinds of firmware are provided. Mode
 Main firmware  Network firmware:
Any of Normal Mode/Serviceman Mode/Firmware Update
 Network firmware Mode
 Firmware for SpectroProofer  Firmware for SpectroProofer:
Normal Mode or Serviceman Mode
C A U T IO N When Initial Charge is not needed when replacing the Main Board To enter the Firmware Update Mode, turn the printer ON while
with a new one, make sure to execute “Initial Ink Charge Flag ON/ pressing [Paper Source ] + [Paper Feed ] + [Paper Feed ] +
OFF” (p355) before updating the firmware. [Menu ].
(The printer is rebooted automatically right after uploading the
firmware. Since the parameter does not exist on the new Main
Board, the ink initial charge operation starts automatically.) 3. Start the Service Program and click [FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL] from the
main menu.
4. Click [Get Information] to check the current F/W version.
PROCEDURE
1. Turn both the printer and computer OFF and connect them with a USB cable.
C H E C K All firmwares are available by installing via USB cable connection.

P O IN T
Figure 4-8. FIRMWARE UPDATE TOOL
ADJUSTMENT Installing Firmware 347

C A U T IO N The F/W version of the SpectroProofer is displayed only when the

SpectroProofer is connected to the printer.
5. Click [Browse] of the [F/W Update] list to select the firmware data to be installed.
6. Click [Update] to transfer the firmware data.
C A U T IO N When updating starts, a progress bar is displayed on the Control

Panel of the printer. After updating is complete, the printer restarts
automatically. Make sure not to turn off the printer until updating
is complete. Otherwise, the printer may not operate normally
afterward.
7. When writing the firmware is completed, the printer will be rebooted

automatically.
8. Click [Exit].
ADJUSTMENT Installing Firmware 348

4.6 Image & Test Print  When printing the print quality test pattern
C H E C K The status of each adjustment can be checked by printing this

The following functions are provided. P O IN T pattern. The adjustment cannot be executed from this menu, make
1. Prints an image file sure to return to ADJUSTMENT menu as needed.
2. Transfers the PRN. file
3. Prints the print quality test pattern
1. Click [Image & Test Print] from the main menu.

PROCEDURE
2. Load the Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250) (16 inches roll paper).
 When printing an image file or transferring the PRN. file 3. Click [Test Print].
The test pattern is printed.
1. Click [Image & Test Print] from the main menu.
4. Check the print quality test pattern 1 (See Figure 4-10). If there is dot missing
2. Click the image file [Open] to specify a file.
or misalignment, execute Cleaning.
4. Click [Print].
Horizontal alignment
pattern
Vertical alignment
pattern
Figure 4-10. Print quality test pattern 1
Figure 4-9. [Image & Test Print] Screen
C A U T IO N Make the file name of an image file or PRN. file in half size less
than 80 characters.
ADJUSTMENT Image & Test Print 349

5. Check the print quality test pattern 2 (See Figure 4-11).  Adjustment pattern for PF direction head slant
Check the pattern if the margin between the blocks become parallel. If
they are not in parallel, execute PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment (P.
Adjustment pattern for 379).
CR direction head slant
Adjustment pattern for

PF direction head slant
Adjustment pattern
OK NG
for platen height Figure 4-13. Adjustment pattern for PF direction head slant
 Adjustment pattern for platen height
Adjustment pattern Check the pattern if the patterns 1 and 2, and 3 and 4 are the same in pairs.
for head slant
If they are not the same, exchange the printer since the adjustment is not
available in the field service.
Figure 4-11. Print quality test pattern 2

 Adjustment pattern for CR direction head slant
Check the pattern if the lines of magenta and cyan are overlapping each
OK
other. If they are not in line, execute CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment
(P. 376). 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Same pattern Same pattern
Figure 4-14. Adjustment pattern for platen height
NG OK
Figure 4-12. Adjustment pattern for CR direction head slant

 Adjustment pattern for head slant

Check the pattern if the five lines are not overlapping or separating. If they
are overlapping or separating, check the other four sets. If none of the set
is OK, reinstall the Printhead (P. 265).
1 set
OK NG
Figure 4-15. Adjustment pattern for head slant

4.7 Counter Reset Table 4-8. Clear Counter Menu List

Replaced Part/Unit Clear Menu Name
Whenever the parts/units which have life counter are replaced, the corresponding life PF Motor PF Motor Counter
counter must be reset. This is important to replace those parts/units at the correct
CR Motor CR Motor Counter
timing.
APG Motor Assy APG Motor Assy Counter
PROCEDURE Roll Feeding Motor Counter
Roll Feeding Motor Assy
Roll Feeding Roller Counter
1. Turn the printer ON. ATC Motor Assy ATC Motor Counter
2. Start the Service Program and click [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Retard Roller Retard Roller Counter
from the main menu. Pickup Roller Pickup Roller Counter
3. Click [Run] to reset the counter. Edge Release Assy Edge Release Assy Counter
4. Click [Finish]. Release Motor Assy Release Motor Assy Counter
ASF Motor Assy ASF Motor Assy Counter
5. Confirm that the current counter value is [0].
ASF Sub Motor Assy ASF Sub Motor Assy Counter
Cutter Motor Assy Cutter Motor Assy Counter
Decompression Pump Counter
Printer
Wiper Counter (for Cleaning)
Wiper Counter (for Exchange)
IS Unit
Wiper Cleaner Counter
Head Cap Counter
IS Unit Counter
Wiper Counter (for Cleaning)
Wiper & Wiper Cleaner Wiper Counter (for Exchange)
Wiper Cleaner Counter
Full (Left) Side Cartridge Holder Ink Holder Full Side (L) Counter
Home (Right) Side Cartridge Holder Ink Holder Home Side (R) Counter
Ink Selector Assy Ink Selector Assy Counter
Printhead Printhead Counter
Head FFC
Ink Tubes FFC, Ink Tubes and CR Pads Counter
Oil pad holder
Figure 4-16. [FLAG CHANGE & COUNTER RESET] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 352

Table 4-8. Clear Counter Menu List

Replaced Part/Unit Clear Menu Name
CR Motor SpectroProofer CR Motor Counter
SpectroProofer
SpectroProofer Paper Pressing Motor

Counter
C H E C K The history of the Counter Clear can be checked per counter on the
P O IN T NVRAM Viewer (P. 339).
C A U T IO N  Make sure to perform a Clear Counter for the SpectroProofer

after confirming that the SpectroProofer is in the ready state
(when the LED is on). If it is performed in the OFF or sleep
state, the counter is not reset correctly.
 Make sure that the counter clear history stored in the NVRAM
is deleted by clicking [Run] of Counter Clear many times.
Table 4-9. Flag Setting List

Replaced Part/Unit Flag Setting Menu Name
Printer Main Board (when NVRAM Backup is NG) Initial Ink Charge Flag
ADJUSTMENT Counter Reset 353

4.8 References
The following functions are provided.
1. Displays the panel menu of the Normal Mode (PDF file)
2. Displays the panel menu of the Serviceman Mode (PDF file)
3. Displays the circuit block diagram and the parts connection diagram (PDF
file)
PROCEDURE
1. Click [References] from the main menu.

2. Select Panel Menus or Wiring Diagrams and click [Open].
Figure 4-17. References
ADJUSTMENT References 354

4.9 Initial Ink Charge Flag

PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select [Initial Ink Charge Flag].
3. Select ON or OFF and click [Run].
4. Turn the printer OFF.
5. If ON is selected, initial ink charge will be performed next time you start the
printer.
Figure 4-18. [Initial Ink Charge Flag] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Initial Ink Charge Flag 355

4.10 CR Related Check & Adjustments Head FFC
Folding adjustment position

4.10.1 FFC Position Check
4.10.1.1 FFC Position Check after replacing the Head FFC
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. When any paper is loaded, remove it.
3. Start the Service Program and press the [F11] key.
The lock of the CR Unit is released.
Figure 4-19. FFC Position Check
5. Move the CR Unit to right and left to check if the Head FFC is routed tightly or
slackly too much. Confirm that the Head FFC does not touch the Ink Tube.
 No abnormality: Go to Step 10
 Abnormality is found: Go to Step 6
7. Remove the tube cover. (P. 283)
8. Adjust the length of the FFC by folding the FFC at the position shown in Figure
4-19.
9. Install the tube cover, and return to Step 5.
10. Press the [F12] key and cap the Printhead.
11. Turn the printer OFF to complete the adjustment.
ADJUSTMENT CR Related Check & Adjustments 356

4.10.1.2 FFC Position Check after replacing the tube  CHECK 1

Move the CR Unit to the position shown in Figure 4-21.
EXECUTION MODE Check that the tube holders 1 and 2 are at the following positions. If they are
not at the correct positions, adjust the positions.
Normal Mode  Tube holder 1: Position of the screw hole.
 Tube holder 2: Position of the hole on the main frame.
PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON. Screw

5. Execute CHECK 1 and CHECK 2 to check that the tube holders 1 to 5 are at the 1
correct positions.
Center of CR Unit
CR Unit
4 3
5
Figure 4-20. Tube holders 1
Screw hole
Hole
Figure 4-21. Adjusting the tube holders 1 and 2

 CHECK 2 10. Tighten the screws of the tube mounting plate.

Move the CR Unit to the right end. 11. Install the tube cover, and return to Step 6.
Check that the tube holders 3, 4 and 5 are at the following positions. If they
12. Press the [F12] key and cap the Printhead.
are not at the correct positions, adjust the positions.
 Tube holder 3: Position of the cutout. 13. Turn the printer OFF to complete the adjustment.
 Tube holder 5: Corner of the CR Cover.
 Tube holder 4: Position where B = A x 1/2.
Origin of the tube
3 B
5
4
FFC mounting plate
Cutout
Figure 4-23. Adjusting the position of the Ink Tube

Figure 4-22. Adjusting the Ink Tubes 3, 4 and 5
6. Move the CR Unit to right and left to check if the Head FFC is routed tightly or
slackly too much. Confirm that the Head FFC does not touch the Ink Tube.
8. Remove the tube cover. (P. 283)
9. Loosen the two screws that secure the tube mounting plate, and move the position
of the tube mounting plate to adjust the length of the tube.

4.10.2 CR Belt Adjustment 8. Bring the microphone of the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 closer to the center of the
belt on the upper side.
REQUIRED TOOLS
C A U T IO N  Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If
 Sonic Tension Meter U-508 you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the
measuring value may be inaccurate.
 Any tools to flip the belt
 Flip the belt as weak as the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 can
measure it.
STANDARD VALUE
 Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when
 14.5 ± 1 N flipping the belt.
EXECUTION MODE C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it
P O IN T touch the belt.
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
9. Press [MEASURE] on the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 and flip the belt with
1. Remove the following parts in advance. tweezers or a similar tool.
 Front Cover (P. 168) 10. Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the
standard value.
 Left Cover (P. 163)
 Within the standard value: Go to Step 11
2. Install the following part after removing the Left Cover.
 Out of the range: Go to Step 13
 Front Cover
11. Click [Finish].
5. Start the Service Program and select CR Belt Adjustment.
6. Click [Run].
CR Unit goes and returns three times.
7. Input the following values to the tension meter.
 MASS: 000.9 g/m
 WIDTH: 005.5 mm/R
 SPAN: 0710 mm

13. Loosen the three screws that secure the driven pulley holder.
14. Adjust the belt tension with the adjusting screw that secures the
Upper timing belt “HOLDER,PULLEY,CR,SUPPORT”.
After adjusting the tension, tighten the screws loosened in Step 13, and then back
to Step 8.
 If larger than standard value: Turn the screw in a counterclockwise.
 If smaller than standard value: Turn the screw in a clockwise.
Measuring microphone C H E C K The tension is changed about 1.0N by turning the adjusting screw
P O IN T for a quarter turn.
- Rear side -
Screws
Center of the timing belt
Tension adjusting screw
Figure 4-24. Measuring the belt tension
“HOLDER,PULLEY,CR,SUPPORT”
Figure 4-25. Tension adjusting screw

4.10.3 PG Height Check & Adjustment

Mark on top
REQUIRED TOOLS
PG Height Adjustment Jig
STANDARD VALUE Typ
–
+
 1.55 pass
–
+
 1.65 stop + –
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-26. Check position of the cam PG place
5. Remove the CR Cover. (P. 175)
6. Check if the mark on top of the cam APG is [Typ].
C H E C K For this printer, first PG Height Check & Adjustment should be

P O IN T done for both side of the Printhead on the Platen at the Home side,
then PG Height Check should be done for both sides of the
Printhead on the platen at the Full side. (The reference adjustment
should be done on the Platen at the Home side because the Platen at
the Full side has grooves for borderless printing.)

<Checks and adjustments on the Home side of the Platen> CR Unit

A
7. Move the CR Unit to the Home side.
C A U T IO N When moving the CR Unit, make sure to pull the CR Belt to move
it.
Thickness gauge
8. Place the thickness gauge on the position A as shown in Figure 4-27.

R
L
C A U T IO N Place the thickness gauge on the following position.
 Place it on the upstream of the platen.
Edge of the
Upstream thickness gauge
Figure 4-27. Position of the thickness gauge A
Downstream
 Place it on the position where the edge of the thickness gauge

does not come on a groove of the platen.
Edge of the
thickness gauge
Platen
Groove

9. Move the CR Unit slowly over the thickness gauge. 12. Place the thickness gauge on the position B as shown in Figure 4-28.
C H E C K The conditions of the Printhead touching the thickness gauge can C A U T IO N Align the edge to the position where the edge of A was placed.
P O IN T not be seen visually; therefore, refer to the following to verify it.
<If it does not touch the gauge> <As seen from the top>
The thickness gauge does not
move even when the edge of the
CR Unit comes to the border L
CR Unit
between the metallic part and CR
the plastic part of the jig. A B
<Cross section view>
CR
Thickness gauge
<If it touches the gauge> <As seen from the top>

The thickness gauge moves
before the edge of the CR Unit L
comes to the border between L
R
the metallic part and the plastic
part of the jig.
CR
<Cross section view>
CR Edge of the
thickness gauge
Figure 4-28. Position of the thickness gauge B
13. Move the CR Unit slowly over the thickness gauge.
10. Check if the height of the CR Unit is within the standard value.
11. Move the CR Unit to the Full side.

14. Check if the height of the CR Unit is within the standard value. <Checks and adjustments on the Full side of the Platen>
 Within the standard value: Go to Step 16 16. Move the CR Unit to the Home side.
 Out of the range: Go to Step 15 17. Place the thickness gauge on the position C as shown in Figure 4-30.
15. Loosen the adjustment screw and carry out the PG adjustment with the adjustment
lever. C CR Unit
After adjustment, secure the screw and return to Step 9.
Left Right
Thickness gauge
Adjustment lever
Adjustment lever
R
L
Edge of the
thickness gauge
Adjustment screw Adjustment screw
Figure 4-30. Position of the thickness gauge C
Figure 4-29. Adjustment screw and lever
19. Check if the height of the CR Unit is within the standard value.
 Stop at 1.55: Return to Step 7
 Pass over 1.65: Go to Step 20
20. Place the thickness gauge of 1.75 mm on the position C as shown in Figure 4-30.

22. Check if the CR Unit stops at 1.75.

 Stop at 1.75: Go to Step 23
 Not stop at 1.75: Return to Step 7
23. Remove the thickness gauge.
24. Install the CR Cover.
25. Close the Printer Cover.
26. Press the [F12] key to cap the Printhead.

4.10.4 APG Check <Reference>
Origin of
EXECUTION MODE Value of PG
APG
Normal Mode -- 0.8

- 1.2
PROCEDURE Typ 1.6
+ 2.1
++ 2.6
2. Start the Service Program and select APG Check.
6. Click [OK].
3. PG-- appears on the screen of the service program.
4. Check if the mark on top of the cam APG is [--].
 [--] is on the top: Go to Step 6 Mark on top
 [--] is not on the top: Go to Step 5

5. Since the APG is not switched correctly, execute the following remedy responding
to the symptom.
Symptom Remedy – –
The CR Unit does not move to the APG Since the CR Unit may not move smoothly,
switch position (home position). lubricate to Oil pad Holder. (P. 209)
The CR Unit moves to the APG switch Since the APG Motor Assy may not operate,
position but the APG mechanism does not check the wiring of the APG Motor Assy. If there
operate. is no trouble for the wiring, replace the APG
Motor Assy. (P. 206)
The APG mechanism operates but the APG Since the APG mechanism on the CR Unit may
is not switched correctly. not have been installed correctly, replace the CR
Unit. (P. 202)
After taking the above measure, return to Step 2 to check again. Figure 4-31. Check position of the cam APG

4.10.5 CR Encoder and Scale Check

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
CR Scale
2. Start the Service Program. CR Encoder
3. Press the [F11] key.

4. Select CR Encoder and Scale Check.
6. Check the detector of the CR Encoder and the CR Scale for scratch or
contamination. Wipe out the contamination with ethanol if any, and replace the
part if any scratch is found. (P. 197)
7. Close the Printer Cover.
8. Press the [F12] key to cap the Printhead.
9. Click [Run].
The CR Unit is moved, and the result will be displayed on the screen.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 11 Figure 4-32. CR Encoder and Scale Check
 The result is NG: Go to Step 10
10. Since the CR Scale is not loaded correctly, replace the CR Encoder (P. 197) or the
CR Scale (P. 198). After replacing the part, return to Step 4 to check again.
11. Click [Finish].

4.10.6 CR Speed Initialize

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select CR Speed Initialize.
3. Click [Run].
4. If Adjustment Successful appears, click [OK].
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-33. CR Speed Initialize

4.10.7 Active Damper Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

3. Start the Service Program and select Active Damper Adjustment.
4. Click [Run] to execute the calibration of the CR active damper.
C H E C K It takes about two minutes and 30 seconds to get the result of this
P O IN T adjustment.
5. If Adjustment Successful appears, click [OK].

6. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-34. Active Damper Adjustment

4.10.8 Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Size: A4
 Type: Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Load three or more sheets of paper in the paper cassette.

3. Start the Service Program and select Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed.
5. Check the message printed on the position shown in Figure 4-36.
 OK is printed: Go to Step 6
 NG is printed: Print the pattern again. If “NG” is printed again, replace the Ink Figure 4-35. [Ink Mark Sensor Check & Adjustment] Screen
Mark Sensor.
6. Click [Finish].

Check
A/D : <a1> D/A : <a2> ( 190 < A/D < 245, D/A > 0 ) <OK>
Ds: 12 Dm: -9 Dm’: -13
0 5
<OK! Go to next work.>
Model Name: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

M/C No. : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ,RTC: XX XX XX XX XX XX , XX : XX
Head-ID: xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
USB-ID: nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
Figure 4-36. Adjustment Pattern

4.11 Head Related Checks and Adjustments 5. Enter the 45-digit ID into the edit boxes in the same way as indicated on the label.
(Enter the digits continuously without pressing the Space, Enter, or Tab key.)
4.11.1 Head ID Check & Input

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
1. Write down the Head Rank ID (QR code) from the ID label attached on the new
Printhead if replacing the Printhead.
C A U T IO N  For ID, alphabets, numbers, and symbols (* ,+, -, %, $, :) are

used.
 A 48-digit alphanumeric character is written on the ID Label.
Use the first 45 digits for the Head Rank ID. (the last three
digits are not used.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
QR code
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 Figure 4-37. [Head ID Check & Input] Screen

45 NA NA NA
2. Assemble the printer.

4. Start the Service Program and select Head ID Check & Input.
ADJUSTMENT Head Related Checks and Adjustments 372

6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Finish].
C A U T IO N Make sure to turn off the printer after clicking the [Finish] button.
The setting of Head Rank ID becomes valid after the printer is
restarted.
Input
ID Label
Figure 4-38. Head Rank ID

4.11.2 Nozzle Check

PAPER USED
 Size: 16 inches
 Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Nozzle Check.
3. Select Nozzle Check Pattern Print.
4. Click [Run].
The nozzle check pattern is printed.
5. Check if there is any dot missing occurring or not from the nozzle check pattern.
6. If there is dot missing, execute the cleaning and print the check pattern for dot
missing.
Figure 4-39. [Nozzle Check] Screen
C H E C K  The nozzle check pattern can be printed from the utilities on
P O IN T the printer driver. For Mac OS X, use Epson Printer Utility4.
 The arrangement of colors is the same as that of the Printhead.
Figure 4-40. Nozzle check pattern

4.11.3 Cleaning
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Ink consumption is reduced by executing CL2 instead of Initial

P O IN T Charge after replacing the Printhead.

2. Start the Service Program and select Cleaning.
3. Select the item you want to execute, and click [Run].
Cleaning is executed.
4. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-41. [Cleaning] Screen

4.11.4 CR & PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment

4.11.4.1 CR Direction Head Slant Adjustment
Serial No. : XXXXXXXXXX Date Time : YY.YY.YY YY:YY:YY
PAPER USED
 Size: 16 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Visual Check Blocks
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

Print Print Print
2. Start the Service Program and select CR & PF Direction Head Slant head head head
Adjustment.
3. Select CR Direction Slant Check Pattern Print, and click [Run].
4. Check the visual check blocks in the adjustment pattern.
Check if lines of vivid light magenta and cyan are in line. If they are in line, finish
the adjustment. If not, follow the steps below to carry out the adjustment.
C H E C K Tolerable misalignment is one line height. (No adjustment is

P O IN T necessary)
OK NG NG
Figure 4-43. Determination of Visual Check Pattern

5. Press the [F11] key.

2 A
7. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (P. 164)
C A U T IO N Be sure to execute the following steps with the CR Unit on the right 1
end. If the CR Unit is on the platen, the Printhead may be damaged.

9. Lift the part A shown in Figure 4-44 to disengage the hook.
(Otherwise, the head will not work normally because of the adjustment
dial.) 1
10. Loosen the three screws a quarter turn in the order shown in Figure 4-44.
Figure 4-44. Adjustment screws

11. Turn the adjustment dial to adjust the slant of the Printhead. 12. Tighten the three screws loosened in Step 10 in the inverse order shown in Figure
4-44.
C H E C K  See the following for the direction of rotation.
P O IN T 13. Engage the hook released in Step 9.
15. Close the Front Cover.
Paper Feed C line is below M line C line is above M line
Direction Counterclockwise Clockwise 16. Print the adjustment pattern again and check the adjustment result.
17. Repeat Step 4 to Step 16 till the adjustment is finished.
 When turning the dial by five to six notches, the pattern slides
up or down by the line-height. 18. Press the [F12] key and cap the Printhead.
Adjustment dial
Figure 4-45. Adjustment dial

4.11.4.2 PF Direction Head Slant Adjustment

A C
PAPER USED
A=B
 Size: 16 inches
C=D OK
EXECUTION MODE B D
A C
Normal Mode
A=B
PROCEDURE
C=D OK
1. Turn the printer ON. NOTE: It does not matter if the
gap widths (the width of A-
2. Start the Service Program and select CR & PF Direction Head Slant B D B and that of C-D) differ.
Adjustment.
A C
3. Select PF Direction Slant Check Pattern Print, and click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed. A≠B
4. Check the visual check blocks in the adjustment pattern. C≠D NG
Check the pattern if the margin between the blocks become parallel. If they are in
parallel, finish the adjustment. If not, follow the steps below to carry out the
adjustment. B D
A C
A≠B
C≠D NG
Paper feed direction
CR scan direction
Figure 4-46. Adjustment Pattern B D

Figure 4-47. Judgement


6. Open the Printer Cover. Head tilt lever
C A U T IO N Be sure to execute the following steps with the CR Unit on the right - +
end. If the CR Unit is on the platen, the Printhead may be damaged.

9. Check the block in the middle, and move the head tilt lever to up and down and Figure 4-48. Head tilt lever
adjust the slant of the Printhead.
 If the top line is tilting to the left. (PG in the front of the head is too narrow):
11. Close the Front Cover.
Rotate the lever to the + side to raise the front of the head.
The CR will be capped automatically.
 If the top line is tilting to the right. (PG in the front of the head is too wide):
Rotate the lever to the - side to lower the front of the head. 12. Print the adjustment pattern again and check the adjustment result.
13. Repeat Step 4 to Step 12 till the adjustment is finished.
Top side is slanted to the left Top side is slanted to the right
Turn the lever to - side Turn the lever to + side 14. Press the [F12] key and cap the Printhead.
CR scan direction CR scan direction
Paper feed direction
Check the center block

4.11.5 Auto Bi-D Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Size: 16 inches
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
2. Start the Service Program and select Auto Bi-D Adjustment.
3. Click [Run].
4. After the pattern was printed, the printer will automatically scan the pattern and
correct it (no need to adjust it manually).
5. The result will be displayed on the screen.
 OK! is displayed: Normally adjusted. Go to Step 6.
 NG!! is displayed: Error occurs.
Refer to Chapter 2 “Troubleshooting” (P. 67).

4.11.6 Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)

4.11.6.1 Adjustment Overview
This adjustment is required when the user asks to reduce the color gap between the
printers after replacing any of the following parts.
 Printhead
 Main Board
 Power Supply Board Assy
PURPOSE
By registering/controlling information concerning the ink droplets, this product

improves calibration accuracy and ensures stable color quality. (Difference in color
among individual products or each mode is reduced.)
PRINCIPLE
The calibration is performed by measuring a printed correction pattern with a

calibrator. ID information that is calculated based on the acquired color values (L*, a*,
b*) is transmitted to the printer driver, and the printer driver corrects the dot generation
amount for each dot size x each color in the print data.

4.11.6.2 Adjusting Method ADJUSTMENT WORKFLOW
REQUIRED TOOLS The workflow of the adjustment is explained in this section.
Table 4-10. Tools Required

START
Tool Application/Specification
Plain Paper (A4) For nozzle check
EPSON Enhanced (Archival) Matte For printing charts Cleaning
Paper (A4)
Computer Following should be installed beforehand.
Nozzle check
• Printer driver for this product
• USB driver for the calibrator
• Colorimetric Calibration Tool
Alignment check
Application Colorimetric Calibration Tool
Calibrator With UV filter
Calibration plate (White plate) Accessory provided with the calibrator Print calibration chart
Scanning ruler (Scale) Accessory provided with the calibrator
USB cable To connect the computer and the calibrator Measure color
Black sheet Used when calibration base plate is not used.
Write the color ID
C A U T IO N When download and install the Colorimetric Calibration Tool to

the PC, save the program folder on the layer that is near to Root:
END
ex. under Drive C.
(If the program folder is saved on separated layer from Root, data Figure 4-50. Adjustment Workflow
file may not be referred correctly)

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer power on.

2. Start the Service Program, and select [Colorimetric Calibration Tool].
3. Click [Run] to start the “Colorimetric Calibration Tool”.
4. Click [Next].
Figure 4-52. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)

6. Select the printer model.
5. Click [Next].
C A U T IO N Some combinations may not be available depending on the

combination of the type of specified paper and calibrators. Make
sure to use a calibrator that supports the specified paper for the
chart.

7. Load an A4-sized paper vertically on the paper cassette, click [Next] to start the 9. Load an A4-sized Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper vertically on the manual
nozzle check. paper feed slot, and click [Next] to print the calibration chart.
C A U T IO N Make sure to leave the adjustment chart for 5 minutes to dry it out.
Wait for the countdown to end.

8. Check the nozzle pattern. If there is any defect, execute the cleaning using the
Service Program.
If the check pattern is appropriate, click [Next].
C A U T IO N Make sure to confirm that there is no dot missing for all nozzles
before executing Colorimetric Calibration Adjustment. Figure 4-56. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID)
10. Make sure there is no missing dots in the nozzle check pattern at the bottom of the
calibration chart.
If there are missing dots, click [Print Calibration Chart Again]. The calibration
chart will be printed again after performing cleaning.
If there are no missing dots, let the chart stand for five minutes until it dries out
paying attention not to touch the chart.

11. When the calibration chart dries out (after five minutes), click [Next]. 12. Connect a calibrator to the computer.
 SC-P5000 Series 13. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate, and click [Calibration].
14. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on the side
of the calibrator until it beeps.
Once the calibration completed normally, following screen appears.
White Plate
Button

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 Button
White Plate Calibration Plate
Calibration Plate
i1pro i1pro2
Figure 4-59. i1Calibrator
C A U T IO N Do not contaminate the white plate of the calibration base plate. If

tainted, use alcohol to clean the plate.
15. Place the calibrator on the calibration base plate again, and click [Calibration].
16. Keep the calibrator remain set on the base plate, hold down the button on the side
of the calibrator until it beeps.

17. Make sure that the date and time printed in the second line on the upper left of the  Calibration chart
chart (measurable time and date) is within the range displayed under the heading  SC-P5000 Series
“GMT” on the lower screen. (If the date and time is not within the range, it is
necessary to print the chart again.) Printed date and time Main unit serial OS type Black ink type
number
2016-08-19 17:14 (GMT 2016-08-10 08:14)

S/N : 6611E10016 OS : Win BlackInk : Matte
2016-08-26 17:09 (GMT 2016-08-26 08:09)
Printer : EPSON SC-P5000 Series
Measurable date and time Product name

2016-08-19 17:14 (GMT 2016-08-10 08:14)
S/N : 6611E10016 OS : Win BlackInk : Matte
2016-08-26 17:09 (GMT 2016-08-26 08:09)
Calibration 6
Calibration line
patch 7
Figure 4-60. Colorimetric Calibration (Color ID) 8
18. Set the calibration chart on the base plate referring to Figure 4-63. And then, set 9
the calibrator and scanning ruler on the first line. When without the base plate, lay
10
11
the chart on the black paper (or sheet) with the upper part of the chart facing left 12
side, and set the scanning ruler onto the bottom most patch line.
Nozzle check
pattern
C VM MB GY OR GR LGY Y LVM LC
Version : N015G7, A0.02, A000 S/N : 6611E10016 Date : 2016/08/19 18:14
Figure 4-61. Calibration chart

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910  Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler
 SC-P5000 Series
Printed date and time Main unit serial OS type Black ink type
number
2015-08-29 09:35 (GMT 2015-08-29 00:35)

S/W : 0000000000 OS:Win BlackInk : Photo
2015-09-05 09:30 (GMT 2015-09-05 00:30)
Measurable date and time Product name

2015-08-29 09:35 (GMT 2015-08-29 00:35)
S/N : 0000000000 OS : Win BlackInk:Matte
2015-09-05 09:30 (GMT 2015-09-05 00:30)
Printer : EPSON PC-P9000 Series
Calibration
patch
Nozzle check
pattern
Version : XXXXXXXXXX
Figure 4-62. Calibration chart Set the calibrator and scanning ruler on the first line.
Figure 4-63. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 19. Click [OK] and follow the instructions (following procedure) displayed on the
screen to perform color measuring.
C H E C K For SC-P5000 Series, the calibration line and calibration times are
P O IN T displayed. Perform calibration following the displayed instructions.
1. Set the calibrator with its measuring part matched with measuring start
position (margin).
2. Press down the button on the side of the calibrator.
3. When it beeps, keep holding down the button and scan the patch along the
calibration guide to measuring end position (margin).
4. Once the measuring is completed, release the button.
5. For i1pro: Repeat Step 1 to 4 twice for the same row.
For i1pro2: Repeat Step 1 to 4 for the same row back and forth twice.
ilpro
ilpro2
Figure 4-65. i1pro/i1pro2

6.
Repeat Step 1 through 5 to measure the bottommost line to the top line. (The
line that needs to be measured is displayed on the screen.)
20. Once all the lines (12 lines) are measured, click [OK].
Set the scanning ruler with its guide gap matched with the patch. C H E C K For SC-P5000 Series, [Completed] is displayed when calibration is
P O IN T complete.
Figure 4-64. Setting the Chart and the Scanning Ruler

 SC-P5000 Series  Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910
Measuring line/ Unmeasured

times lines
Unmeasured Currently
lines measured line
Measured lines
Currently
measured line
Figure 4-67. Color Measuring Screen
Measured lines
C A U T IO N When measuring colors, pay attention to the instructions below.

 Scan one line between five to ten seconds.
 Keep the scan speed constant as possible.
 Measure each of the lines twice. (Measure the line as instructed
on the program screen.)
 Place the chart on a flat surface. The calibrator and the ruler
must be attached firmly to the chart in order to measure the
colors accurately.
 Do not scan any places other than the one shown in Figure 4-68,
Figure 4-69.
 If the measured values are completely out of the standards, a
warning mark ( ) appears. In this instance, check the
instructions mentioned above and retry the color measuring
again.
 If an error mark ( ) appears, check the instructions
mentioned above and retry the color measuring again.

 Calibration procedure  i1pro2

 i1pro
Start position in the End position in the

color measuring color measuring
Figure 4-69. Setting the Calibrator/Measuring Position
Start position in the color measuring End position in the color measuring
Figure 4-68. Setting the Calibrator/Measuring Position

C H E C K If measuring color fails, you should turn the chart 90 degrees (so
P O IN T that the nozzle check pattern comes on the right) and move the
calibrator from front to rear.
 Color Measuring Screen

 SC-P5000 Series

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

393 Head Related Checks and Adjustments ADJUSTMENT
Figure 4-73. Color Measuring Order Figure 4-72. Color Measuring Order
2010-08-29 09:35 (GMT 2005-08-29 00:35) 2016-08-19 17:14 (GMT 2016-08-10 08:14)
S/N : 0000000000 OS : Win BlackInk:Matte S/N : 6611E10016 OS : Win BlackInk : Matte
2010-09-05 09:30 (GMT 2005-09-05 00:30) 2016-08-26 17:09 (GMT 2016-08-26 08:09)
Printer : Epson Stylus Pro XXXXX Printer : EPSON SC-P5000 Series
Start Start1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
End End 12
Version : XXXXXXXXXX
Version : N015G7, A0.02, A000 S/N : 6611E10016 Date : 2016/08/19 18:14
Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910  SC-P5000 Series 
Revision G SC-P5000 Series/Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910
21. Make sure that the “READY” message is displayed on the printer LCD panel, and
click [Next] to turn OFF the printer automatically. And then, turn on the printer,
write the “Color ID” to the printer main unit.
22. When the writing is completed, click [End].

4.12 Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments
4.12.1 Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange.
3. Select Wiper or Cap, and click [Run].
4. The Wiper or the cap is moved.
Figure 4-75. [Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange] Screen
ADJUSTMENT Ink Supply Related Checks and Adjustments 395

4.12.2 Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check.
3. Click [Run].
The free space of the maintenance tanks is indicated.
C H E C K <Reference>
P O IN T  Space required on the maintenance box to eject the ink:
 All lines: 79 ml
 C/M: 15 ml
 Bk/Lk: 26 ml
 Or/Gr: 14 ml
 LLK(V)/Y: 13 ml
 Lm/Lc: 13 ml
 Space required on the maintenance box to clean the tubes:
 All lines: 355 ml Figure 4-76. [Maintenance Box Remaining Space Check] Screen
 C/M: 61 ml
 Bk/Lk: 112 ml
 Or/Gr: 62 ml
 LLK(V)/Y: 61 ml
 Lm/Lc: 61 ml

4.12.3 Ink Eject and Initial Charge

4.12.3.1 Ink Eject
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Required time per Ink Eject (all rows): 7 minutes

P O IN T

Figure 4-77. [Ink Eject] Screen
2. Start the Service Program and select Ink Eject and Initial Charge.
3. Select Ink Eject and select the ink holder from which ink should be ejected.
4. Click [Run].
5. Follow the instructions on the screen to remove all ink cartridges of the selected
ink holders.
Ink is ejected.
C A U T IO N If ink is ejected just one time, ink may leak when removing the ink
tube. Therefore, it is better to prepare paper or cloth to clean away
the ink beforehand or eject ink twice in a row.

4.12.3.2 Ink Charge
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Required time per Initial Charge (all rows): 16 minutes

P O IN T
C A U T IO N Be sure to observe the following precautions. Otherwise, ink may

leak.
 Make sure to use a new maintenance box. After the work, bring
back the maintenance box, then dispose of it. Do not reuse it. Figure 4-78. [Ink Charge] Screen
 If initial ink charge has already been done and the ink paths
are filled with ink, do not perform the Initial Ink Charge of the
Service Program. Eject ink from the ink paths in advance if you
need to perform the Initial Ink Charge.

2. Start the Service Program and select Ink Eject and Initial Charge.
3. Select Ink Charge and select the item you want to execute.
4. Install the ink cartridges into all the ink holders.
5. Click [Run].
Ink Charge is executed. Once the ink charge is completed, [Ready] is displayed on
the LCD of the printer.
6. Click [Finish].
7. Turn the printer OFF and finish the adjustment.

4.12.4 Ink Selector Movement Check

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C A U T IO N When executing this procedure, be sure to discharge ink in advance

following the procedure in "4.12.3.1 Ink Eject (p397)".

2. Start the Service Program and select Ink Selector Movement Check.
3. Click [Run].
Figure 4-79. [Ink Selector Movement Check] Screen
The ink selector switch operation is executed.
4. Press [OK] when the confirmation message is displayed.
5. Click [Finish].

4.12.5 ILS & CSIC Check 5. Click [Finish].

4.12.5.1 ILS Check
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Perform this check when the ink amount displayed on the LCD of
P O IN T the printer is not the same as the actual ink amount.

2. Start the Service Program and select ILS & CSIC Check.
3. Select ILS Check on the ILS & CSIC Check screen.
Figure 4-80. [ILS & CSIC Check] Screen
4. Click [Run].
The result will be displayed on the screen.
 When the result is NOT the same as the actual ink amount:
The ILS (Ink Level Sensor) does not detect the ink out correctly.
 When the result is the same as the actual ink amount:
The ILS detects the ink out correctly but the ink consumption is not counted
correctly.
NOTE: The ink consumption is not counted correctly if the power is shut off
during Ink Charge or Cleaning. It makes a gap between the ink remaining
level displayed on the LCD of the printer and the actual ink level in the
cartridge.

4.12.5.2 CSIC Check 7. Turn the printer OFF and finish the adjustment.
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Perform this check only when the trouble of recognizing ink

P O IN T amount occurs.

C A U T IO N When executing this adjustment after replacing the ink holder,

make sure to execute it before charging ink with the ink cartridge
installed.
2. Start the Service Program and select ILS & CSIC Check.
3. Select CSIC Check on the ILS & CSIC Check screen.
4. Click [Run].
 The result is OK: Go to Step 6
 The result is NG: The NG part is displayed. Go to Step 5
5. Replace the ink cartridge or maintenance box with NG display. Return to Step 4.
If the trouble is not solved, replace the cartridge holder (P. 272) or maintenance
box (P. 152).
6. Click [Finish].

4.12.6 Tubes Cleaning (and Ink Charge per Two Rows) 6. Remove all the ink cartridges, and install the cleaning cartridge into the slot to
clean.
4.12.6.1 Tubes Cleaning 7. Click [OK].
The tube is cleaned.
THINGS TO PREPARE
8. Replace the cartridges according to the instructions of the Service Program.
Cleaning Cartridge, 200, J40C (Part Code: 1537913)
NOTE: To clean the tube fully, the sequence of cleaning/ejection is executed
twice in a row per one cleaning automatically. During this operation, the
EXECUTION MODE
ink cartridge has to be inserted/removed each time.
Normal Mode 9. Click [Finish].
PROCEDURE 10. Turn the printer OFF and finish the adjustment.
C H E C K  Required time per Tubes Cleaning (all rows): 30 minutes

P O IN T  Check the remaining space of the maintenance box in advance
(p396). If the remaining space runs out during the cleaning, the
error occurs, and then the printer should be rebooted to
continue the cleaning.

2. Start the Service Program and select Tubes Cleaning.
3. Select Tubes Cleaning on the Tubes Cleaning screen and select the color of the
tube to be cleaned. (Nozzle columns of all colors or two adjacent colors can be
selected.)
4. Remove the ink cartridge of the selected color and install the cleaning cartridge.
C H E C K  Two cleaning cartridges are used for cleaning tubes per two
P O IN T colors. (11 cleaning cartridges are used for cleaning all colors at
once, and three cleaning cartridges are used for cleaning Pk/ Figure 4-81. [Tubes Cleaning] Screen
Mk/GY.)
 One cleaning cartridge can be used to clean at least five times.
5. Click [Run].
(Indication of ink remaining 50% is displayed on the control panel.)

4.12.6.2 Ink Charge
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
C H E C K Required time per ink charge (all rows): 16 minutes

P O IN T

2. Start the Service Program and select Tubes Cleaning.
3. Select Ink Charge on the Tubes Cleaning screen and select the color to which ink
should be charged. (Nozzle columns of all colors or two adjacent colors can be
selected.)
4. Install the ink cartridges into all the ink holders.
5. Click [Run].
Ink will be charged.
6. Click [Finish].

4.12.7 Leak Check (visually)

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE
C A U T IO N Make sure to perform this adjustment before charging ink.

2. Start the Service Program and select Leak Check.
3. Check the following items.
 The torque is managed when tightening the screw.
 O-ring is mounted. Figure 4-82. [Leak Check] Screen
 No foreign material such as dust is caught.

4.12.8 LLK/V Ink Change (SC-P5000 Series)

THINGS TO PREPARE
Cleaning Cartridge, 200, J40C (Part Code: 1537913): Two pcs
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select LLk/V Ink Change.
3. Install the new maintenance box to the home side of the slot.
4. Click [Run].
5. Remove the all ink cartridges, and install the cleaning cartridge to the LLK(V)Y
slot. Figure 4-83. LLk/V Ink Change
6. Cleaning start confirmation message appeared, press [OK] to start the cleaning
7. Cleaning start confirmation message appeared, remove the cleaning cartridge. and
then press [OK] to start the Ink Eject.
8. Ink Eject start confirmation message appeared, install the cleaning cartridge. and
9. Cleaning start confirmation message appeared, remove the cleaning cartridge. and
10. Tube washing complete message appeared, and click [OK]. Printer turns off
automatically.
11. Install the ink cartridge set, and turn the printer on.
12. LLK(V) and Y Ink Change Start confirmation message appeared, press [Run] to
start the Ink Charge.
13. Ink charge complete message appeared, press [OK].

4.13 Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the timing belt but do not
P O IN T let it touch the belt.
4.13.1 PF Belt Adjustment

REQUIRED TOOLS
 Sonic Tension Meter U-508 Measuring microphone

 Any tools to flip the timing belt
STANDARD VALUE
 13 ± 1.5 N
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
Fixing screws
1. Remove the following parts in advance.
 Front Cover (P. 168)
Figure 4-84. PF Belt tension adjustment
2. Install the following part after removing the Left Cover.
4. Start the Service Program and select PF Belt Adjustment.
 MASS: 001.4 g/m
 SPAN: 0093 mm
6. Bring the microphone of the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 closer to the position
shown in Figure 4-84.
ADJUSTMENT Media Feed Related Checks and Adjustments 406

7. Press [MEASURE] on the Sonic Tension Meter U-508, and flip the timing belt in
the direction of the arrow shown in Figure 4-84 with tweezers or a similar tool.
C A U T IO N  Flip the timing belt as weak as the Sonic Tension Meter U-508
can measure it.
 Be careful not to let the microphone touch the timing belt when
flipping the belt.
8. Press [Run].
The PF Belt turns 180 degrees.
9. Measure the belt tension again.
10. Check if the average of the measured value in Step 7 and Step 9 is within the
standard value.
11. Loosen the two screws that secure the PF Motor.
12. Slide the PF Motor to adjust the tension.
13. Tighten the screws loosened in Step 11, then go back to Step 6.
14. Click [Finish].

4.13.2 PF Encoder and Scale Check 11. Turn the printer OFF to complete the adjustment.
EXECUTION MODE
Overhead view
Normal Mode It is OK if the PF
Scale is contacted to
the while projection.
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts in advance.

2. Install the following parts after removing the Left Cover. PF Scale

3. Turn the printer ON. PF Encoder
4. Start the Service Program and select PF Encoder and Scale Check.
Check from
5. Select 30 Laps Rotations, and click [Run]. the above
The PF Scale turns 30 times.
6. Check that the PF Scale is not contacting to the PF Encoder as seen from the
above.
7. Select Auto Check.
8. Click [Run].
9. Since the PF Scale may be dirty, clean it with ethanol. After cleaning the PF Scale,
execute Step 7 and Step 8 to check again. Figure 4-85. Check position
If the result is still NG after checking again, replace the PF Encoder (P. 211) or the
PF Scale (P. 212) and check again.
10. Click [Finish].

4.13.3 Paper Thickness Sensor Position Adjustment CHECKING PROCEDURE
REQUIRED TOOL 1. Remove the following parts in advance.

Paper Thickness Position Tool (use the ones 0.4/0.5/0.8 in thickness only.)
 Right Upper Cover (P. 164)
EXECUTION MODE  Control Panel Cover (P. 161)
Serviceman Mode  Right Cover (P. 165)

STANDARD VALUE
 Printer Cover (P. 157)
Lever’s status Jig Panel Display  Upper Rear Cover (P. 223)
Down N/A 00
2. Install the following parts after removing the upper rear cover.
Down 0.4 00
Down 0.5 01  Front Cover (P. 168)
Down 0.8 01  Printer Cover (P. 157)
Down 1.2* 11  Control Panel Cover (P. 161)
Up N/A 10
Note "*": Use 0.4 and 0.8 stacked in pairs. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK].
4. Select SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment Paper.
5. Press [Paper Set] to lock the paper presser.
6. Check that “00” is displayed on the Control Panel.
Carry out the adjustment if the displayed value is other than “00”.
Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
7. Press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser.
8. Insert the adjustment jig (0.4) from the paper insertion opening, and set it to the
position shown in Figure 4-87, then press [Paper Set].

11. Set the adjustment jig (0.5) to the position shown in Figure 4-87, and press [Paper
Set].
Go to ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Adjustment jig (0.5)

14. Insert the adjustment jig (0.8) from the paper insertion opening, and set it to the
position shown in Figure 4-87, then press [Paper Set].
Setting direction
17. Insert the adjustment jigs (0.4) and (0.8) stacked in pairs from the paper insertion
opening, and set it to the position shown in Figure 4-87, then press [Paper Set].
Figure 4-86. Position for the thickness tool
19. Press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser. Center of the driven roller on the right end
20. Check that “10” is displayed on the Control Panel while releasing the paper set.
21. After all the checking and adjustment, confirm all the values again.
Setting direction
Adjustment jig
Figure 4-87. Position for the thickness tool (Other than the jig (0.5))

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
Paper thickness sensor holder 2 Paper thickness sensor holder 1
Adjust the position of the paper thickness sensor holder 1 when the value of ones place
digit differs from the standard value. Adjust the position of the paper thickness sensor
holder 2 when the value of tenths place digit differs from the standard value.
1. Loosen the screws (1 each) that secure the paper thickness sensor holder.
2. Slide the paper thickness sensor holder back and forth while watching the value
displayed on the panel. Stop the holder immediately after the target value is
displayed.
Screws
C H E C K Slide the paper thickness sensor holder toward you to increase the
P O IN T value and slide it backward to decrease the value.
Figure 4-88. Position adjustment
3. Secure the holder by tightening the screw(s).

4.13.4 Rear AD Adjustment C A U T IO N When executing the following step, do not remove the external
covers to acquire proper AD value.
REQUIRED TOOL
 Standard Sheet (JETRAS JP-D300S)

6. Select SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment Rear AD, and press [OK]
EXECUTION MODE while [Enter] Start is displayed.
Check if the 3 digits number is displayed on the Control Panel. If Retry AD
Serviceman Mode
Adjust is displayed, check if there is a defect (tears/rips, contamination, wrinkles)
on the Standard Sheet, and execute obtaining AD value again.
PROCEDURE
C A U T IO N If Retry AD Adjust is displayed again, the PE sensor is defective.
Replace the PE sensor with a new one and carry out the adjustment
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK]
again.
simultaneously.
2. Select SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment Rear AD.
7. Press [Paper Source ] for several times and return to top menu.
C H E C K Make sure to carry out the following steps without loading the 8. Press [Paper Set] to release the paper presser.
P O IN T Standard Sheet.
9. Remove the Standard Sheet, and turn the printer OFF.
Standard Sheet
3. Press [OK] while [Enter] Start is displayed.
Check if Retry AD Adjust is displayed on the Control Panel.
4. Press [Paper Source ] for several times and return to Top Menu.
5. Select Rear AD again, and press [Paper Set] while [Enter] Start is displayed to Driven roller
release the paper presser.
C A U T IO N Insert the Standard Sheet to the position shown in Figure 4-89 and
press [Paper Set] to lock the paper presser. Make sure to follow the
points below.
 Set the matte side on the front
 Set the edge of the sheet 10 to 20 mm out from the driven roller
 Align the right edge of the Standard Sheet to the right edge of 10 to 20 mm
the ASF
Figure 4-89. Position of the Standard Sheet

4.13.5 Media Feed Correction Check & Adjustment

Select here Not select here
PAPER USED
Step 5
 Size: A4
Top
EXECUTION MODE Bottom

-8 (-7) -6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6 (7) 8
Normal Mode
Step 6
PROCEDURE
Figure 4-90. Selecting patches 1
2. Turn the printer ON. C H E C K When it is difficult to judge, compare the patch with the patch on
P O IN T the right. If the patch is at the same level as the patch on the right,
3. Start the Service Program and select Media Feed Correction Check & select the value between the two patches.
Adjustment.
4. Click [File Print]. Compare
5. Check the top of the adjustment pattern from the left end, and select the value of
the patch whose lines are turned to be hard to see first.
6. Check the bottom of the adjustment pattern from the right end, and select the value
If the patches are at
of the patch whose lines are turned to be hard to see first. the same level
4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1)

7. Adjust it by the value of the patches selected from the top and the bottom.
The patches selected NO

from the top and the
bottom are the -8 (-7) -6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6 (7) 8
same?
YES Center value is 0
NO The center value of the NO

The value of the patches selected from the
selected patch is 0? top and the bottom is 0?
See Figure 4-91.
YES YES
-8 (-7) -6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6 (7) 8
Go to Step 9 Go to Step 9
Center value is 0
In above case, go to YES

Input the value of the Input the center value of
selected patch to the the patches selected from
Service Program and the top and the bottom to
go to Step 8 the Service Program and
go to Step 8
-8 (-7) -6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6 (7) 8
Center value is -1
In above case, go to NO
Figure 4-91. Selecting patches 2

8. Click [Write]. Return to Step 4.
9. Click [Finish].

PF Adjustment
Input Value = -12 Adjusted Value = -12 (99783)
-8 (-7) -6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6 (7) 8
Inspection Program Ver. : XXXXXXXX ,F/W version : XXXXXXXXXX

Head-ID : xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx
USB-ID :XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX RTC: XX XX XX XX XX XX , XX : XX
M/C No. : xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx ,

4.13.6 Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment

PAPER USED
 Size: A4
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
STANDARD VALUE
 Within ± 4
PROCEDURE

2. Set paper in the bypass feed unit, and press [Paper Feed ] to feed paper.
3. Start the Service Program and select Media Eject Correction Check &
Adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
The adjustment pattern will be printed. Figure 4-93. [Media Eject Correction Check & Adjustment] Screen
5. Check that the pattern of the most closely aligned with the upper bar (without any
gap and not overlapping each other) among the printed patterns lies within the
standard range (-4 to +4).
6. Input the value for the pattern of most closely aligned with the upper bar (no gap
but not overlapping each other).
7. Click [Write], and return to Step 4. NG OK NG
<Overlapped> <Aligned> <Gapped>
8. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-94. Check point

-6 (-5) -4 (-3) -2 (-1) 0 (1) 2 (3) 4 (5) 6
No adjustment is necessary if the

best pattern exists within this range.

4.13.7 PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment 4.13.7.2 T&B&S Adjustment
4.13.7.1 PW Adjustment PAPER USED
 Size: A4
PAPER USED
 Size: A4
 Type: Enhanced (Archival) Matte Paper STANDARD VALUE
 Top margin: 10 ± 0.4 mm

EXECUTION MODE
 Bottom margin: 14 ± 0.6 mm
Normal Mode
 Side margin: 14 ± 0.6 mm
PROCEDURE
PROCEDURE
3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment.
3. Start the Service Program and select PW + T&B&S Check & Adjustment.
4. Click [PW Adjust.]. Check the message displayed on the panel.
4. Click [Print].
 [Successful] is displayed: Go to Step 8 The adjustment pattern will be printed.
 [Gap Error] is displayed: Go to Step 5 5. Measure the distance as shown in Figure 4-96.
 [Detection Position Error] is displayed: Go to Step 6  Within the standard value: Go to Step 9
5. Execute PG Height Check & Adjustment (p361), and return to Step 4.  Out of the range: Return to Step 4
6. Since the installation of the PW Sensor may have the abnormality, install the PW
C A U T IO N When measuring the value, make sure to put the adjustment
Sensor correctly again (P. 221). After installing the PW Sensor, execute Step 4 to
pattern on the horizontal surface.
check again.
When [Detection Position Error] still occurs after checking again, execute Sensor
Check (p435) to check if the sensor operates correctly. If an error occurs, replace
the PW Sensor.
7. Execute Step 4. If the error is not solved, execute Sensor Check. If the error still
occurs, replace the PW Sensor. Return to Step 4.
8. Click [Finish].

6. Remove paper from the paper cassette, and execute Step 5 by Rear Manual Feed.
7. Input the value that is measured in Step 5 and out of the range.
8. Click [Write], and return to Step 4.
9. Click [Finish].
Bottom margin (14 ± 0.6 mm)
Paper feeding
direction
Side margin Side margin

Full side Home side
(10 ± 0.4 mm) (10 ± 0.4 mm)
Top margin (10 ± 0.4 mm)

4.13.8 Cut Position Check & Adjustment 9. Turn the printer OFF to complete the adjustment.
REQUIRED TOOL
Full Center Home
 Calibrated loupe
PAPER USED
Paper feeding
 Size: 16 inches direction
STANDARD VALUE
 15 ± 0.3 mm
EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Cut Position Check & Adjustment.
3. Click [Print].
4. Measure the distance between Home, Center and Full shown in Figure 4-97.
5. Check if the average of the maximum value and the minimum value is within the
standard value.
6. Input the maximum and minimum values measured in Step 4.
8. Click [Finish].

4.13.9 Cutter Belt Tension Check C A U T IO N  Be sure to measure the tension of the belt on the upper side. If
you measure the tension of the belt on the lower side, the
REQUIRED TOOLS measuring value may be inaccurate.
 Flip the belt as weak as the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 can
 Sonic Tension Meter U-508 measure it.
 Any tools to flip the timing belt  Be careful not to let the microphone touch the belt when
flipping the belt.
STANDARD VALUE
C H E C K Bring the microphone within 5 mm from the belt but do not let it
 13 to 19.5 N P O IN T touch the belt.
PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts in advance. 5. Press [MEASURE] on the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 and flip the belt with
 Front Cover (P. 168) tweezers or a similar tool.
 Right Upper Cover (P. 164) 6. Measure the belt tension for three times, and check if the average is within the
standard value.
 Control Panel Cover (P. 161)
 Media Eject Cover (P. 174)
 Upper Front Cover (P. 158)
2. Confirm that the cutter is at the home position.
 MASS: 001.1 g/m
 SPAN: 0620 mm
4. Bring the microphone of the Sonic Tension Meter U-508 closer to the position
shown in Figure 4-98.
Measuring microphone
Figure 4-98. Cutter Belt Tension Check

7. Remove the Cutter Unit. (P. 261)

8. Loosen the screw that secures the pulley of the Cutter Unit.
9. Tighten the screw while pulling the belt with whole pulley.
10. Install the Cutter Unit. (P. 261)
Return to Step 3.
Cutter Unit
Pulley
Figure 4-99. Cutter Belt Tension Adjustment

11. Click [Finish].

4.13.10 Suction Check & Adjustment PREPARATION
REQUIRED TOOLS Create the following items for the check and adjustment.
 Plastic tube of 3.2 to 3.5 mm inside diameter  Measurement jig

(Soft and clear tube is recommended.) 1. Put a small amount of water into the plastic tube.
2. Attach and secure the plastic tube to the plate with the tape.
C A U T IO N The edge of the tube has to be flat. If the edge of the tube cut by the
3. Mark the position of the water surface on the plate with the marking pen.
scissors is not flat, air may be leaked and the suction power may not
be measured correctly.
Plate for mounting the tube
Tapes
 Ruler of about 10 cm length
 Plate for mounting the tube (e.g. CD case)
 Tape
 Marking pen
 Water
 Paper: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)
(16 inches)
STANDARD VALUE
 25  2 mm (250  20Pa)
Plastic tube
Markings
EXECUTION MODE
Figure 4-100. Creating the measurement jig
Normal Mode  Paper for clogging the sucking hole
Cut the paper into 41cm x 7 cm size.

PROCEDURE 8. Click [Run].

9. Measure the rise distance of water surface.
2. Press [Paper Source ] to select cut sheets.
3. Press [Paper Set] to unlock the paper pressure.
5. Insert the paper to the Printer Cover Sensor to turn the sensor ON. Within 12.5 1 mm
(25 2mm/2)
C H E C K Insert the sheet to the position shown in Figure 4-101 and press
P O IN T [Paper Set] to lock the paper presser. Make sure to follow the
following points.
 Place it with the gloss side up
 Do not close the sucking hole on the left end
Measurement jig
6. Push the tube strongly against the sucking hole on the left end.
Figure 4-102. Measuring the surface
Measurement jig
10. Double the value measured in Step 9 (The water surface in the tube on the right
rises, and the one on the left lowers. Summing up the moved distances of the water
surfaces can provide the result.) Check the result if it is within the standard.
11. Click [Read].
Paper 12. Input the adjustment value. Input the value as 1 mm=1% so that it will be within
the standard value.
14. Remove the measurement jig and paper.
Sucking hole on the left end 15. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-101. Checking the suction power
7. Start the Service Program and select Suction Check & Adjustment.

4.14 Boards Related Checks and Adjustments
4.14.1 RTC&USB ID
EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
WRITING RTC&USB ID PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select RTC&USB ID.
3. Verify or input the date and time.
4. Input the 10-digit serial number of the printer.
USB ID is automatically created according to the serial number.
5. Click [Write] to input the RTC onto the NVRAM on the new Main Board.
6. Click [Finish].
C A U T IO N If the printer is turned OFF and back ON after changing the USB
ID, the computer (Windows) detects the USB port used to connect Figure 4-103. [RTC&USB ID] Screen
the printer as a new port and automatically copies the printer
driver as xxxx (Printer Name). If you need to perform another
adjustment using this tool, select the “copy x” driver next time.
ADJUSTMENT Boards Related Checks and Adjustments 425

4.14.2 Serial Number Check & Input

EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Serial Number Check & Input.
3. Enter a 10-digit serial number of the printer, and click [Write].
The serial number is written to the NVRAM on the Main Board.
4. When you click [Read], the serial number written on the NVRAM is
automatically read and displayed on the screen.
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-104. [Serial Number Check & Input] Screen

4.14.3 AID Function Check 7. Turn the printer OFF to finish the adjustment.
Table 4-11. Troubleshooting

C A U T IO N Before this check, make sure to perform a nozzle check to confirm
that there is no missing dot (P. 374). NG type Check item Remedy
OK Go to Step 6
 There is missing dot: Execute the
cleaning.
NG1 Perform a nozzle check.
PROCEDURE  There is NO missing dot: Replace
the AID Board.
1. Turn the printer ON. Check the harness (between the
NG2 IS unit and the AID Board) for Replace the harness if it is broken.
2. Perform a nozzle check to confirm that there is no nozzle clogging.
any abnormality.
3. Start the Service Program and select [ADJUSTMENT]. NG3 --- Replace the AID Board (P. 192).
4. Select AID Function Check.
Figure 4-105. [AID Function Check] Screen

5. Click [Run].
The check result appears after a while. Then take an appropriate remedy
referring to the Table 4-11 according to the result.
6. Click [Finish].

Table 4-11. Troubleshooting

NG type Check item Remedy
(20h) Check the connection of FFC
 Connect the FFC correctly.
(between the AID Board to Main
 If not improved, replace the AID
(21h) Board) if there is any slant
Board (P. 192).
connection or damage.
Check if any foreign material is  Remove it if any.
(22h) attached in the cap or on the  If not improved, replace the IS
Printhead. unit (P. 266)/Printhead (P. 265).
Check if any other mechanical error
Recover from the currently occurring
(24h) is occurring.
NG4 error.
Example: Cover open error
1. Check if the Printhead is correctly
installed.
2. Check the harness (between the IS  Re-install the Printhead.
unit and the AID Board) for any  Replace the harness if it is broken.
(25h) abnormality such as breaking of  Remove the foreign material.
wire.  If not improved, replace the IS
3. Check if any foreign material is unit (P. 266)/Printhead (P. 265).
attached in the cap or on the
Printhead.
Check the connection of FFC
If there is a slant connection of FFC,
(between the AID Board to Main
NG5 replace both the FFC and the AID
Board) if there is any slant
Board together.
connection or damage.

4.14.4 MAC Address Check & Input 4. Enter the MAC address indicated on the MAC address label attached on the Board
Tray, and click [Write].
EXECUTION MODE
C A U T IO N Click the [Write] button only once. It takes about two and a half
Serviceman Mode minutes to restart the network firmware, so wait for a while until
the firmware restarts, then move on to the next step.
PROCEDURE
1. Connect the printer to the computer with USB cable and network cable together.
3. Start the Service Program and select MAC Address Check & Input. Front Cover
MAC address label
Figure 4-107. MAC address label

5. Click [Read].
The written MAC address is displayed in about two minutes.
6. Confirm the displayed MAC address and the address on the label are the same.
7. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-106. [MAC Address Check & Input] Screen

4.14.5 USB Port and Network Communication Check

PROCEDURE TO CHECK THE USB CONNECTION STATUS

2. Start the Service Program and select USB Port and Network Communication
Check.
3. Select USB Communication Check.
4. Click [Run].
When the communication is available, the LCD is blinking a few times.
5. Click [Finish].
PROCEDURE TO CHECK THE NETWORK CONNECTION STATUS

2. Start the Service Program and select USB Port and Network Communication
Check.
3. Select IP Address Communication Check.
4. Enter the IP address of the printer, and click [Run].
When the network communication is available, the LCD is blinking a few times. Figure 4-108. [USB Port and Network Communication Check] Screen
5. Click [Finish].

4.14.6 Default Reset

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE
step 1. to step 2. is only Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910. For SC-P5000 Series, perform
from step 3.
1. Turn the printer ON in the Maintenance Mode.

Turn the printer ON while pressing [Pause/Cancel].
2. Select Default Panel and execute it.
The setting set with the Control Panel will be reset to the default.
3. Start the Service Program and select Default Reset.
4. Click [Run].
User job history will be reset.
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-109. [Default Reset] Screen

4.14.7 Operation Panel Check (Buttons & LCD) 4.14.7.1 Button Operation Check
EXECUTION MODE EXECUTION MODE
Serviceman Mode Serviceman Mode
PROCEDURE PROCEDURE
1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. 1. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode.
Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK]. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK].
2. Select SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment LCD RGB Check. 2. Select SELF TESTING Mecha Adjustment Panel Check.
3. Select each color (Red, Green, Blue) in order, and press [Menu ]. 3. Press the button you want to check the function, and check if the button name you
The selected color will be displayed on the LCD. Check if there is no missing dot. pressed matches the name on the Panel displayed.
4. To select the next color, press [Pause/Cancel] or [Paper Source ].

Pause
LCD RGB Check

Red
Green
Blue
RLS
Figure 4-110. Color LCD display check
BK Change Cutter
Figure 4-111. Button and panel display

4.14.8 Color Mode Settings (SC-P5000 Series)

Set the color mode of LLK/V ink when replacing the main board (NYRAM backup
NG).
PROCEDURE
Start from Step 5 when working according to the procedure for Main Board NVRAM
BackUp NG.
1. Click [ADJUSTMENTS (Sequence)] from the main menu.

2. Select Boards Related Parts, and click [OK].
3. Select Main Board (NVRAM Backup NG), and click [OK].
4. Select Color Mode Settings.
5. Select LGY ink mode or V ink mode according to the installed ink cartridge.
6. Click [Run].
7. When the confirmation screen for the ink mode appears, click the [OK] button.
Then, the color mode is written to the printer.
Figure 4-112. Color Mode Settings Screen

4.15 Other Printer Checks and Adjustments
4.15.1 Motor Measurement Adjustment

EXECUTION MODE
Normal Mode
PROCEDURE

2. Start the Service Program and select Motor Measurement Adjustment.
3. Select the item to execute Motor Measurement Adjustment.
4. Click [Run].
5. Since there is an error, execute the remedy responding to the NG display.
NG Display Remedy
Current_H Figure 4-113. [Motor Measurement Adjustment] Screen
Since the belt tension may not be proper, execute CR Belt
Current_L
Adjustment (p. 359) or PF Belt Adjustment (p. 406)
Current_chk
Fuka_kc Since the motor may not operate correctly, check the connection of
Fuka_kd the motor and repair the error if any. If the error still occurs, replace
I_cur_chk the motor.
After taking the above measure, return to Step 2 to adjust again.

6. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT Other Printer Checks and Adjustments 434

4.15.2 Sensor Check  Confirmation method per part
This menu checks if the sensor operates normally. Click [Run] to switch the Sensor Check screen as follows.
 Preparation  Sensor with shading object: 01h

 Sensor without shading object: 00h
C A U T IO N  Make sure to execute Sensor Check after the printer is fully
activated. The result is not displayed if the check is executed
With shading object Without shading object
while the printer is not fully activated.
 Make sure to turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. If Shading object
the printer is turned ON in the Normal Mode, an error occurs
such as when opening/closing the cover and the Sensor Check Sensor
cannot be executed.

Screen display Screen display
2. Start the Service Program and select Sensor Check. 01h 00h
Figure 4-114. Sensor Check

3. Refer to Table 4-12 and perform the test per repaired part.
Table 4-12. Sensor Check
Confirmation Screen
Repaired Part Procedure
Display
1. Select [PE Sensor]. The displayed value is

as the following.
PE Sensor 2. Insert/remove paper from the manual paper
Paper inserted < Paper
insertion opening.
removed
1. Select [2nd PE Sensor]. Pushed (With Paper):

01h
2nd PE Sensor 2. Remove the Rear Unit. (P. 171)
Released (No Paper):
3. Push/Release the actuator. 00h
Range of A/D value:
59<n<237
1. Select [Thermistor (Printhead)]. (The smaller the value
Thermistor 2. Confirm the value (A/D value) displayed on is, the higher the
(Printhead) the screen, and compare it with the threshold temperature becomes.
value on the right column. The values out of the
range are regarded as
the fatal error.

Table 4-12. Sensor Check Table 4-12. Sensor Check

Confirmation Screen Confirmation Screen
Repaired Part Procedure Repaired Part Procedure
Display Display
Range of A/D value: 1. Select [Pickup Unit Sensor].
44<n<240 2. Remove the Right Cover. (P. 165)
1. Select [Thermistor (Main Board)]. (The smaller the value 3. Rotate the gear shown in the picture below
Thermistor 2. Confirm the value (A/D value) displayed on is, the higher the manually to shade or transmit the sensor.
(Main Board) the screen, and compare it with the threshold temperature becomes.
value on the right column. The values out of the
range are regarded as Overhead view Sensor Interrupted:
the fatal error. Pickup Unit 01h
Gear
1. Select [Paper Thickness Sensor 1]. Sensor Sensor not Interrupted:
Sensor Interrupted:
2. Remove the Upper Rear Cover. (P. 223) 00h
Paper Thickness 01h
Sensor 1 3. Insert/Remove paper into/from the
Sensor not Interrupted:
transmission and reception section of the
00h
sensor.
1. Select [Paper Thickness Sensor 2]. Pickup Unit Sensor
Sensor Interrupted:
2. Remove the Upper Rear Cover. (P. 223)
Paper Thickness 01h
Sensor 2 3. Insert/Remove paper into/from the
transmission and reception section of the
00h
sensor.
Sensor Interrupted
(Guide Up):
Paper Guide 1. Select [Paper Guide Sensor]. 01h
Sensor 2. Open and close the Paper Guide a few times. Sensor not Interrupted
(Guide Down):
00h
1. Select [Maintenance Box 2 Lever Sensor].
Maintenance Box Locked:01h
2. Switch the position of the lock lever of the
2 Lever Sensor Unlocked:00h
Maintenance Box2 to lock or unlock.


Display Display
1. Select [Retard Roller Sensor]. 1. Select [Eject Star Wheels Position Sensor].
2. Remove the Right Cover. (P. 165) 2. Remove the Right Upper Cover. (P. 164)
3. Rotate the gear shown in the picture below 3. Press the [F11] key to unlock the CR Unit.
manually to shade or transmit the sensor. 4. Move the CR Unit to the left.
5. Rotate the gear shown in the picture below
Overhead view manually to shade or transmit the sensor.
Sensor Interrupted:
Retard Roller 01h
Gear
Sensor Sensor not Interrupted:
Transmission part
00h
Front
Sensor Interrupted:
Eject Star Wheels 01h
Position Sensor Sensor not Interrupted:
Retard Roller Sensor
00h
1. Select [Assist Roller Sensor].

2. Remove the Right Cover. (P. 165)
3. Rotate the gear shown in the picture below
manually to shade or transmit the sensor.
Gear
Overhead view
Sensor Interrupted:
Assist Roller Gear 01h
Sensor Sensor not Interrupted:
00h
1. Select [Edge Release Sensor].
Sensor Interrupted:
Edge Release 01h
Sensor 3. Rotate the gear with a thin stick to move the
shading part of the gear to the sensor position
Assist Roller Sensor 00h
or move it away from the sensor position.
1. Select [Paper Cassette Sensor]. Sensor Interrupted

Paper Cassette (With Cassette):01h
2. Remove the paper cassette.
Sensor Sensor not Interrupted
3. Push/Release the actuator.
(No Cassette):00h


Display Display
1. Select [Paper Empty Sensor]. Sensor not Interrupted
2. Remove the paper cassette. Pushed (With Paper): Front Cover 1. Select [Front Cover Sensor]. (No cover):01h
Paper Empty 3. While pushing the actuator of the paper 01h Sensor 2. Remove/Install the Front Cover. Sensor Interrupted
Sensor cassette sensor, insert/remove paper into/from Released (No Paper): (With cover):00h
the transmission and reception section of the 00h
sensor.
1. Select [Rear Unit Sensor].
Unit Not Detected:01h
Rear Unit Sensor 2. Remove the Rear Unit.
Unit Detected:00h
3. Push/Release the actuator.
Pushed (With Paper):
1. Select [Roll Sensor].
01h
Roll Sensor 2. Insert/Remove paper from the roll paper
Released (No Paper):
insertion opening.
00h
1. Select [Roll Feeding Sensor].
2. Remove the Left Roll Cover. (P. 177) Sensor Interrupted:
Roll Feeding 3. Install the roll unit to the printer. 01h
Sensor 4. Rotate the shading plate manually to move it Sensor not Interrupted:
to the shading position or the transmission 00h
position.
Sensor Interrupted:
1. Select [Roll Unit Sensor]. 01h
Roll Unit Sensor
2. Push/Release the actuator. Sensor not Interrupted:
00h
1. Select [Roll Lock Sensor].
2. Rotate the pinion gear of the roll feeding Gears on the rear.:01h
Roll Lock Sensor
motor manually to move the gear to the front Gears on the front.:00h
or the rear.
1. Select [Cutter HP Sensor].
Not in Home Position:
2. Remove the Front Cover. (P. 168)
01h
Cutter HP Sensor 3. Set the cutter to the home position (HP) or
In Home Position.:
move it away from the home position
00h
manually.


Display Display
Sensor Interrupted 1. Select [Wiper & Cap Sensor 2].
Printer Cover 1. Select [Printer Cover Sensor]. (Cover Open):01h 2. Rotate the gear manually to move the Wiper
Sensor 2. Open/Close the Printer Cover. Sensor not Interrupted to the “Wiping Start” position.
(Cover Closed):00h
1. Select [IS Unit HP Sensor 1]. “Wiping Start” position
IS Unit HP Sensor Cap: 01h
2. Press the [F11] key to uncap the Printhead.
1 Uncap: 00h
Or press the [F12] key to cap.
1. Select [IS Unit HP Sensor 2].
IS Unit HP Sensor Cap: 01h
2. Press the [F11] key to uncap the Printhead. Wiper
2 Uncap: 00h
Or press the [F12] key to cap. “Wiping Start” position:
1. Select [Wiper & Cap Sensor 1]. Wiper & Cap 01h
Sensor 2 3. Rotate the gear manually to move the Wiper “Wiping End position”:
2. Rotate the gear manually to move the Wiper
to the “Wiping Start” position. to the “Wiping End - Cleaning Wiper” 00h
position.
“Wiping Start” position
“Wiping End position”
Wiper
Wiper
“Wiping Start” position:
Wiper & Cap 01h
Sensor 1 3. Rotate the gear manually to move the Wiper “Wiping End position”:
to the “Wiping End - Cleaning Wiper” 00h Sensor not Interrupted
1. Select [Right IC Sensor]. (Cover Open):01h
position. Right IC Sensor
2. Open/Close the Right IC Cover. Sensor not Interrupted
“Wiping End position” (Cover Open):00h
Sensor not Interrupted
Wiper 1. Select [Left IC Sensor]. (Cover Open):01h
Left IC Sensor
2. Open/Close the Left IC Cover. Sensor Interrupted
(Cover Closed):00h
1. Select [Release Sensor].
2. Remove the Left Cover. (P. 163)
Sensor Interrupted:01h
Release Sensor 3. Rotate the pinion gear of the Release Motor
Sensor Interrupted:00h
to move the shading plate to the shading
position or transmission position.

4.15.3 Encoder Check

This menu checks if the encoder operates normally.
 Preparation

2. Start the Service Program and select Encoder Check.
3. Refer to the following list and perform the test per repaired part.
 Confirmation method per part
Repaired Part Procedure Confirmation Method

1. Confirm that the value of CR displayed on the panel is changed by the operation of
1. Select [CR Encoder]. the CR Unit.
CR Encoder
2. Move the CR Unit manually. 2. Decide the origin and operate the CR Unit. Then, confirm that the value displayed
on the panel is returned to the original value (value of the origin).
1. Confirm that the value of the PF displayed on the panel is increased by rotating the
1. Select [PF Encoder]. pinion gear clockwise and decreased by rotating it counterclockwise.
PF Encoder
2. Rotate the pinion gear of the PF Motor manually. 2. Decide the origin and rotate the PF Scale. Then, confirm that the value displayed
on the panel is returned to the original value (value of the origin).
1. Select [Release Motor Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the Release Motor displayed on the panel is changed by the
Release Motor
2. Rotate the scale of the Release motor manually. rotation of the scale of the Release Motor.
1. Select [ASF Motor Assy Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the ASF displayed on the panel is changed by the rotation of
ASF motor
2. Rotate the scale of the ASF motor manually. the scale of the ASF motor.
1. Select [ASF Sub Motor Assy Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the ASF sub motor displayed on the panel is changed by the
ASF sub motor
2. Rotate the scale of the ASF sub motor manually. rotation of the scale of the ASF sub motor.
1. Select [Edge Release Assy Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the edge guide displayed on the panel is changed by the
Edge Release Assy
2. Rotate the scale of the Edge Release Assy manually. rotation of the scale of the Edge Release Assy.
1. Select [Paper Press Motor Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the roll feeding motor displayed on the panel is changed by
Roll feeding motor
2. Rotate the scale of the roll feeding motor manually. the rotation of the scale of the roll feeding motor.
1. Select [ATC Motor Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the ATC motor displayed on the panel is changed by the
ATC motor
2. Rotate the scale of the ATC motor manually. rotation of the scale of the ATC motor.
1. Select [Cutter Motor Assy]. Confirm that the value of the cutter displayed on the panel is changed by the
Cutter motor
2. Operate the cutter manually. operation of the cutter.
1. Select [IS Motor Assy Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the maintenance displayed on the panel is changed by the
IS motor Assy
2. Rotate the gear. rotation of the gear.

Repaired Part Procedure Confirmation Method

1. Select [Decompression Pump Encoder]. Confirm that the value of the Decompression Pump displayed on the panel is changed
Decompression pump unit
2. Rotate the scale of the Decompression Pump manually. by the rotation of the scale of the decompression pump unit.

4.16 SpectroProofer Related Adjustments 16. Turn the printer OFF and finish the adjustment.
Use this to check that each part and function of the SpectroProofer operates properly.
4.16.1 SpectroProofer Sensor Check

4.16.1.1 Backing Sensor Check
1. Remove the Backing.
2. Install the mounter on the printer.
4. Check if "SpectroProofer Error 01" occurs.
 If the error occurs: Go to Step 5.
 If the error does not occur: Go to Step 14.
Figure 4-115. [ON] Confirmation Screen
6. Attach the backing.
8. Connect the computer and the printer with the USB cable.
9. Start the Service Program.
10. Select SpectroProofer Sensor Check from the inspection program.
11. Select Backing Sensor Check.
12. Click [Run].
13. Confirm that [ON] is displayed on the confirmation screen and click [OK].
 [ON] is displayed: Go to Step 15
 [ON] is NOT displayed: Go to Step 14
14. Check if there is any abnormality in the connection or routing of the Backing
Sensor. If no abnormality is found, replace the Backing Sensor (P. 305).
Return to Step 10 to check again.
15. Click [Finish].
ADJUSTMENT SpectroProofer Related Adjustments 442

4.16.1.2 Thermistor Check

5. Select SpectroProofer Sensor Check from the inspection program.
6. Select Thermistor Check.
7. Click [Run].
The temperature will be displayed.
8. Check that there is no abnormality on the temperature display.
Figure 4-116. Confirmation Screen
9. Check the wiring of the Thermistor. If there is no abnormality on the wiring,
replace the Thermistor (P. 300). Return to Step 5 to check again.
10. Click [Finish].

4.16.2 SpectroProofer Movement Check 4.16.2.2 CR Function Check

4.16.2.1 Fan Function Check
1. Install the mounter on the printer. Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ] + [Paper Feed ] + [OK].
2. Turn the printer ON in the Serviceman Mode. 3. Connect the computer and the printer with the USB cable.
5. Select SpectroProofer Movement Check from the inspection program.
6. Select CR Function Check.
7. Click [Run].
6. Select Fan Function Check.
The carriage starts moving and the result will be displayed.
7. Click [Run].
The Drying Fan starts rotating.
 Fan noise can be heard.: Go to Step 9
8. Check that there is no foreign material on the CR shaft or the upper side of the
 Fan noise cannot be heard.: Go to Step 8 paper pressing plate. If there is no foreign material, replace the CR Motor (P. 308).
8. Check the wiring of the Drying Fan. If there is no abnormality on the wiring, Return to Step 7 to check again.
replace the Drying Fan (P. 301).
9. Click [Finish].
9. Click [Finish].

4.16.2.3 Paper Press Function Check

6. Select Paper Press Function Check.
7. Click [Run].
The paper pressing plate operates and the result will be displayed.
8. Check the wiring of the Paper Pressing Motor. If there is no abnormality on the
wiring, replace the Paper Pressing Motor (P. 302).
9. Click [Finish].

4.16.3 SpectroProofer Measurement Precision Check  CR Direction Color Measurement Check

(Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 only) 1. Load paper.
2. Select CR Direction Color Measurement Check.
PAPER USED 3. Click [Run].
Printing the pattern and calibration are performed automatically and the result
 Size: 16 inches will be displayed.
 Type: Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)  The result is OK: Go to Step 5
 The result is NG: Go to Step 4
EXECUTION MODE 4. Check that there is no foreign material on the CR shaft or the upper side of the
paper pressing plate. If there is no foreign material, replace the CR Motor (P.
Normal Mode 308). Return to Step 2 to check again.
5. Click [Finish].
PREPARATION 6. Turn the printer OFF and finish the adjustment.

4. Select SpectroProofer Measurement Precision Check from the inspection
program.
Figure 4-117. Print Pattern

 PF Direction Color Measurement Check

1. Load paper.
2. Select PF Direction Color Measurement Check.
3. Click [Run].
Print the pattern and calibration automatically and the result will be displayed.
 The result is OK: Go to Step 5
 The result is NG: Go to Step 4
4. Check if the Color Measurement Device is mounted correctly. Return to Step
2.
5. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-119. Confirmation Screen
Figure 4-118. Print Pattern

4.16.4 SpectroProofer Serial Number Check & Input

4. Select SpectroProofer Serial Number Check & Input.
5. Input the serial number of the SpectroProofer.
6. Click [Write].
7. Click [Read] to check the information.
8. Click [Finish].
Figure 4-120. Input Screen

4.17 SpectroProofer Checker (SC-P5000 Series) PROCEDURE

4.17.1 Inspection Outline
2. Connect the printer to the computer with USB cable.
Carry it out to check if the SpectroProofer works normally.
In addition, the measured values can be compared between the printers with the same 3. Double-click "SpectroProoferChecker.exe" to run the tool.
ink color configuration. 4. Select [EPSON SC-P5000 Series] from the Printer List.
5. Click [Connection Test].
PURPOSE
When “OK” appears, go to the next step.
When an error of the SpectroProofer occurs, determines it is caused by either of the
RIP or the hardware. If “NG” appears, check the connection between the PC and the printer, the
SpectroProofer mounter and the printer, and between the mounter and the
calibrator (ILS30 EP). If not improved, the printer, calibrator, mounter, or USB
PRINCIPLE Cable may be abnormal. Replace their hardware.
This tool operates the standard sequence of the calibrator. In this operation, you can 6. Select the measurement condition (M0 to M2). Normally, select “M1” for it.
identify the problem is attributable to either of the RIP or the hardware.
7. Click [Measurement Test].
4.17.2 Inspection Procedure C H E C K Click [Cancel] to stop printing during measurement.

P O IN T
 System Requirements
OS: Windows XP or later
 Requirements for inspection
When “OK” appears, the tool are measuring normally.
• Use a roll paper 210 mm wide or wider. => The RIP has a problem.
• When PK is selected for the black ink, use photo paper. If “NG” appears, the tool cannot measure normally.
• When MK is selected for the black ink, use matte paper. => Any of the hardware; printer, calibrator, mounter, or USB Cable have a
problem. Replace their hardware.
 Check before inspection
• The printer driver for SC-P5000 Series should be installed.
• Delete “debug_accel.log” in the following folder if it exists.
SpectroProoferChecker > Library > ACCEL
ADJUSTMENT SpectroProofer Checker (SC-P5000 Series) 449

8. Click [Save] and save the measured values to your desired folder.
C A U T IO N Measured values may vary depending on the conditions such as

paper and ink you use, or the temperature and humidity.
PROCEDURE TO COMPARE THE MEASURED VALUES
C A U T IO N When perform the comparison, use the same printers with the
same ink configuration (PK/MK, LLK/V).
1. Click [Load] to read the file that stores the measured values you compare.
2. Click [Compare] and compare the measured results. The meaning of comparison
result is as follows.
• “deltaE_95%”: Figure 4-121. SpectroProofer Checker Screen
Maximum color difference of up to 95% among all the patches
• “deltaE_average”:
The average value of color differences of all the patches
ADJUSTMENT SpectroProofer Checker (SC-P5000 Series) 450

CHAPTER
5
MAINTENANCE

5.1 Overview C A U T IO N  Ensure sufficient work space for servicing.

 Locate the printer on a stable and flat surface.
This chapter provides information on how to maintain the printer in its optimum  Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910 weighs approx. 52kg. When the
operating condition. printer needs to be moved, make sure to lift or carry the printer
with two or more people, holding the printer by its holding
Basically, servicing on the printer should be performed on-site. Be sure to strictly positions as shown below.
observe the following precautions when servicing to avoid an accident or injury
causing the user trouble.
W A R N IN G  The power switch is installed on the secondary side of the

power circuit, so power is always supplied to the power supply
circuit even when the switch is OFF unless the power cord is
unplugged from the wall power outlet. Unless otherwise stated
(for printing or operation checks), be sure to unplug the power
cord from the wall outlet before disassembling or assembling
the printer to prevent electric shock and damage to the circuit.
 The Front Sensor provided for detecting open/close status of
the Printer Cover also acts as a safety interlock switch. Never
disable the switch function to prevent possible injury.
 A lithium battery is mounted on the Main Board (control
circuit) for memory backup. Be sure to observe the following
precautions when handling the Main Board.
 Be careful not to short the electrode of the battery.
 When replacing the battery, make sure to insert it in correct
orientation.
 Never heat the battery or plunge it into the flames.
 Do not put the Main Board directly on conductive materials.
 Be extremely careful not to get the ink into your eye or let it
come into contact with your skin. If it happens, wash out your
eye or skin with water immediately. If any abnormality is  When using compressed air products; such as air duster, for
found, contact a physician. cleaning during repair and maintenance, the use of such
products containing flammable gas is prohibited.
 Be sure to spread a sheet of paper or cloth on the work space
before removing any ink-path-related parts or components to
keep the space from being soiled with leaked ink.
MAINTENANCE Overview 452

C A U T IO N  Do not touch electrical circuit boards with bare hands as the

elements on the board are so sensitive that they can be easily
damaged by static electricity. If you have to handle the boards
with bare hands, use static electricity discharge equipment such
as anti-static wrist straps.
 When the printer has to be operated with the covers removed,
take extra care not to get your fingers or clothes caught in
moving parts such as the fan unit.
 The cutter blade is razor-sharp. Be especially careful when
handling the cutter.
 Carbide blade employed as the cutter blade is hard but brittle.
Be careful not to hit it against metal parts of the printer since it
can be easily damaged.
 When the printer needs to be repacked for transportation after
being used, make sure to follow the steps below after turning
the power OFF.
1. Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
2. Leave the ink cartridges installed in the printer.
3. Repack the printer using the packaging box, cushioning
materials and protective equipment indicated in the
unpacking guide.
MAINTENANCE Overview 453

5.2 Setting Up/Storing the Printer 5.2.2 Storing the Printer and Cleaning the Ink Path
STORING
5.2.1 Setting Up
When storing the printer, make sure to leave the ink cartridges installed and place it on
Make sure to open up the following installation room for the printer so as to maintain
a horizontal surface, and also inform the user on the following cautions.
appropriate operation and usability.
 When storing the printer for a long time
 Print at least once a week to prevent clogging of the nozzles.
 Remove the paper.
 Check that the Printhead is capped properly.
 Close the covers.
 If it is not used for more than six months
Make sure to print a nozzle check pattern and check for clogging of the printhead.
If any clogging can be seen, carry out a head cleaning.
C H E C K  When activating “Auto Nozzle Check” in the panel settings, the

P O IN T printer will carry out head cleaning automatically.
 After performing the head cleaning a few times, try turning off
the printer and leaving it overnight or longer, so that the ink
Figure 5-1. Installation Room Requirement
may dissolve and the clogging might be improved.
INK PATH CLEANING
When storing the product for a long time, perform the cleaning of the ink path
following the procedure in "4.12.6 Tubes Cleaning (and Ink Charge per Two Rows)"
(p402).
MAINTENANCE Setting Up/Storing the Printer 454

5.3 Transportation SETTING UP THE PRINTER AFTER TRANSPORTATION
1. Make sure that the installation site is proper.

C A U T IO N  Make sure to keep the ink cartridge installed so as to prevent
ink from leaking or the printhead from drying. 2. Connect the power cord, and turn the printer on.
 Do not touch any parts other than those must be repaired to
3. Perform a nozzle check.
avoid any damage to the printer.
PREPARATION FOR TRANSPORTATION
1. Turn off the printer, and confirm that the printer is off. Then remove all the cables.
2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove the Auto Color Measurement Device.
MOVING/TRANSPORTING THE PRINTER
When you transport the printer, be sure to repack the printer using the original box and
packing materials.
C A U T IO N When moving or transporting the printer, keep it flat. Do not tilt it

or turn it upside down to prevent ink from leaking.
MAINTENANCE Transportation 455

5.4 Cleaning CR Unit
5.4.1 Main Unit

CHECKING AND CLEANING THE HEAD
If the surface of the printed paper is smeared, follow the steps below to make sure the
print head surface is clean and has no foreign objects on.

Turn the power ON while pressing [Menu ], [Paper Feed ] and [OK] Mirror
button.
2. Select SELF TESTING → Mecha Adjustment → CR Un Cap.
3. Press [OK] button while [Enter] Un Cap is displayed.
The carriage unit is unlocked.
Figure 5-2. Setting a Mirror
7. Remove the Cutter. (p151)
8. Remove the Cover Holder. (Step 10 to Step 12 in 3.4.8.3 Cutter HP Sensor (p259))
9. Set a mirror at the Full side.
10. Move the CR Unit to the Full side.
11. Light through the opening in the Cover Holder to check that the print head surface
is clean and has no foreign objects on.
12. Remove dirt or foreign objects with a cleaning stick, if any.
Light
Cover Holder
Figure 5-3. Checking the Head Surface
MAINTENANCE Cleaning 456

CLEANING THE WIPER/FLUSHING BOX
1. Wet the tip of a cleaning stick with pure water.

Flushing Box
C H E C K Step 1 is easier to do with a wet cloth on a plastic wrap

P O IN T
Cleaning Stick Wrap Wiper
Wet Cloth
Figure 5-4. Cleaning the Wiper/Flushing Box
C A U T IO N  Do not drop water inside the printer.

 If anything adhere to the cleaning stick, take it off by a wet
cloth before using.
 Do not touch other parts of the printer with the cleaning stick.
2. Turn the printer ON. Start the Service Program.

3. Perform “Wiper and Cap Cleaning & Exchange (p395)”, and move the Wiper to
the position to clean.
6. Clean the Wiper with a cleaning stick.
7. Check the Flushing Box. If it is badly dirty, clean it with a cleaning stick.

CLEANING BY FEEDING PAPER C H E C K Clean the roll paper feed slot using a cleaning sheet approximately
P O IN T once a year.
 Cleaning the roller
When dirt on some roller is attached on the printed paper, make sure to clean the soiled
roller by feeding/ejecting plain paper as follows.
1. Turn on the printer, and set the roll paper of 17-inch width. 1. Turn on the printer by pressing the [Power] button.
2. Press the [Paper Feed (Forward)] button to feed the paper. 2. Press the [Paper Source] button to display the Paper Type Menu.
3. Repeat feeding until the paper is not soiled with ink. 3. Press the [Paper Feed (backward)]/[Paper Feed (forward)] buttons to select Roll
Paper / Cut or Roll Paper / No Cut, and then press the [OK] button.
 Cleaning the paper cassette printing path
4. [Paper Set] button
Follow the steps below to clean any soiled areas by outputting plain paper.
5. Open the roll paper cover.
1. Load A2 or 17 inch wide cut sheets in the paper cassette.
2. Check that the printer is turned on, and check that Cut Sheet is selected as the
paper type.
3. Press the [Paper Feed (backward)] button. Paper is ejected from the paper cassette.
 Cleaning the roll paper feed slot (SC-P5000 Series)
A cloth is attached to the roll paper feed slot, to catch paper particles and dust that are
adhered to the paper surface and edges.
Use the dedicated cleaning sheet in the following procedure to remove dust caught by
the cloth in the roll paper feed slot. Always use a new cleaning sheet.
Purchase a cleaning sheet, sold separately, when the supplied cleaning sheet has been Figure 5-5. Cleaning the roll paper feed slot
used.

7. Insert the cleaning sheet until it reaches the end of the roll paper feed slot, and then
C H E C K Close this while the paper support is open.
P O IN T pull it out. Repeat this two or three times.
To clean the roll paper feed slot from end to end, do it several times on the right
side, center, and left side sections.
6. Remove the protective sheet that is on the cleaning sheet.

The gray area indicated by A is adhesive face. Do not touch it with your hands or
anything else.
Figure 5-7. Cleaning the roll paper feed slot
8. Press the [Paper Set] button. If you want to stop a job as is, press the [Power]
button on the printer to turn off the power.
C H E C K  If the cleaning sheet gets fed, press the [Paper Set] button and
P O IN T then remove the cleaning sheet.
 You cannot reuse a cleaning sheet that has been used once.
Figure 5-6. Cleaning the roll paper feed slot

CLEANING THE PLATEN CLEANING THE PLATEN’S SUCKING HOLES
If the back of the printed paper is smeared, make sure to clean the platen as follows. If the paper feeding is unstable (if some floating or skewing of the paper can be seen),
check the sucking holes on the platen for paper dust clogging there. If there are some
1. Turn off the printer. clogging, clean the holes as follows.
2. Open the printer cover and use a soft clean cloth to clean away any dust or dirt.
1. Turn off the printer.
If there is a serious problem of dirt, clean it using a soft, clean cloth dampened
with a mild detergent. Then, wipe the platen with a dry, soft cloth. 2. Open the printer cover. Push in the accumulated foreign material such as paper
dust into the holes using something like a toothpick.
C H E C K Always wipe it from back to front in order not to spread the dirt.
P O IN T
Figure 5-9. Cleaning the sucking holes
Figure 5-8. Cleaning the platen
C A U T IO N Do not touch the feed rollers, waste ink pads (the parts marked
with gray in Figure 6-2), or ink tubes.

5.4.2 Auto Color Measurement Device Mounter CLEANING THE BACKING AND THE WHITE BASE TILE
CLEANING THE COLOR MEASUREMENT DEVICE 1. Remove the backing and the white base tile holder. (p289)
2. Remove the white base tile from the holder.
C A U T IO N  Never use flammable sprays near or inside the printer.
 Do not touch the lens of the Color Measurement Device.

2. Blow off dust and dirt from the Color Measurement Device lens with air.
Figure 5-11. Taking off the white base tile

3. Using soft and dry cloth, wipe off dirt on the surface of the backing and the white
base tile.
Figure 5-10. Cleaning the Color Measurement Device
Figure 5-12. Cleaning the backing and the white base tile

CLEANING THE PAPER PRESSING PLATE 3. Use a soft cloth dampened with a mild detergent to wipe off the dirt.
1. Turn off the printer. Open the front cover of the mounter.
2. Move the carriage to the left and lay the paper pressing plate toward you.
Figure 5-13. Lay the paper pressing plate Figure 5-14. Cleaning the paper pressing plate

CLEANING THE PAPER GUIDE UNIT
Paper dust accumulates as the auto cutter in the printer is used. Clean it regularly by
following procedure.
1. Remove the mounter. (p156)

2. Remove the paper guide unit.
3. Using soft and dry cloth, wipe off paper dust from the paper guide unit.
Figure 5-15. Cleaning the paper guide unit

5.5 Lubrication
LUBRICATION
This section describes necessary lubrication to maintain the functions and performance
of this printer. Make sure to properly lubricate the parts/units specified in this section
as necessary when replacing or maintaining them.
C A U T IO N  Make sure to perform the lubrication following the specified

lubrication points, lubricants, and amount. Otherwise, the
printer may not operate normally.
 When lubricating the originally installed parts, first wipe off
the old lubricant completely.
MAINTENANCE Lubrication 464

LUBRICATION POINTS LIST
Lubrication
Corresponding Part Lubrication Points Purpose/Timing Name of Lubricant Lubrication Tool Reference
No.
On the portion where it contacts with FRAME Part name:G-71
1-1 2 mm injector p.467
ASSEMBLY, MIDDLE, RIGHT Part code:1480655
On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 76.8, When an error occurs in paper feeding from
RIGHT ASF. Part name:G-71
1-2 Pickup Unit 2 mm injector p.467
On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 76.8, Part code:1480655
LEFT
Load reduction of SHAFT, ROLLER, Part name:G-71
1-3 On the bearings of the SHAFT, ROLLER, PICKUP 2 mm injector p.468
PICKUP. Part code:1480655
On the two portions where they contact with HOLDER, Part name:G-71
HOLDER, LEVER, Load reduction of the contacting points. 2 mm injector p.468
LEVER, EDGE GUIDE RELEASE Part code:1480655
2 EDGE GUIDE Lubricate when Paper Empty Sensor is
RELEASE replaced. Part name:G-71
On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 48 2 mm injector p.468
Part code:1480655
 On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, Load reduction of the contacting points.
HOLDER, SENSOR,
76.8, RIGHT Lubricate when Assist Roller Sensor, Retard Part name:G-71
3 RELEASE, ASF 2 mm injector p.469
 On the portion where it contacts with HOLDER, Roller Sensor, or Pickup Unit Sensor is Part code:1480655
UNIT
SENSOR, RELEASE, ASF replaced.
 On the portion where it contacts with MOUNTING  When an error occurs in release
SHAFT, RELEASE,
PLATE, ASSEMBLY, RELEASE, DRIVEN, LEFT operation. Part name:G-26
4 PAPER GUIDE, 2 mm injector p.469
 The shaft engaged with FRAME, MAIN  When an abnormal noise comes from the Part code:1080614
UPPER UNIT
 Cogs of SPUR GEAR, 22 release unit.
PAPER GUIDE, Part name:G-26
5 On the ribs of CAM, RELEASE, DRIVEN When an error occurs in PF operation. 2 mm injector p.470
UPPER UNIT Part code:1080614
6 Bearings of the PAPER GUIDE, REAR When an error occurs in PF operation. 2 mm injector p.470
REAR COVER Part code:1516265
On the shaft which is attached with SUPPORT ROD, Part name:G-84  2mm injector
7-1 p.471
SHAFT, CR Part code:1516265  Waste cloth
Part name:O-17 Container for O-17
7-2 Inside HOLDER, OIL PAD p.471
Load reduction and wear protection. Part code:1521154 oil
CR Unit
Lubricate when CR Unit is replaced. Part name:G-84
7-3 Inside HOLDER, OIL PAD 4 mm injector p.472
Part code:1516265
On the portion where it contacts with GUIDE BOARD, Part name:G-84
7-4 2 mm injector p.472
CR Part code:1516265

Lubrication
Corresponding Part Lubrication Points Purpose/Timing Name of Lubricant Lubrication Tool Reference
No.
 When an error occurs in CR operation.
PULLEY, DRIVEN On the shafts where it contacts with HOLDER, PULLEY, Part name:G-71
8  When an abnormal noise comes from the 2 mm injector p.473
UNIT CR of PUSH, PULLEY, DRIVEN Part code:1480655
CR Unit.
 Load reduction and wear protection.
 When an error occurs in paper feeding
9 Two hooks of Shaft Retard Reset from ASF. 2 mm injector p.473
LOWER UNIT Part code:1480655
 Lubricate when Retard Roller is
replaced.

[Lubrication 1-1] [Lubrication 1-2]
Part Name Pickup Unit Part Name Pickup Unit
On the portion where it contacts with FRAME ASSEMBLY, A: On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 76.8,
Lubrication Point
MIDDLE, RIGHT Lubrication Point RIGHT
B: On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 76.8, LEFT
Lubricants (Part Code) Grease G-71 (1480655)
Amount 2 mm once around the portion
Amount 2 mm once around the portion
Lubrication Tool 2 mm injector
Lubrication Manner Apply the specified amount with an injector.
Note Spread the lubricant evenly by rolling the lubricated part.
Lubrication Point B Lubrication Point A
Lubrication Point

[Lubrication 1-3] [Lubrication 2]
Part Name Pickup Unit Part Name HOLDER, LEVER, EDGE GUIDE RELEASE
Lubrication Point On the bearings of the SHAFT, ROLLER, PICKUP A: On the portion where contacts with HOLDER, LEVER, EDGE
Lubrication Point GUIDE RELEASE
B: On the portion where contacts with SPUR GEAR, 48
Amount 2 x 3 mm x 5 points
2 x 3 mm x 2 points
Amount
Lubrication Manner Apply the specified amount with an injector. 2 x 3 mm x 2 points
Note --- Lubrication Tool 2 mm injector
After lubricating Point B, spread the lubricant evenly by rolling

Lubrication Points
SPUR GEAR, 48.
Note
Lubrication Point B
Lubrication Point A

[Lubrication 3] [Lubrication 4]
Part Name HOLDER, SENSOR, RELEASE, ASF UNIT Part Name SHAFT, RELEASE, PAPER GUIDE, UPPER UNIT
A: On the portion where it contacts with SPUR GEAR, 76.8, A: On the portion where it contacts with MOUNTING PLATE,
RIGHT ASSEMBLY, RELEASE, DRIVEN, LEFT
Lubrication Point Lubrication Point
B: On the portion where it contacts with HOLDER, SENSOR, B: The shaft engaged with FRAME, MAIN
RELEASE, ASF C: Cogs of SPUR GEAR, 22
Lubricants (Part Code) Grease G-71 (1480655) Lubricants (Part Code) Grease G-26 (1080614)
Amount 2 x 3 mm x 2 points A, B:2 x once around x 2 portions
Amount
Lubrication Tool 2 mm injector C:2 x 2 mm x 1 portion
Lubrication Manner Apply the specified amount with an injector. Lubrication Tool 2 mm injector
After lubricating, spread the lubricant evenly by rolling SPUR Lubrication Manner Apply the specified amount with an injector.
GEAR. Note ---
Note
Lubrication Point C
Lubrication Point B
Lubrication Point A
Lubrication Point A Lubrication Point B

Part Name PAPER GUIDE, UPPER UNIT Part Name PAPER GUIDE, REAR COVER
Lubrication Point On the ribs of CAM, RELEASE, DRIVEN Lubrication Point Bearings of the PAPER GUIDE, REAR
2 x 10 mm x 4 points Amount 2 x 2 mm x 4 points

Amount
2 x 21 mm x 1 point
Note ---
Note ---
Lubrication Point A
Lubrication Point B
Lubrication Points Lubrication Points

Part Name CR Unit Part Name CR Unit
Lubrication Point On the shaft which is attached with SUPPORT ROD, SHAFT, CR Lubrication Point Inside HOLDER, OIL PAD
Lubricants (Part Code) Grease G-84 (1516265) Lubricants (Part Code) Oil O-17 (1521154)
Amount  2 x 8 mm x 4 points Amount 0.09cc +- 10%
 2 mm injector Lubrication Tool Container for Oil O-17

Lubrication Tool
 Waste cloth
Detach HOLDER, OIL PAD. (p209)
Apply the specified amount with an injector. Using the waste cloth, Place the Oil Pad in the container and pour in the specified amount
Lubrication Manner Lubrication Manner
spread the lubricant evenly around the shaft. of oil. After one minute of soaking, take out the Oil Pad and attach
to HOLDR, OIL PAD.
Note ---
Note ---
Lubrication Points
CR Unit
Lubrication Point

Part Name CR Unit Part Name CR Unit
Lubrication Point Inside HOLDER, OIL PAD Lubrication Point On the portion where it contacts with GUIDE BOARD, CR
Amount 0.3cc x 2 points Amount  2 x 6 mm x 1 point
Lubrication Tool 4 mm injector Lubrication Tool 2 mm injector
Detach HOLDER, OIL PAD. (p209) Apply the specified amount with an injector.
Lubrication Manner Apply lubricant so as to fill in the bands inside HOLDER, OIL Slide in CR unit to SHAFT, CR. Apply lubricant grease to the dent
Lubrication Manner
PAD of SLIDER, CR just before SLIDER, CR goes into GUIDE
BOARD, CR.
Note ---
Note ---
CR Unit Lubrication Point
Lubrication Point

\
Part Name PULLEY, DRIVEN UNIT Part Name PAPER GUIDE, LOWER UNIT
Bearings on HOLDER, PULLEY, CR where they contact with the Lubrication Point Two hooks of Shaft Retard Reset
Lubrication Point
shaft of PUSH, PULLEY, DRIVEN
Amount  2 x 3 mm x 2 points
Amount  2 x 2 mm x 2 points
Note ---
Note ---
Lubrication Points
Lubrication Points

CHAPTER
6
APPENDIX

6.1 Block Wiring Diagram

6.1.1 Main Body
㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㪙㫆㫏㪉㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉
㪧㪝㩷㪜㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪜㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㪪㫌㫇㫇㫆㫉㫋㪙㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㫃㪼㫊㫊㩷㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㫀㫅㪾㩷

㪋㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪈 .'&$QCTF
㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
%QPVTQN
2CPGN
$QCTF 㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪎㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪊㪈㪍
㪊㪉㪋㪉
㪉㪌㪈㪈㪚㪥㪍㪇㪉㪚㪥㪍㪇㪈
㪚㪥㪉㪚㪥㪊㪇㪎㪚㪥㪊㪈㪌
㪚㪥㪈
㪍
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪍
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪚㪸㫊㫊㪼㫋㫋㪼㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
57$&$QCTF
㪉㪊
㪋㪚㪥㪊㪈㪊㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪣㫆㪺㫂㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪥㪍㪇㪎
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪊㪊㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪏㪉
㪋
㪚㪥㪊
57$%$QCTF 㪊
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪌
㪧㪝㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪝㪼㪼㪻㫀㫅㪾㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪊
㪚㪥㪍㪇㪍
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪐
㪘㪪㪝㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪉
㪉㫅㪻㩷㪧㪜㩷㪚㪥㪊㪇㪉㪊
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪜㫄㫇㫋㫐㩷㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪩㪼㪸㫉㩷㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪥㪍㪇㪌
㪉
.'&$QCTF 㪚㪥㪊㪈㪈㪏
㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈
㪉
㪋㪊㪋㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇㪚㪥㪊㪈㪋
㪚㪥㪊㪈㪉㪘㪫㪚㩷㪜㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㪉㪋
㪘㪫㪚㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㪚㪥㪍㪇㪊㪚㪥㪍㪇㪋
㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷
㪘㫊㫊㫀㫊㫋㩷㪩㫆㫃㫃㪼㫉㩷㪫㪿㫀㪺㫂㫅㪼㫊㫊㩷
㪛㪼㪺㫆㫄㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㩷㪉
㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉
#+&$QCTF
㪊㪧㪜㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪉㪈㪇
㪐
㪚㪥㪈
㪘㪧㪞㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪼㫉㩷㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪋㪉㪊㪊㪋㪉
㪚㪥㪉㪉㪍㪚㪥㪉㪉㪐㪚㪥㪉㪉㪏㪚㪥㪉㪉㪈㪚㪥㪉㪈㪈㪚㪥㪉㪇㪎㪚㪥㪉㪇㪍
㪛㪼㪺㫆㫄㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫆㫅㩷㪧㫌㫄㫇㩷㪜㪺㫆㫉㪻㪼㫉㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪫㪿㫀㪺㫂㫅㪼㫊㫊㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪈
㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪝㪘㪥
㪚㪩㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉
㪪㫌㪺㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪝㪸㫅㪊㪋㪉㪊㪊㪚㪥㪉㪇㪌㪁㪉
㪩㫆㫃㫃㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪥㪉㪈㪉㪚㪥㪉㪊㪊㪚㪥㪉㪊㪉㪚㪥㪉㪈㪎㪚㪥㪉㪇㪐㪚㪥㪉㪇㪋
㪘㪪㪝㩷㪪㫌㪹㩷
㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪝㫉㫆㫅㫋㩷㪚㫆㫍㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪮㫀㫇㪼㫉㪂㪚㪸㫇㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪌
㪚㪥㪉㪊㪈
㪋
㪚㪥㪉㪉㪌
㪋
㪚㪥㪉㪉㪎
㪊
㪚㪥㪉㪈㪍
㪊
㪚㪥㪉㪇㪏
㪋
㪚㪥㪉㪈㪋
㪉
㪚㪥㪉㪈㪊
㪩㪼㫋㪸㫉㪻㩷㪩㫆㫃㫃㪼㫉㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
/CKP$QCTF
㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪉
㪚㪥㪈㪈
㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪌㪊㪊㪋㪉㪈㪍㪈㪍
㪚㪥㪎㪇㪇㪚㪥㪎㪇㪇
㪚㪥㪉㪊㪇㪚㪥㪉㪉㪇㪚㪥㪉㪈㪌㪚㪥㪉㪈㪏㪚㪥㪉㪈㪐㪊㪋㪚㪥㪊㪇㪇
㪉㪉㪐
㪜㪻㪾㪼㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪥㪏
㪜㪻㪾㪼㩷㪩㪼㫃㪼㪸㫊㪼㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐
㪚㪥㪉㪇㪉
㪉㪊㪚㪥㪌㪇㪇 0GVYQTM$QCTF
㪜㫁㪼㪺㫋㩷㪪㫋㪸㫉㫋㩷㪮㪿㪼㪼㫃㫊㩷㪧㫆㫊㫀㫋㫀㫆㫅㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪉㪉㪉㪌
㪚㪥㪉㪇㪉㪚㪥㪐
㪌㪋㪉㪌㪌
㪚㪥㪉㪊㪌㪚㪥㪉㪉㪊㪚㪥㪉㪉㪉㪋㪇㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇㪊㪋㪚㪥㪉㪇㪈㪏㪚㪥㪎㪇㪈㪚㪥㪎㪇㪈
㪧㫀㪺㫂㫌㫇㩷㪬㫅㫀㫋㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪥㪊㪇㪈
57$$$QCTF 㪋㪇㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪊㪋㪚㪥㪉㪇㪇㪚㪥㪎
㪉
㪎㪚㪥㪉㪊㪍㪤㪸㫀㫅㫋㪼㫅㪸㫅㪺㪼㩷㪙㫆㫏㪈㩷㪟㫆㫃㪻㪼㫉㪚㪥㪈㪇
㪋㪇㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪉㪊㪚㪥㪋㪇㪇㪉㪇㪚㪥㪈㪚㪥㪉
㪚㫌㫋㫋㪼㫉㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㩷㪘㫊㫊㫐㪚㪥㪉㪇㪇㪚㪥㪉㪇㪈㪚㪥㪍
㪊㪋㪊㪋
㪚㪥㪍㪇㪇
㪬㪪㪙㩷㪠㪆㪝
㪉
㪉㪊㪚㪥㪏㪣㪼㪽㫋㩷㪠㪚㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪈 %QNQT/GCUWTGOGPV
*'#&%$QCTF &GXKEG
㪙㪦㪯㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㪝㪘㪥㪈
㪚㪥㪎㪚㪥㪍㪚㪥㪌㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪊㪚㪥㪉
㪚㪪㪠㪚
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉㩷
㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉㪠㫅㫂㩷㪚㪸㫉㫋㫉㫀㪻㪾㪼
㪉㪋㪇
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪌㪚㪥㪈㪇㪇
57$$QCTF
㪊㪌㪊㪋㪊㪉
㪚㪥㪈㪇㪍㪚㪥㪈㪇㪉㪚㪥㪈㪇㪊㪚㪥㪈㪇㪈㪚㪥㪈㪇㪋㪚㪥㪎
㪉㪊㪩㫀㪾㪿㫋㩷㪠㪚㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪥㪈
㪘㪚㪶㪠㪥㪧㫆㫎㪼㫉㩷㪪㫌㫇㫇㫃㫐㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
*'#&$$QCTF
㪚㪥㪍㪚㪥㪌㪚㪥㪋㪚㪥㪊㪚㪥㪉
㪉㪇
㪚㪥㪈
㪚㪥㪈
㪧㪞䇭㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪚㪪㪠㪚
㪧㪮㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉㪠㫅㫂㩷㪤㪸㫉㫂㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪚㪩㩷㪜㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉
㪧㫉㫀㫅㫋㪿㪼㪸㪻
㪪㪼㫃㪼㪺㫋㫆㫉㩷㪠㫅㫂㩷㪚㪸㫉㫋㫉㫀㪻㪾㪼
㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 475

6.1.2 SpectroProofer
㪤㪸㫀㫅㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪚㪥㪉㪚㪥㪎
㪎㪋
㪬㪪㪙
㪈㪉
㪈㪉
㪬㪪㪙
㪚㫆㫃㫆㫉㩷㪤㪼㪸㫊㫌㫉㪼㫄㪼㫅㫋㩷
㪛㪼㫍㫀㪺㪼
㪚㫆㫆㫃㫀㫅㪾㩷㪝㪸㫅
㪫㪿㪼㫉㫄㫀㫊㫋㫆㫉
㪉㪚㪥㪉
㪚㪩㩷㪟㪧㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪛㪚㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪋㪚㪥㪈
㪙㪸㪺㫂㫀㫅㪾㩷㪪㪼㫅㫊㫆㫉
㪋
㪍
㪬㪪㪙㪄㪙㪚㪥㪎㪚㪥㪉㪉
㪚㪥㪊
㪉㪉㪊
㪚㪥㪈㪌㪚㪥㪈㪈㪚㪥㪈㪇
㪌
㪚㪥㪉
㪬㪪㪙㪄㪘
㪬㪪㪙㪄㪘㪤㪸㫀㫅㪄㪚㩷㪙㫆㪸㫉㪻
㪚㪥㪋
㪉㪋
㪚㪥㪈㪋㪁㪚㪥㪈㪏㪚㪥㪈㪐
㪋㪌
㪚㪥㪉㪋㪚㪥㪈
㪜㫅㪺㫆㪻㪼㫉㩷㪽㫆㫉㩷㫇㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪧㪸㫇㪼㫉㩷㪧㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㪚㪩㩷㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉

㫇㫉㪼㫊㫊㫀㫅㪾㩷㫄㫆㫋㫆㫉㪤㫆㫋㫆㫉
APPENDIX Block Wiring Diagram 476

6.2 Connection Diagram 6.2.2 Electric Circuit Components 1
10
6.2.1 Housing SUB-D Board
Power Supply Board
LED Board
SUB-C Board
1
HEAD_C Board
2 7 SUB-C Board 1
3 2
4
8
Control
Panel Board 7 Network Board
3
6
5 4
AID Board 5 6 Main Board
SUB-B Board
HEAD_B Board Main Board Cable No. Connection

1 LED Board (CN3) LED Board (CN3)
SUB-B Board
2 Control Panel Board LED Board (CN11
Cable No. Connection 3 LED Board (CN1) Main Board (CN9)

1 Left IC Sensor HEAD_C Board (CN3) 4 AID Board (CN1) Main Board (CN8)
2 Printer Cover Sensor SUB-B Board (CN226) 5 SUB-B Board (CN202) Main Board (CN202)
3 Printer Cover Sensor SUB-B Board (CN225) 6 SUB-D Board Main Board (CM600)
4 Right IC Sensor HEAD_B Board (CN7) Network Board (CN701) Main Board (CN701)
7
5 HEAD_B Board (CN1) Main Board (CN500)
8 Power Supply Board (CN1) Main Board (CN1)
6 Rear Unit Sensor SUB-C Board (CN314)
9 SUB-C Board (CN301) Main Board (CN301)
7 HEAD_C Board (CN1) Main Board (CN400)
10 Network Board (CN701) Main Board (CN700)
APPENDIX Connection Diagram 477

6.2.3 Electric Circuit Components 2 6.2.4 Carriage Mechanism
SUB Board 1
SUB-C Board
2
1
SUB Board
SUB-B Board
3
2 3 Main Board
SUB-B Board
Cable No. Connection Cable No. Connection

1 SUB Board (CN100) Main Board (CN100) 1 APG Sensor SUB Board (CN104)
2 SUB-B Board (CN200) Main Board (CN201) 2 CR Encoder Main Board (CN102)
3 SUB-B Board (CN201) Main Board (CN200) 3 CR Motor SUB-B Board (CN204)
4 SUB-C Board (CN300) Main Board (CN300) 4 APG Motor Assy SUB-B Board (CN207/CN206)

6.2.5 Paper Feed Mechanism 1 6.2.6 Paper Feed Mechanism 2

SUB Board 3 2
2 1
4
1
7 3
5
6 SUB-C Board
SUB-B Board

1 Paper Thickness Sensor 2 SUB-B Board (CN209) 1 PF Encoder SUB-C Board (CN303)
2 Paper Thickness Sensor 1 SUB-B Board (Cn208) 2 Release Motor SUB-C Board (CN305)
3 Suction Fan SUB-B Board (CN212)
3 Release Assy SUB-C Board (CN307)
4 PW Sensor SUB Board (CN103)
4 PF Motor SUB-C Board (CN302)
5 Edge Sensor SUB-B Board (CN220)
6 Edge Release Assy SUB-B Board (CN218/CN219)
7 PE Sensor SUB-B Board (CN210)
8 2nd PE Sensor SUB-B Board (CN211)

6.2.7 ASF Unit 6.2.8 ROLL Unit
3 2 1
2
4
SUB-B Board
1 SUB-D Board
to SUB-C Board
7
5
3
6 6
8 4 5
7 to SUB-B Board
SUB-C Board

1 Eject Start Wheels Position Sensor SUB-B Board (CN235) 1 Roll Feeding Motor SUB-D Board (CN601/CN602)
2 Pickup Unit Sensor SUB-B Board (CN215) 2 Roll Sensor SUB-D Board (CN605)
3 Assist Roller Sensor SUB-B Board (CN217) 3 Roll Eject Support Sensor SUB-C Board (CN308)
4 Retard Roller Sensor SUB-B Board (CN216)
4 Roll Unit Sensor SUB-B Board (CN227)
5 ASF Sub Motor Assy SUB-B Board (CN213/CN214)
5 Roll Unit Sensor SUB-D Board (CN606)
6 Paper Empty Sensor SUB-B Board (CN221)
6 ATC Motor SUB-D Board (CN603/CN604)
7 ASF Motor Assy SUB-C Board (CN311/CN312)
7 Roll Lock Sensor SUB-D Board (CN607)
8 Paper Cassette Sensor SUB-C Board (CN313)

6.2.9 Cutter Unit 6.2.10 Ink System Mechanism 1

SUB Board
1
SUB-B Board
SUB-C Board
2
2
3
SUB-B Board

1 Cutter HP Sensor SUB-B Board (CN315) 1 Ink Mark Sensor SUB Board (CN101)
2 Cutter Motor Assy SUB-C Board (CN222/CN223) 2 Maintenance Box 1 Holder SUB-B Board (CN236)
3 Decompression Pump SUB-B Board (CN232)

6.2.11 Ink System Mechanism 2 6.2.12 SpectroProofer

SUB Board
2
3 1
Main-C Board
3 4
Main Board
4 SUB-B Board

1 SUB Board (CN100) Main Board (CN100) 1 CR HP Sensor Main-C Board (CN10)
2 Print Head Main Board (CN101/CN102) 2 Encoder for paper pressing motor Main-C Board (CN22)
3 IS Unit SUB-B Board (CN228/CN229) 3 Thermistor Main-C Board (CN11)
4 IS Unit SUB-B Board (CN230/CN231) 4 Thermistor Main-C Board (CN15)
5 Paper Pressing Motor Main-C Board (CN18)
6 CR Motor Main-C Board (CN19)

6.3 Panel Menu Map

This section provides the map of executable menus on the Control Panel.
APPENDIX Panel Menu Map 483

User Menu Map (SC-P5000 Series) Maintenance Nozzle Check Head Alignment
: Default setting Nozzle Check Printless Nozzle Check Paper Thickness

Head Cleaning Print Check Pattern Alignment
Head Alignment
Adjust Cut Position Head Cleaning Adjust Cut Position
Change Black Ink Check And Clean Nozzle -3.0mm to 0.0mm to 3.0mm
All Nozzles
Select Nozzles
Change Black Ink
To Matte Black/To Photo Black
Paper Paper Type Print Paper List

Paper Type Photo Paper Print
Custom Paper Proofing Paper
Print Paper List Fine Art Paper Roll Paper Remaining
Roll Paper Remaining Matte Paper
Remaining Paper Setup
Cut Sheet Remaining Plain Paper
Roll Paper Length
Roll Paper Setup Others
Roll Length Alert
Refresh Margin Custom Paper
No Paper Selected
Cut Sheet Remaining
Sheet Number
Paper Number (1-10)
Sheet Number Alert
Paper Number 1 to Paper Number 10
Roll Paper Setup

Custom Paper
Print Page Line
Select Reference Paper
Roll Paper Margin
Platen Gap
Auto Roll Feeding
Thickness Pattern
Paper Feed Adjust A
Refresh Margin
Paper Feed Adjust B
ON
Drying Time
OFF
Paper Suction
Set Roll Paper Tension
Remove Skew
Printer Setup Platen Gap Print Nozzle Pattern

Platen Gap Narrow Every 10 pages
Paper Size Check Every Page
Standard
Paper Skew Check OFF
Wide
Auto Nozzle Check
Timer Cleaning Wider
Auto Black Ink Change
Print Nozzle Pattern Widest
Manual
Menu
Auto Black Ink Change Auto
Maintenance
BK Ink Change Setting Paper Size Check
Paper
Calibration Setting ON BK Ink Change Setting
Printer Setup
Printer Status Initialize Settings OFF Normal
Quick
SpectroProofer
Network Setup Paper Skew Check
Preferences Calibration Setting
ON
Administrator Menu ON
OFF
OFF
Auto Nozzle Check Initialize Settings

Auto Cleaning Setting YES
Auto Cleaning Times
NO
Timer Cleaning
OFF
6 to 60 hours
Printer Status Firmware Version Total Prints

Firmware Version xxxxxx.x_xx.xxxx 000000 pages
Print Status Sheet
Calibration Date Print Status Sheet Print Job Information
Total Prints Print Print
Print Job Information
Calibration Date
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
SpectroProofer Menu
SProofer Status
Network Setup Menu Network Settings Print Status Sheet

Network Settings Hide Print
IP Address Setting Show
IP, SM, DG Setting
Print Status Sheet
IP Address Setting Init Network Setting
Init Network Setting
Auto Execute
Panel
IP, SM, DG Setting

000,000,000,000～255.255.255.255
Preferences Menu Language Maintenance Alert

Language Japanese Disable
Length Units English Ink
Temperature Units French
Maintenance Box
Maintenance Alert Italian
Ink Or Maint Box
Cut Sheet Remaining German
Paper
Sleep Mode Portuguese
All
Power Management Spanish
Dutch
Cut Sheet Remaining
Russian
OFF
Korean ON
Chinese
Sleep Mode
Length Units 5 min,　
15 min, 　60 min, 　
120 min, 1
　80 min
Metric
Feet/Inch
Power Management
Power Off Timer
Temperature Units
Time To Off
˚C
Maintenance Mode ˚F
Administrator Menu Powerful Cleaning Clock Setting

Powerful Cleaning All Nozzles
Clock Setting C/VM YY/MM/DD HH:MM
Reset All Settings PK(MK)/LY
OR/GR
LLK/Y Reset All Settings
VLM/LC Execute
Maintenance Mode
CUSTOM
CUSTOM
0～255
User Menu Map (Epson Stylus Pro 4900/Epson Stylus Pro 4910)
: Default setting
PLATEN GAP REFRESH MARGIN
NARROW ON
STANDARD OFF
WIDE
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK
WIDER
ON: PERIODICALLY
WIDEST
ON: EVERY JOB
PAGE LINE OFF

PRINTER SETUP
ON
PLATEN GAP PRINT NOZZLE PATTERN
PAGE LINE OFF
OFF
ROLL PAPER MARGIN
ROLL PAPER MARGIN ON: EVERY PAGE
PAPER SIZE CHECK
DEFAULT ON: EVERY 10 PAGES
PAPER SKEW CHECK
REFRESH MARGIN TOP/BOTTOM 15mm
AUTO NOZZLE CHECK TOP 35/BOTTOM 15mm CHANGE BLACK INK
PRINT NOZZLE PATTERN
- MANUAL
3mm
CHANGE BLACK INK AUTO
15mm
AUTO ROLL FEEDING
INITIALIZE SETTINGS AUTO ROLL FEEDING
PAPER SIZE CHECK
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
INITIALIZE SETTINGS
PAPER SKEW CHECK
EXECUTE
ON
OFF
TEST PRINT STATUS SHEET JOB INFORMATION

STATUS SHEET PRINT PRINT
NETWORK STATUS SHEET
NETWORK STATUS SHEET CUSTOM PAPER
JOB INFORMATION
PRINT PRINT
CUSTOM PAPER
MAINTENANCE CUTTER ADJUSTMENT CLOCK SETTING

CUTTER ADJUSTMENT -3.0mm - 0.0mm - +3.0mm MM/DD/YY HH:MM
CLOCK SETTING
VERSION JOB HISTORY

PRINTER STATUS xxxxxxx,x.xx,xxxx No. 0 - No.9
VERSION INK　 xx.xml
PAPER　xxxxxx cm2
INK LEVEL INK LEVEL
MAINTENANCE BOX (INK COLOR) [E　　　　　　　　　F]
TOP MENU **********
JOB HISTORY TOTAL PRINTS
PRINTER SETUP TOTAL PRINTS nnnnnn PAGES
TEST PRINT MAINTENANCE BOX
EDM (or myEpson Printer) STATUS
MAINTENANCE 1 [E　　　　　　　　　F]
**********
EDM (or myEpson Printer) STATUS
PRINTER STATUS 2 [E　　　　　　　　　F]
********** NOT STARTED, DISABLED, ENABLED
PAPER SETUP
LAST UPLOADED (NOT UPLOADED),
HEAD ALIGNMENT
MM/DD/YY HH:MM
NETWORK SETUP GMT
SPECTROPROOFER
ROLL PAPER REMAINING CUSTOM PAPER PAPER No.

REMAINING PAPER SETUP PAPER No.1 PAPER TYPE
ROLL PAPER LENGTH PAPER No.2 PLATEN GAP
ROLL LENGTH ALERT PAPER No.3 THICKNESS PATTERN
PAPER No.4 PAPER FEED ADJUST A
PAPER SETUP
CUT SHEET REMAINING PAPER No.5 PAPER FEED ADJUST B
ROLL PAPER REMAINING
CUT SHEET REMAINING SHEET NUMBER PAPER No.6 DRYING TIME
PAPER TYPE SHEET NUMBER ALERT PAPER No.7 PAPER SUCTION

CUSTOM PAPER PAPER No.8 SET ROLL PAPER TENSION
PAPER TYPE PAPER No.9 REMOVE SKEW
Photo Paper
PAPER No.10
Proofing Paper
Fine Art Paper
Matte Paper
Plain Paper
-
CUSTOM PAPER
NO PAPER SELECTED
HEAD ALIGNMENT PAPER THICKNESS ALIGNMENT

PAPER THICKNESS PAPER TYPE AUTO
ALIGNMENT PAPER THICKNESS MANUAL
NETWORK SETUP NETWORK SETTINGS BONJOUR

NETWORK SETTINGS HIDE ON
IP ADDRESS SETTING SHOW OFF
IP,SM,DG SETTING
BONJOUR IP ADDRESS SETTING WSD
WSD AUTO OFF
INIT NETWORK SETTINGS PANEL ON
IP,SM,DG SETTING INIT NETWORK SETTING

000,000,000,000 - 255.255.255.255 EXECUTE
SPECTROPROOFER
STATUS INFORMATION
Maintenance Mode Map LANGUAGE CUT SHEET REMAINING

JAPANESE OFF
ENGLISH
ON
FRENCH
ITALIAN
SLEEP MODE
GERMAN
5 MINUTES, 15 MINUTES , 60 MINUTES,
PORTUGUESE
120 MINUTES, 180 MINUTES
SPANISH
TOP MENU
DUTCH
LANGUAGE
POWER MANAGEMENT
LENGTH UNITS KOREAN
POWER OFF TIMER
TEMPERATURE UNITS CHINESE
AUTO CLEANING TIMES TIME TO OFF
MAINTENANCE ALERT LENGTH UNITS
CUT SHEET REMAINING METRIC DEFAULT PANEL
SLEEP MODE FEET/INCH EXECUTE
POWER MANAGEMENT
TEMPERATURE UNITS
DEFAULT PANEL CUSTOM
℃
CUSTOM 0 - 255
F
AUTO CLEANING TIMES

1　,　
　　2 ,　
3
MAINTENANCE ALERT
Disable
INK
MAINTENANCE BOX
INK OR MAINT BOX
PAPERS
ALL
Serviceman Mode Map
Mecha Adjustment LCD RGB Check

Paper Red
SELF TESTING SELF TESTING Green
RearAD
Mecha Adjustment CR Un Cap Blue
Life LCD RGB Check
Panel Check
Sensor Check
Life CR PG
CR PG Narrow
PF H to F Speed Feed Speed 1
Standard
RLS F to H Speed PS1 Wide
APG Page Size PS2 Wider
Cutter PS3
Fan Widest
GS PS4
Life Count
Display Count
H to F Speed
PF Feed Speed 2 240 CPS
Feed Amount 1 PS1 300 CPS
Feed Speed 1 PS2 500 CPS
Feed Amount 2 PS3
Feed Speed 2 PS4 F to H Speed
Wait 250 CPS
Fan GS Change Position 1 300 CPS
GS Change Position 1 RLS 500 CPS
GS Change Position 2 Giza
Life Count Koro
RLS GS Change Position 2

Wait 1 RLS
Wait 2 Giza
Life Count Koro
APG PG
PG Narrow
Wait Standard
Life Count Wide
Wider
Widest
Cutter GS Change Position 1

Length RLS
Return Length Giza
GS Change Position 1 Koro
Wait GS Change Position 2
Life Count RLS
Giza
Koro
GS
Wait 1
Wait 2
Wait 3
Life Count
6.4 Part names used in this manual Table 6-1. Conversion Table
Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
To make it easier to locate the target part from its part name, this manual uses the part (Ch3 sec.No.)
names different from the ASP part names. The table below shows the conversion of the Left IC Cover Frame/ GUIDE,IC,LEFT/GUIDE,IC,RIGHT;B/
part names used in this manual and the corresponding ASP part names. Right IC Cover Frame/ COVER,SW/COVER,SW *1
3.4.2.8
Left IC Sensor/Right IC GUIDE,IC,LEFT/GUIDE,IC,RIGHT/
Note "*1": Corresponding to SC-P5000 Series.
Sensor COVER,SW/COVER,SW*2
"*2": Corresponding to Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910.
COVER,FRONT UNIT,ASP *1
Front Cover 3.4.2.9
Table 6-1. Conversion Table COVER,FRONT,ASSY,ASP *2
Ref. Front Cover Sensor LEAF SENSOR 3.4.2.10
Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.)
HOUSING,REAR,LOWER;B*1
COVER,PRINTER,UNIT,ASP *1 Rear Cover 3.4.2.11
3.4.2.1 HOUSING,REAR,LOWER *2
Printer Cover 　
COVER,PRINTER,UNIT ESL,ASP *2
PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE UNIT ESL,ASP
*1
HOUSING,FRONT,UPPER;B,ASP *1
Upper Front Cover 3.4.2.2 Housing Rear Unit 3.4.2.12
HOUSING,FRONT,UPPER *2 PAPER GUIDE,MIDDLE UNIT ESL,ASP
*2
Printer Cover Sensor LEAF SENSOR 3.4.2.2
Rear Unit Sensor LEAF SENSOR 3.4.2.13
PANEL UNIT.;B,ASP *1
Control Panel Cover 3.4.2.4 Board Tray N/A 3.4.2.14
HOUSING,PANEL,ASSY,ASP *2
Housing
HOUSING,FRONT,MIDDLE;B*1
HOUSING,SIDE,LEFT UNIT,ASP *1 Media Eject Cover 3.4.2.15
Left Cover 3.4.2.5 HOUSING,FRONT,MIDDLE*2
HOUSING,SIDE,LEFT UNIT ESL,ASP *2
CR Cover N/A 3.4.2.16
COVER,MAINTENANCE;B,ASP *1
Right Upper Cover 3.4.2.6 Mid-Right Cover/Mid-
COVER,MAINTENANCE;B *2 N/A 3.4.2.17
Left Cover
HOUSING,SIDE,RIGHT UNIT,ASP *1
Left Roll Cover/Right Roll
Right Cover 3.4.2.7 N/A 3.4.2.18
HOUSING,SIDE,RIGHT UNIT ESL,ASP Cover
*2
APPENDIX Part names used in this manual 487

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
Main Board BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.1 2nd PE Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.5.7
Network Board BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.3.2 PW Sensor N/A 3.4.5.8
Power Supply Box N/A 3.4.3.3 Paper Thickness Sensor1,
PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.5.9
2
Power Supply Board BOARD ASSY.,POWER SUPPLY 3.4.3.4 Paper Feed
Mechanism Release Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,RELEASE,DRIVEN 3.4.5.10
SUB Board BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER 3.4.3.5
Electric
Release Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.5.11
Circuit SUB-B Board BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.6
Components Edge Release Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.5.12
SUB-C Board BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.7
Edge Sensor N/A 3.4.5.13
SUB-D Board N/A 3.4.3.8
ASF Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF 3.4.6.1
AID Board BOARD ASSY.,SUB 3.4.3.9
ASF Sub Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.6.2
LED Board BOARD ASSY.,PANEL 3.4.3.10
Pickup Roller SHAFT,LEVER,PICK UP ASSY ASP 3.4.6.3
Control Panel Board LCD MODULE 3.4.3.11
Assist Roller Sensor/
CR Motor MOTOR ASSY.,CR 3.4.4.1
ASF Unit Retard Roller Sensor/ PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.6.4
CR Encoder N/A 3.4.4.2 Pickup Unit Sensor
CR Scale SCALE,CR 3.4.4.3 Retard Roller ROLLER,RETARD.,ASP 3.4.6.5
Ink Mark Sensor BOARD ASSY.,INK MARK 3.4.4.4 Paper Empty Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.6.6
Carriage
CR Unit CARRIAGE,UNIT ESL,ASP Paper Cassette Sensor LEAF SENSOR 3.4.6.7
Mechanism 3.4.4.5
CR Belt N/A Roll Unit Sensor N/A 3.4.7.1
APG Motor Assy FRAME ASSY.,APG,UNIT ESL,ASP 3.4.4.6 Roll Lock Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.7.2
APG Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.4.7 ATC Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF 3.4.7.3
Oil pad holder N/A 3.4.4.8 Roll Feeding Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF,SUB 3.4.7.4
ROLL Unit
PF Motor MOTOR ASSY.,PF 3.4.5.1 Paper Guide Sensor N/A 3.4.7.5
PF Encoder BOARD ASSY.,ENCODER,PF 3.4.5.2 Roll Feeding Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.7.6
Paper FeedPF Scale SCALE,PF,ASP 3.4.5.3 Antistatic Cloth Unit GROUNDING,PLATE,PF*1 3.4.7.7
Mechanism PF Belt TIMING BELT,PF 3.4.5.4 Antistatic Cloth HOLDER,ANTISTATIC CLOTH,ASP *1 3.4.7.7
Suction Fan FAN ASSY.,ASP 3.4.5.5
PE Sensor N/A 3.4.5.6

Table 6-1. Conversion Table Table 6-1. Conversion Table

Ref. Ref.
Part name used in this manual ASP part name Part name used in this manual ASP part name
(Ch3 sec.No.) (Ch3 sec.No.)
Cutter Cover COVER,IC,LEFT UNIT ESL,ASP 3.4.8.1 Upper Cover HOUSING,UPPER,SPM,ASP 3.4.11.1
Cutter Motor Assy MOTOR ASSY.,ASF 3.4.8.2 I/F Cover COVER,LEFT,SPM 3.4.11.2
Cutter Unit Cutter HP Sensor HARNESS,DETECTOR,CUTTER 3.4.8.3 Right Cover HOUSING,RIGHT,SPM,ASP 3.4.11.3
Housing
FRAME,GUIDE,CUTTER,UNIT Left Cover HOUSING,LEFT,SPM,ASP 3.4.11.4
Cutter Unit 3.4.8.4
ESL,ASP
Front Cover COVER,FRONT,SPM,ASP 3.4.11.5
SELECTOR,UNIT CF66 ESL,ASP *1
Ink Selector Assy 3.4.9.1 Magnet Latch MAGNET LATCH 3.4.11.6
SELECTOR,UNIT.E,ASP *2
Main-C Board BOARD ASSY.,MAIN 3.4.12.1
Printhead PRINT HEAD 3.4.9.2
Encoder for paper pressing
BOARD ASSY.,ENCORDER,SC;B 3.4.12.2
IS Unit PUMP,UNIT,ASP 3.4.9.3 motor
HOLDER,WIPER & WIPER CLEANER Thermistor THERMISTOR,SPM,ASP 3.4.12.3
Wiper 3.4.9.4
ASSY ASP
Drying Fan FAN,HEATER,ASP 3.4.12.4
Color
Wiper Cleaner N/A 3.4.9.5
Measurement MOTOR ASSY.,PAPER
Paper Pressing Motor 3.4.12.5
Head Cap CAP,HEAD,LARGE ASSY ASP 3.4.9.6 Device Parts PRESSING,ASSY,ASP
HOLDER,IC,RIGHT,UNIT;CF66,ASP *1 CR HP Sensor PHOTO INTERUPTER,TLP1243(C8) 3.4.12.6
Ink System Home (Right) Side 3.4.9.7
Mechanism Cartridge Holder HOLDER,IC,RIGHT,UNIT,ASP *2 Backing Sensor DETECTOR,LEAF,B2 3.4.12.7
HOLDER,IC,LEFT,UNIT;CF66,ASP *1 CR Motor MOTOR ASSY.,CR,SPM,ASP 3.4.12.8
Full (Left) Side Cartridge
3.4.9.8
Holder HOLDER,IC,LEFT,UNIT,ASP *2 EJ Planet Lever LEVER,PLANET,SPM,EJ DRIVE 3.4.12.9
Maintenance box 1 Holder N/A 3.4.9.9
Ink Tubes TUBE ASSY ASP 3.4.9.10
Head FFC Harness Motor CR Assy ASP 3.4.9.11
Right Holder FFC N/A 3.4.9.12
Left Holder FFC N/A 3.4.9.13
Decompression Pump DECOMPRESSION,PUMP,UNIT,ASP 3.4.9.14
Color Color Measurement
N/A 3.4.10.1
Measurement Device
Device and
Backing Backing/White calibration
N/A 3.4.10.2
Replacement tile holder

6.5 Exploded Diagram/Parts List

For the exploded diagrams and parts list, refer to Service Parts Information.
APPENDIX Exploded Diagram/Parts List 490


EPson SC P5k - SM

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

EPson SC P5k - SM

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

SERVICE MANUAL

Large Format Color Inkjet Printer

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Copyright © 2016 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

Revision Date of Issue Description

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

6.2.4 Carriage Mechanism ................................................................................ 478

SE Group Confidential (Related Staff Only)

 Supports very large-sized paper Matte Black MK (Matte Black)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 16

 Lower running cost  Ink configuration

 Media handling GR LLK Y LC VLM OR MK VM LK C PK

 Supports a variety of media  Violet set (SC-P5000 Series)

 The latest-type RIP

 Violet set (SC-P5000 Series)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 17

Figure 1-1. External View (Main body)

Figure 1-2. External View (SpectroProofer)

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Product Description 18

1.2 Basic Specifications 1.2.2 Electric Specifications

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 19

1.2.3 Ink Specifications 1.2.4 General Specifications

Note "*": SC-P5000 Series only

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 20

RTC backup battery 5 years or longer ---

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Basic Specifications 21

1.3 Printing Specifications 1.3.2 Paper Specification

Paper size 2-inch core: 203 to 432 mm x to 45 m

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 22

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 23

1.3.2.2 Designated Paper

Note "*1": OK!: Recommended for borderless printing

LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 24

Table 1-1. Designated Roll Paper List

329 13 LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LLK

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 25

Table 1-1. Designated Roll Paper List

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 26

Table 1-2. Designated Roll Paper List

329 13 Epson Stylus Pro 4900_4910

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 27

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 28

Table 1-3. Designated Cut Sheet List

LLK ink set: SC-P5000_Series_LGY Baryta.icc

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 29

 Epson Stylus Pro 4900/4910

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 30

Table 1-4. Designated Cut Sheet List

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 31

Table 1-4. Designated Cut Sheet List

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 32

254 to 432mm 3mm 3mm

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Printing Specifications 33